aire
eer
es
wee 2 “ §, “
«si ‘ ; ¢ pails arse ae
TAA NE oo (Vy)
sera
pean ovat
ae tein
e -
pera
Yeoeesat oe J
Sra ee tes cae
WiKi APS BINS 7
ayia aga
noriot atid»
eS Vas at rads,
ae 2a Awan
ed veg etree”
Apa ESS
vane arb oat
yas ed: oy eae id dae
ea eee sees Te
Perrys FAY Ce ore
evn tpeeiens t
Noha Tee
ek Fao Y ae a
en Vie oR
Sy uve Rbars |
oly ey aateree ees
6b AEN eH CLS
a Bish gow ae ree ete mS eT SET
ogy ie LIAL use Ve CARES SS vase
4 ibaa NE Fe RN RE
DUAN bd fe RATE EB
TpAe ae eR SIE Perera gree ay jae eitae ah
% preaereteop pe oEh
poise
es hose Utaa eld
Devs eS Dy eb Sass be
Sete ba EM SE
" ves, is
vee cay been bE ERE aay
AAC a a We: Ave EV UTES Uprieacute nen cede:
cecal gie SRE eo eI Oy geil
A CONS UBL EE Supa se
‘ *
nS
aye ek oh
ag heg ae et
ew Ly) wee
Cans ere yt HN IAN
oe BO MUNN Mae NEC el
eRe AesU See aN ANTE
RUN fib phate 9) ;
ORL VENI OG IEEE NS
sf Ny
Peas at
Wwe whey ye"
tenn vere
sb Har
iw ea Hay a
re ETE RN
peel Bs
ehee Hy aa Ae
LIBRARIES
NOILNLILSN
NOILNLILSN
LIBRARIES
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
SJ1YVUSIT~ LIBRARIES
b +2 = a CL. 4
= mo. - a oo = WY NY or
= = a a a) iN a
ce Ye: Oo — O =
2 = a — ae s ay
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3!1Y¥VYUEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
z ~ + = fi 2 : e
< Gf
= w . = w = ow
ae .) \ = 70 se es
= > a NN ‘en > = >
_ Dw ~ SNS — Po) aa 5) Po)
ke — NY = _ = > a
S m AS = m : 2 m
— ” erage — ” a Ww
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I14¥VugII
z= ” = “. ” z 22) ;
= ; = Sa = Vin <x =
z A = oN = ay I Pa =
Oo 5G \ MM;
= zZ ES NS a A fe: is z
7 2 = 5 SS ay = >
pp NOILALILSNI ONVINOSHIINS = Sa 1YVug ae BRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILN
ay Z re Z a ) Z
: Z = Z = Vy."
< a _< et =n Uf) fo 75. 3
0 ed = w~ (es VM ihe A
=! | re aa
S on 3 se 3
al e3 =J Fa a =
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31YVuUdIT LIBRAR
a = ea z at z
a ‘oO o w oO
x a 2 = ~ EB
> — Ea be > =
a - = i \ . E
m nt m ” m ”
w = Ww = Hh Zz
yy NOWLNLILSNI SAIYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
= q S z ~~ Z Betty Ne
ee ‘S MP Ce Fe AS = = wW&
a +) hy ro} sf Bo es EN Na i ra) SWS
SY ff * 8G4F 2R& 2 ANN
2 7 = = “iy = NS Z =
in ee Pills LO ye | 2
_LIBRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOLLMLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS $2 1YVvy q 17
z uw < WW z it
== a” ee ”
a a. a oc er oc
on <3 rat, < we <
ker ox oo a = [0 af
— om = fre oe
S prs Z S) sa re) a
net iar :
NOILNLILSNI NYVINOSHLINS S3ZIYVHSIT LIBRARI Her SMITHSONIAN
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS
NOILNLILSN
~ = z - z
" = 2 a =
> 5 kK » de ree
7 = K zed =
w (ep) Y)
OD es = Oo 2
NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS SAIUVYEII_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
o2) wie
= < = sp tee ies WS =
ae > eS eT aN ‘3 ar
x 6 3 Dyp 5 Se
S © SGUoe = WO 8
2 = 2 “yp = WS 2
= ie =
SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3tuvVaddll LIBRA
INSTITUTION
SaluvugIy LIBRARI
INSTITUTION NOILALID
INSTITIITION NO?LINTV ITS
LIBRARIES
A)
S3'1uYvudl
NOILM
NVINOSHLIWS
NOILNLILSNI
re
oO
=
=a)
a
rf
Ww
Zz
LIBRAR
PG x
< ’,
S
79) We
= Se 3
— RN
= ‘ N
Fe a
LIBRARIES
Satay eels
i
NOILN LI:
NVINOSHLIWS
LIBRAR
NOILNLILSNI
” 2s o me cf
a = fa a ox =
oo = mam. = 'a8) PE
XS = Oo = O — °
al z= af | fen =u <_
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUEIT LIBRARIES
ad
pty
tL Upp
WINOSHLINS S3I1YVYUEIT LIBRARIES
Saluvugii
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
sg1uyyuali
INSTITUTION
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHI
NVINOSHLINS S31YVvVu¥dlt
MITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS Sa1u¥vudIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSO
w Zz
= yt < = ~~ iS 2 =
= wh iy ; = ne z XS ay Ay ar
SGye e | z Sof fg 2
= Gy Ee = z “iy i
MITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SJIYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSOF
Pad > eo te 2 0
Z : & WM = Z Seer
— Of Pal) SN NS — ao i y
= < an SK < za < de
cc RQ a Gyrigh,
: : 5 MAS E : o Vu
in = a S one 3 at ee
VINOSHLINS _S4 IYVvuag te LIBRARI Bes EON NOILALILSNI NVINOSHI
» Ze “>
O = O pe ge O =
= ee) = ow =< ow
= > = fea = S S&
= Z ee = = : AN
m m “ASS
ci a = ep) = (op) aa
wo
<=
=
SE
Ww
O
2
>
2
a Z | = .
= = GY), = “
z 2 Wy z \
ne Oo Wie fa 2 me
Ee = Mae =. N
i = Z
NOILNLILSNI
IVINOSHLINS S3l1YVYdI1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NVINOSH.
Cin
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
LIBRARIES
NOILALILSNI
NOILALILSNI
ff
4
Au
NOILALILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS SA3IYVYUYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSO
salyuvygin
Y4y,
Vif
NVINOSHLINS S3AIYVYEIT LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
SatuyvVudll
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSH
NVINOSHLINS S31u¥vudl)
WY a w
= ve AE z = =
4 % z 4 }
SG4E 2 WX a S -
> x = | = > =
; < ” : W) Poy ae ”
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3H1IY¥VuYdI SMITHSO
= = cp)
é : ee é ne
= s S 0 S « “ZG
O _ oO a O aR 5;
a a Fad 7 en) res =
~SAIYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI_NVINOSH
2
) =>
3
\ 2
}
“a aL
y
C
\
zs j
s
~
.
-
5)
= ok
1
> iil]
Ss
ay"
ww
>)
>
i]
{
i
i
=
4
+ \
Zw
ins
iB
=
/
}
|
(
;
b)
H
=
rik
oo
ANNALS OF THE ANNALE VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 91 BAND 91
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 91 BAND
rE iNUSPEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1983
: C - ; # :
; | SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA
‘ BY THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LTD., WYNBERG, CAPE
: D453 wt
: ” is
=
LIST. OF CONTENTS
Page
CLuVER, M. A. & KING, G. M.
A reassessment of the relationships of Permian Dicynodontia (Reptilia, Therapsida)
and a new classification of dicynodonts. (Published March 1983.).............. (25
Cook, P. L. see HAywarp, P. J.
Hai, M. & Mack, K.
The outline of an eighteenth-century economic system in south-east Africa. (Pub-
hiSie GalaniiaryehO SOs) esse cr) PR yh oe ccs < eie, senh ey Re te CME RT A SNS ts 163
HaAyYwarp, P. J. & Cook, P. L.
The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part 13. Bryozoa II. (Published
INICIO SS re eaters he aa ey eae a dt 4 nrc Ra Eg NO CR er Gh 1
Kinc, G. M. see CLuver, M. A.
Mack, K. see HALL, M.
NEW GENERIC NAMES PROPOSED IN THIS VOLUME
Dacwlosicpanday wands COOK; 1983 «2... 2. cea e wecc dae Gee ede we es eae es
Sos,
’ % |
4d
ay
J
a f
S
2
>
ee! yo
2 a
ey:
.
on
7
=
5
Y :
De
&
|
*
=E ‘
= : :
3!
;
| i
:
*
4
J
cf
G
Ls
:
_ VOLUME 91 PART 1 MARCH 1983 ISSN 0303-2515
QH
1
S67X
NH
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
= MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) - Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .. .’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FIsCHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 91 _ Band
March 1983 Maart
Part 1 Deel
TARNSON
b 8.8.8:
SX
yas »
OVI
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 13
BRYOZOA If
By
P. J. HAYWARD
&
Pe kb. COOK
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
i, WOES, S58), HED, 45,8, tase), SCS, 5S, ED),
6G, tap), TOD), 8, VAD, 2), 1003),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 45(1)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 044 3
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM'S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 13
BRYOZOA II
By
P. J. HAYWARD
Department of Zoology, University College of Swansea
&
pe les (CooK
Department of Zoology, British Museum, Natural History
(With 33 figures, 5 tables and 2 appendices)
[MS accepted 8 June 1982|
ABSTRACT
The bryozoan benthos of the shallow continental shelf seas off the eastern South African
coast is rich in species, and taxonomically diverse. Samples from 18 stations established by the
R.V. Meiring Naude between 1977 and 1979 have yielded a total of 38 anascan Cheilostomata,
76 ascophoran Cheilostomata and 16 Cyclostomata. The majority of the species were collected
in depths of less than 100 m. Forty-four new species are described in the following genera:
Amphiblestrum, Copidozoum, Chaperia, Arachnopusia, Micropora, Macropora, Aspidostoma,
Bugulella, Beania, Cribrilaria, Smittina, Smittoidea, Parasmittina, Escharella, Mucropetraliella,
Cleidochasma, Hippoporella, Emballotheca, Fenestrulina, Gigantopora, Adeonella, Sertella,
Iodictyum, Rhynchozoon, Brodiella, Turbicellepora, Hornera. Additionally, Dactylostega gen.
nov. is introduced for several species within the Hiantoporidae.
The South African bryozoan fauna includes a high proportion of endemic species, but also
exhibits a marked faunal affinity with the Indo-West-Pacific region. The antiquity of this link is
suggested by a number of similarities with the Tertiary fossil faunas of Australia and New
Zealand.
CONTENTS
PAGE
NER OCU CHO Mery ee oraci.c- A ens ua eA ae etek BAe ea 2
IETS (ROMS TNE CLES te ter, 5 2d (Oe Bae ey «eT eee ny cotied « Aen a ONS 3)
Systemiaticnccount aes «acct ee tahoe ey al ee citi we ern at 6
OrdermCheilostomatay | os6ace aise soe ob) ates sore Hemme: 6
OrdenmCyclostomatay var, ne. toe eee ye oe ete hue 128
DISCUSSION x cte tw ee ards LOO Clg SO A CN MOA ae Ay h See athe aie 140
SUITAUTTTEN Sg Ree ce hast aan ee aC eee Rea EMU da cfg eed NR OO rT an es 148
PNCKNOWICUSCINEM ES ee a retinscens ec eee GL Rete e ens 149
INGORE CC Sey aN ernst Reel ala Cinna eI A eal cn bbls als Ameer: 149
PNW) TENA OM S Haare eee tay AG sh ai) frase ep eee iene eae Shaye See ene een 155)
Appendix 1. Meiring Naude stations that produced Bryozoa ....... 156
Appendix 2. Indexiof speciesand) Seneral <5. as 4. - 465s esses eee 156
1
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 91 (1), 1983: 1-161, 33 figs, 5 tables, 2 appendices
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
The first report on the Bryozoa collected by the South African Museum’s
Meiring Naude cruises (Hayward & Cook 1979) described a fauna of 51
species from a series of stations on the outer continental shelf and the
continental slope of eastern South Africa. These stations ranged in depth from
376 to 1300 m, with most of them being deeper than 500 m. A preponderance
of the species was shown to comprise specialized forms adapted to life on
fine-grained, unstable sediments, although a number of species were more
characteristic of hard-ground benthos and were considered to have been
collected at the lower limits of their bathymetric ranges. A remarkable pro-
portion of the fauna, 23 species, was new to science and, of the remainder, 14
were new records for South Africa. The present report describes the bryozoan
material collected during the Meiring Naude cruises of 1977, 1978, and 1979,
together with an additional sample from the 1976 cruise, and provides a useful
supplement to the first survey in supplying data for the inner shelf areas of the
same region. Thus, of the 18 samples studied here, 8 were collected in depths
of less than 100 m, 1 was collected at 150-200 m, and 6 at less than 700 m.
The samples contained abundant bryozoan material and, in contrast to the
first collection, which included many widely distributed deep-sea species, were
expected to provide a clearer picture of the indigenous South African fauna.
These expectations were exceeded when study of the collections revealed 130
species, including an astonishing total of 44 new species, many of which seem
to be endemic to this area of the south-western Indian Ocean. It is now
apparent that the bryozoan fauna of South Africa comprises a rich and
taxonomically diverse assemblage of species, and that the few previous studies
on this region (see Day et al. 1970) have failed to reveal more than a fraction
of its potential complexity.
The bottom sediments at a number of the stations studied here included a
substantial fraction of bryozoan remains. These fragments included numerous
unrecognized species of Cheilostomata and Cyclostomata that could be neither
identified with any of the species described here nor adequately characterized
from the material available. This report, therefore, cannot be regarded as a
complete survey of the shallow component of the South African bryozoan
benthos. Further collections will, without doubt, produce a yet greater range of
undescribed or poorly known species and genera. Many of the previously
described species reported here for the first time from South African waters are
known to be widely distributed in the Indo-West-Pacific region. Several of the
new species have systematic affinities with Tertiary fossil forms of Australia and
New Zealand. The potential of further research in this region for marine
zoogeographical theory seems exciting.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 8
LIST OF SPECIES
The present collections comprised 130 species of Bryozoa: 38 anascan
Cheilostomata, 76 ascophoran Cheilostomata and 16 Cyclostomata. Cteno-
stomata were not found. In Tables 1-3 the species are listed in systematic order
and their occurrence at each of the eighteen stations is given. The stations are
arranged in order of increasing depth and the notation distinguishes between
live and dead records. Co-ordinates and depths for each of the stations studied
are given in Appendix 1. Data for all stations have been published by Louw
(1977, 1980).
TABLE 1
Anascan Cheilostomata. The species are listed in systematic order, stations in order of
increasing depth. New species are indicated by an asterisk (*). X =represented by living
colonies. + = dead colonies only.
100 m 500m 700m
Depth station 179 180 184 163 163/ 164 185 230) 2504234 233 232 162 103 1234131 129 151
164
Carbasea mediocris Kor aX x
Cupuladria multispinata vo oD it tT
Discoporella umbellata Xia On Gt; t T + t
Setosellina roulei + t +
Heliodoma implicata <<a
Callopora sp. t t sf: aay
Amphiblestrum inermis Ke =x t
*Amphiblestrum pontifex x
*Copidozoum transversum
Crassimarginatella marginalis ate sak Xx
Foveolaria imbricata x + + ? + x + + +
Foveolaria sp. +
Chaperia multifida Sukie Wie Hoch mat x
Chaperia capensis x Ft
Chaperia stephensoni t
*Chaperia familiaris
Chaperia sp.
Notocoryne cervicornis
*Dactylostega prima x
*Arachnopusia corniculata
*Micropora similis it
Steginoporella buskii
*Macropora africana x
Cellaria tectiformis x x + + +
Cellaria punctata t xm x
Cellaria paradoxa +
*Aspidostoma livida
Caberea darwinii x x x «x xX
Eupaxia quadrata x
Menipea crispa x * x
Menipea triseriata x x x xu IX
Menipea ornata
Menipea marionensis xr HX x
Bugulella australis x
*Bugulella problematica x
Beania magellanica x x x
*Beania rediviva x
Bugula dentata x
Species per station AS Gel a SG ior ad 1 di 42 89 1 3
xX + + xX
x —b
x —- tw +
x
x
x
oS OX OK 2K OK SP =ib
x OK eK OK
—-
«x —F
=
x
Eats
x
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 2
Ascophoran Cheilostomata. The species are listed in systematic order, stations in order of
increasing depth. New species are indicated by an asterisk (*). X =represented by living
colonies. + = dead colonies only.
100m 500m 700m
Depth station 179 180 184 163 163/ 164 185 23912501234 233 232 162 103 1234131 129 151
164
Cribrilaria innominata x x
Cribrilaria venusta x
*Cribrilaria africana x x x
Figularia philomela x
Figularia sp. x
Escharoides contorta ie Xe ox 9 ex «x xX if i
*Dimorphocella moderna eek t, .caes. it
Exechonella sp. T tT iT
Pachycleithonia mutabilis He oh
Tropidozoum burrowsi t t
*Smittina sitella t t vy
*Smittina ferruginea x
*Smittoidea circumspecta <x XOX
*Smittoidea errata x x
*Smittoidea calcarata x
Parasmittina tropica x « FT 7 y 6
*Parasmittina novella x
Porella capensis + x x
*Escharella discors if
*Mucropetraliella asymmetrica + + + <n
Arthropoma cecilii
Arthropoma circinatum +
Arthropoma sp. x x
Escharina pesanseris x
Escharina waiparaensis x x
Calyptotheca nivea x Xe i ex x
Calyptotheca porelliformis x x
*Emballotheca ambigua x
Stomachetosella balani x
Cleidochasma porcellanum x
Cleidochasma protrusum +
Cleidochasma cribritheca KK 0X
*Cleidochasma perspicua x
Hippoporidra senegambiensis x
Hippoporella spinigera x x x W it
*Hippoporella labiata x
Hippomenella avicularis + 7
Microporella sp. + x
Flustramorpha flabellaris <i
Flustramorpha marginata f + x x
Flustramorpha angusta X, Kei Xx x tT
*Fenestrulina indigena x XX
Trypostega venusta rE Ka XK x
Gigantopora polymorpha xP x
*Gigantopora foraminosa fi = XO Oe Tt
Adeonella majuscula x
Adeonella cracens i
*Adeonella decipiens > Ee iP PG x x it
*Adeonella confusanea x fin x x
*Adeonella conspicua x
“Adeonella distincta x
*Adeonella infirmata x
*Adeonella abdita XM EX eK EX
*Adeonella gibba x + <r xX x
Table 2 continued on next page.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Depth station
*Adeonella alia
Tessaradoma bispiramina
Tessaradoma circella
Sertella lata
*Sertella verecunda
Schizoretepora tessellata
Reteporella dinotorhynchus
*Todictyum flosculum
*Rhynchozoon documentum
*Rhynchozoon beatulum
*Rhynchozoon incallidum
*Rhynchozoon oscitans
*Rhynchozoon stomachosum
*Rhynchozoon ptarmicum
Brodiella longispinata
*Brodiella ignota
Turbicellepora conica
*Turbicellepora valligera
Celleporaria tridenticulata
Celleporaria capensis
Vittaticella sp.
Anoteropora latirostris
Species per station
100m 500m
700m
179 180 184 163 163/ 164 185 2392504234 233 232 162 103 1234131 129 151
x
x
+
+
x<
T x
+
x
x + +
a
133 au
+
—- —- X
38
164
—F ob
27
x
x
x
x
x x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x x
ar
+7
x
x
18 35
TABLE 3
20
+
—+
Cyclostomata. The species are listed in systematic order, stations in order of increasing depth.
New species are indicated by an asterisk (*). X =represented by living colonies. + = dead
colonies only.
Depth station
Diaperoecia
Mecynoecia clavaeformis
Mecynoecia delicatula
Mecynoecia australis
Plagioecia patina
Liripora lineata
Idmidronea contorta
Idmidronea crassimargo
Idmidronea cf. parvula
Idmidronea cf. biporata
Idmidronea cf. antarctica
Idmidronea cf. atlantica
Crisia elongata
Lichenopora novae-zealandiae
Crisina radians
*Hornera erugata
Species per station
100m 500m
700m
179 180 184 163 163/ 164 185 23942504234 233 232 162 103 123W31 129 151
164
+ FF FX + X X XX X
x xX
13
x xX
—- + xX — x
x
7
ii
x
+
T
Oh Pal 5
—b <r
=
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT
ORDER CHEILOSTOMATA
Family Flustridae d’Orbigny, 1852
Flustridae d’Orbigny, 1852: 324. Smitt, 1868: 357. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 76.
Carbasea Gray, 1848
Carbasea Gray, 1848: 105, 146. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 79.
Carbasea mediocris Hayward & Cook, 1979
Fig. 1A—B
Carbasea mediocris Hayward & Cook, 1979: 52, fig. 2A-B.
Material
Stations SM 233, SM 239, SM 250.
Remarks
The present material allows a more complete description of this species.
Live colonies were obtained from each of the three stations and together
include all astogenetic and ontogenetic stages. The specimens were up to
55 mm in length, the slender fronds dividing dichotomously at regular intervals;
there were six to eight longitudinal series of zooids. The ancestrula (Fig. 1B)
was slender and elongate and, including its tubular proximal extension,
exceeded 3 mm in length. The basal portion of the colony presents a most
curious appearance, with short cylindrical rhizoids projecting at right angles
from the lateral borders of the ancestrula and the lowest zooids of the colony,
before flexing abruptly and descending in flat fused bundles to the substratum.
Most of the specimens were brooding embryos; the ovicells, partially immersed
in the zooids distal to the maternal zooids, were up to 0,46 mm long and
equally broad, thinly calcified with a faintly striated surface.
The holotype was collected from 550 m depth (Hayward & Cook 1979),
the present material was obtained at depths of 90 m to 580 m.
Family Cupuladriidae Lagaaij, 1952
Cupuladriidae Lagaaij, 1952: 31. Cook, 1965a: 154; 1965b: 192.
Cupuladria Canu & Bassler, 1919
Cupuladria Canu & Bassler, 1919: 77. Lagaaij, 1952: 32. Cook, 1965b: 197.
Cupuladria multispinata (Canu & Bassler, 1923)
Cupularia multispinata Canu & Bassler, 1923: 78, fig. 13H.
Cupuladria multispinata: Cook, 1965b: 210, pl. 2 (fig. 2A-B), fig. 2d.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 1 A-B. Carbasea mediocris Hayward & Cook. A. Ovicelled zooids. B. The ancestrula, and
basal attachment rhizoids. C. Callopora sp. D-F. Amphiblestrum inermis (Kluge). D. A group of
zooids with large avicularia, including two with characteristic ovicells. E. Zooids from a juvenile
colony, with small avicularia. F. Ovicelled zooids, two with distinctive avicularia. G. Amphiblestrum
pontifex sp. nov. Scale = 0,5 mm for C-G; 1 mm for A-B.
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Stations SM 162, SM 179, SM 180, SM 185.
Description
Cupuladria with large zooids (Lz 0,55-0,76 mm). Colonies with coarsely
tuberculate, alternating, radiating ridges basally. Zooids with well-developed
lateral cryptocyst denticles that end in fine spinules.
Remarks
All the colonies found were dead and worn; they were almost certainly
transported. C. multispinata differs from C. owenii (Gray), which also occurs in
South African waters (Cook 19655: 213), in its larger colonies and larger
zooids. The denticulation on the edge of the cryptocyst and the basal
tuberculations are also coarser than in C. owenit.
Distribution
North-west, west, and south-east Africa, 7-105 m.
Discoporella d Orbigny, 1852
Discoporella d’Orbigny, 1852: 472. Cook, 1965b: 219.
Discoporella umbellata (Defrance, 1823)
Fig. 2
Lunulites umbellata Defrance, 1823: 361, pl. 47 (fig. 1a—b).
Discoporella umbellata: Cook, 1965a: 177, pl. 1 (fig. 7), pl. 3. (figs 1, 3, 5-6), fig. 4;
1965b: 221, pl. 3 (fig. 3), fig. 2h. Hayward & Cook, 1979: 44.
Material
Stations SM 131, SM 162, SM 163/164, SM 179, SM 180, SM 184,
SM 185.
Description
Zooids with complete cryptocyst lamina, pierced by several pairs of
opesiules, and other foramina. Opesia D-shaped, straight proximally. Basal
surface with irregular pores or pits, becoming flat and smooth. At colony
maturity a layer of kenozooids alternating with avicularia grows from the
periphery and spreads over the basal surface, which is usually by then flat, not
curved.
Remarks
Most populations of D. umbellata do not show the basal changes that
occur in these specimens. This morphotype was described as ‘D. umbellata
peyroti-type’ by Cook (1965a: 179), because a similar form of colony growth
—————
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
iew
iew of
B. Basal v
Enlarged frontal v
x 26.
Cc
ina
f basal lam
. Frontal view of a colony. x 9,3.
view O
A
ds and avicularia. x 9,3.
Enlarged
i
D.
. X61.
ds
i
ing layer of kenozoo
autozoo
ingrow
iscoporella umbellata (Defrance)
the
D
Fig. 2.
showing
10 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
was first described as Cupularia peyroti from the European Tertiary. The cause
of the progressive infilling of the concave basal surface in these colonies is
unknown, but may be similar to that which produces infilling in many colonies
of C. doma (see Cook 1965b: 216). The development of a basal layer of
kenozooids and avicularia, however, seems to occur only in Recent populations
of D. umbellata from South Africa. One of the functions of the basal avicularia
appeared to be to discourage the settlement of larvae of sponges, serpulid
worms and other bryozoans, all of which are often found occupying the basal
concavity in other populations of D. umbellata, and in other species of the
Cupuladriidae (see Cook 1965b: 195). Very young dead colonies were present
at nearly all stations, but living colonies with avicularian setae intact were
collected only at Stations SM 179 and SM 180.
Distribution
The D. umbellata species complex has a wide distribution in tropical and
subtropical regions of the Atlantic Ocean and the western Indian Ocean, but
‘peyroti-type’ colonies are known only from South Africa.
Family Setosellinidae Hayward & Cook, 1979
Setosellinidae Hayward & Cook, 1979: 45.
The family was introduced for genera with free-living colonies of
spirally-budded zooids supported by long setiform avicularian mandibles. The
zooidal opesia is extensive, and large ovicells are present.
Setosellina Calvet, 1906
Setosellina Calvet, 1906: 157. Hayward & Cook, 1979: 48.
Setosellina roulei Calvet, 1906
Setosellina roulei Calvet, 1906: 157; 1907: 395, pl. 26 (figs 5-6). Hayward & Cook, 1979: 48,
figs 1A, 17B, 18B.
Material
Stations SM 103, SM 131, SM 164.
Remarks
In contrast to the large number of specimens previously reported
(Hayward & Cook 1979), a very few ‘dead’ colonies were found in the present
collections.
Heliodoma Calvet, 1906
Heliodoma Calvet, 1906: 157. Hayward & Cook, 1979: 50.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES Jil
Heliodoma implicata Calvet, 1906
Heliodoma implicata Calvet, 1906: 157; 1907: 396, pl. 26 (figs 7-9). Hayward & Cook,
1979: 50, figs 17A, 18A.
Material
Stations SM 103, SM 123, SM 131.
Remarks
Some of the specimens from stations SM 103 and SM 123 were alive when
collected; only those from SM 103, which have been reported before (Hayward
& Cook 1979) were numerous.
Family Calloporidae Norman, 1903
Calloporidae Norman, 1903: 587. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 87.
Callopora Gray, 1848
Callopora Gray, 1848: 109, 146. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 87.
Callopora sp.
Fig. 1C
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 185.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids 0,5-0,7 mm long by about 0,4 mm broad.
Opesia oval, cryptocyst narrow; gymnocyst smooth, of variable extent. Spines
distributed around whole of opesia, up to ?12 in number. No sessile avicularia.
Ovicell small, hyperstomial, perhaps with frontal area.
Remarks
Colonies of an unrecognized species of Callopora were found at each of
the above stations. All were dead, and damaged to a greater or lesser extent.
Although it appears to be undescribed, the poor state of the material precludes
the possibility of an adequate taxonomic description and, accordingly, the
species must remain unnamed until further specimens are collected.
Amphiblestrum Gray, 1848
Amphiblestrum Gray, 1848: 103. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 103.
12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Amphiblestrum inermis (Kluge, 1914)
Fig. 1D-F
Membranipora inermis Kluge, 1914: 663, pl. 34 (fig. 6).
Lepralia triangularis O'Donoghue, 1924: 43, pl. 2 (figs 11- 12).
Amphiblestrum triangulare: O'Donoghue, 1957: 74.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 164, SM 184, SM 185.
Description
Colony encrusting, unilaminar. Zooids flat, hexagonal or irregularly
polygonal, separated by shallow grooves; 0,4-0,5 mm long by 0,36—0,4 mm
broad. Cryptocyst flat, occupying half length of zooid, surrounded by a thin
crenellated rim; two widely spaced, evanescent spines distally; opesia trifoliate,
proportions variable, most frequently with proximal portion constituting
one-third or less of total length. Gymnocyst smooth, largely obscured by a
single adventitious avicularium, orientated transversely and acute to frontal
plane. Rostrum hooked, supporting an acute triangular mandible. Ovicell
prominent, recumbent on succeeding zooid, with a large triangular area of
uncovered granular, entooecium frontally; raised border between entooecium
and ectooecium produced at proximolateral corners of ovicell to form
projecting, proximally directed spikes. Within the colony the size of the
avicularian cystid varies astogenetically and the proportions of the opesia vary
ontogenetically.
Remarks
O’Donoghue (1924) noted that his L. triangularis seemed similar to the
Antarctic Membranipora inermis Kluge. The type specimen (BMNH
1963.3.20.7.) is poor, consisting of fragments of several young colonies; there
are no ovicells and most of the zooids lack avicularia. A second specimen from
Saldanha Bay (BMNH 1936.12.30.281) is equally fragmentary, but the zooids
possess avicularia. It is difficult, therefore, to identify O’Donoghue’s material
with M. inermis Kluge. Good examples of the latter species are known from
South Africa, viz. from False Bay (BMNH 1962.6.4.6.), and from Simon’s Bay
(BMNH 1944.1.8.186); both are well-grown colonies with prominent avicularia,
and the False Bay specimen has numerous ovicells showing the triangular,
granular frontal area, and proximolateral processes, characteristic of Kluge’s
species. Unfortunately neither includes early astogenetic stages and it is not
possible to judge whether the fragmentary specimens of O’Donoghue represent
simply early astogenetic stages of M. inermis.
The Meiring Naude material provides some evidence for this supposition,
but the number of specimens is small and additionally suggests an even broader
range of variation. The material described above (station SM 184, Fig. 1D) is
without doubt closest to Kluge’s species, and includes some early zooids with
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 1S
very small frontal avicularia. A specimen from station SM 163 (Fig. 1E), small
and lacking ovicells, has very small avicularia and the zooids resemble closely
both the early astogenetic stages of the colony from SM 184 and O’Donoghue’s
type specimen of L. triangularis. In a specimen from station SM 185 (Fig. 1F)
the free distal edge of the avicularian cystid is flattened and expanded, forming
a structure similar to that seen in species of Foveolaria; however, the ovicell,
the paired spines, the opesia, and the avicularian rostrum are identical to those
of the material described (SM 184).
Amphiblestrum pontifex sp. nov.
Fig. 1G
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26413, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids oval, broad and flat, distinct, separated by
deep grooves. Gymnocyst reduced but visible, continuous laterally with
incurved lateral walls, smooth and hyaline. Cryptocyst extensive, comprising
four-fifths of total zooid length, flat and smooth, encircled by a raised and
thickened mural rim. Opesia subterminal, less than half length of cryptocyst,
and distally less than half its width; shape characteristic, opesiular indentations
small, initially continuous with distal part of opesia, but later isolated from it.
Two widely spaced distal oral spines present in newly developed zooids, later
lost. Avicularium medially situated on gymnocyst, orientated transversely;
cystid globose, rostrum elongate, acute-triangular, its distal end curved to left
or right. Ovicell prominent, spherical, small; smooth surfaced, with a longitudi-
nal median ridge marking the thickened edges of a narrow frontal foramen.
Etymology
Pontifex (L.)—high priest, an allusion to the shape of the opesia.
Remarks
A. pontifex may be distinguished from other species of Amphiblestrum by
the form of the opesia, in particular by the isolation of the opesiular indenta-
tions. Several live colonies encrusting the large specimen of Dimorphocella
were collected.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
OT 0,48
Copidozoum Harmer, 1926
Copidozoum Harmer, 1926: 226.
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Copidozoum transversum sp. nov.
Fig. 3A
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26414, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Other material: station SM 250.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids oval, large. Frontal surface almost entirely
membranous: gymnocyst apparent as a small triangular area of calcification on
zooids at a row bifurcation; cryptocyst forming simply a narrow granulated
border, mural rim thin, no spines. Vicarious avicularia conspicuous, cystid
tumid; rostrum orientated transversely, 0,24-0,34 mm long, distal portion slen-
der, with a blunt tip, proximal portion rounded, opesia oval, with a granular
cryptocyst, mandible articulating against paired, thickened condyles. Ovicells
not found.
Etymology
Tranversus (L.)—crosswise, referring to the orientation of the avicula-
rium.
Remarks
Living colonies were collected from both the above stations.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
ez Iz
0,64 0,42
Crassimarginatella Canu, 1900
Crassimarginatella Canu, 1900: 369. Hastings, 1945: 69.
Crassimarginatella marginalis (Kirkpatrick, 1888)
Fig. 3B
Membranipora marginalis Kirkpatrick, 1888: 74, pl. 7 (fig. 2).
Crassimarginatella marginalis: Hastings, 1945: 78, fig. 2B.
Material
Stations: SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 239, SM 250.
Remarks
In the size of the zooids, the relatively broad cryptocyst, and the
morphology of the vicarious avicularia, the Meiring Naude specimens closely
resemble the Mauritian type specimen of C. marginalis (BMNH 1888.12.5.8.).
The Meiring Naude specimens tend to be more thickly calcified, but as no live
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 15
0,5
mm
Fig. 3. A. Copidozoum transversum sp. nov. B. Crassimarginatella marginalis (Kirkpatrick). C-—E. Chap-
eria familiaris sp. nov. C. Zooids from a live collected colony, showing the forked proximal spines. D. Two
dead zooids, showing the extent of the occlusor laminae. E. A group of zooids with ovicells in different
stages of development. F. Chaperia capensis (Busk).
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
juvenile colonies were collected, the majority of the material representing dead
colonies, this may be regarded as an ontogenetic effect.
Foveolaria Busk, 1884
Foveolaria Busk, 1884: 68. Harmer, 1926: 246.
Foveolaria imbricata (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 4 =
Amphiblestrum imbricatum Busk, 1884: 65, pl. 15 (fig. 3).
Membranipora imbricata: Marcus, 1922: 16, fig. 9.
Material
Stations SM 129, SM 131, SM 151, SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 179,
SM 180, SM 184, SM 185.
Description
Colony arising from an encrusting sheet of zooids, forming an erect
cylindrical growth. Zooids in alternating linear series around the entire axis of
the branch; broadly diamond-shaped, as wide as long, distal edge raised and
distinctly crenellated. Frontal membrane underlain by a smooth, extensive
cryptocyst, deeply concave; opesia subtriangular, occupying less than one-third
of total zooid length. Frontal surface largely hidden by a tall, broad avicula-
rium, developed on the proximal half of the cryptocyst; cystid cylindrical at
first, broadened distally, with a thin irregular edge. Rostrum situated on the
lateral face of the cystid, acute triangular, apically orientated, with stout
condyles for articulation of the mandible. No spines. Ovicells not observed.
Remarks
Busk’s original description of this species (1884: 65) is confusing. He
considered he was viewing a unilaminar colony encrusting another, erect,
bryozoan species, although his material is clearly an erect cylindrical colony.
The relative proportions of gymnocyst and cryptocyst, the origin of the frontal
avicularium, the nature of the ovicell and, perhaps, colony form are the
features most likely to prove useful in distinguishing Foveolaria (as defined by
Levinsen 1909: 152) from Amphiblestrum (above). At present A. imbricata
Busk seems more correctly placed in Foveolaria than in Amphiblestrum.
Foveolaria sp.
Fig. 5A
Material
Station SM 162.
Description
Colony erect, cylindrical, slender. Zooids in triple whorls, elongate,
rounded distally, tapered proximally; lateral walls flared distally, forming an
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 4. Foveolaria imbricata (Busk). A. An entire colony. X12. B. Detail to
show the avicularia. X 82.
17
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 5. A. Foveolaria sp.., the dead specimen from SM 162. B. Micropora similis sp. nov. C-F. Macropora
africana sp. nov. C. Zooids from the growing edge. D. The ancestrula, and periancestrular zooids.
E. A vicarious avicularium. F. An ovicelled zooid. G. Exechonella sp. Scale = 0,5 mm for A-F; 1 mm for G.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES i)
arched hood. Cryptocyst extensive, flat, opesia comprising less than one-
quarter of zooid length. A broad-based, possibly cylindrical, avicularian cystid
present on the proximal region of the cryptocyst. Ovicell spherical. No spines.
Remarks
Dead fragments of an unrecognized species of Foveolaria were obtained
from station SM 162. Unfortunately all of the features of the zooids were
damaged to a greater or lesser extent, in particular the larger part of each
avicularium was missing; the condition of the material thus precludes a com-
plete description of the species.
Family Chaperiidae Jullien, 1888
Chaperiidae Jullien, 1888: 61. Brown, 1952: 94.
Chaperia Jullien, 1881
Chaperia Jullien, 1881: 163. Brown, 1952: 94. Gordon, 1982.
The genus Chaperia comprises a large number of species described from
localities throughout the southern hemisphere. The synonymy of many of these
species is confused to the extent that no useful comments may be made
regarding systematic relationships or distributional patterns until the majority
of described species has been critically re-examined. Brown (1952: 94) clarified
the status of Chaperia Jullien, noting that the type species was the originally
designated C. australis Jullien, 1881, and selected a neotype for C. acanthina
(Lamouroux, 1825). Brown also indicated that C. acanthina may prove to be a
senior synonym of C. australis, and it would seem useful to consider here
whether this synonymy may be accepted.
Jullien (1881: 163) introduced C. australis as a new name for Membrani-
pora spinosa Busk, 1879; Busk had referred his material (from Kerguelen) to
Flustra acanthina (Lamouroux, 1825) but had derived the name from the
non-Linnean ‘Flustra épineuse’ used by Lamouroux in the explanation of his
plate (1825, Atlas, pl. 89, figs 1-2). Although Jullien (1881) was describing
specimens of C. australis from South Africa, he was quite explicit in introducing
the name for Busk’s Kerguelen material, and the possible synonymy of C.
acanthina and C. australis thus depends on the identity of Busk’s specimens.
Jullien’s South African specimens pose another problem. Marcus (1922)
described material from South Africa under the name C. acanthina var.
australis Jullien, which is here referred to C. capensis (Busk) (q.v.). The South
African material of C. australis may prove to be identical to Busk’s Kerguelen
Specimens, or it may be identifiable with Marcus’s material; only examination
of Jullien’s specimens will decide the issue, but its result is irrelevant to the
identity of C. australis, which is determined solely by the Busk specimen from
Kerguelen. Fortunately this is still extant (BMNH 1899.7.1.1155, 1156); it
comprises a single, well-grown young colony encrusting a small rhodophyte.
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Comparison with the neotype of C. acanthina (BMNH 1930.1.16.26A) and with
other material from the Falkland Islands (BMNH 1935.3.6.59, 316) shows that
Busk’s specimen may be assigned confidently to C. acanthina (Lamouroux).
The zooids of all four specimens are of a similar size (0,5—0,6 mm long by
0,4-0,5 mm broad) with a granular cryptocyst comprising two-fifths of the total
length. The opesia is surrounded by jointed spines of variable thickness, up to
0,6 mm long; these number five or six on the Falkland Islands specimens, and
six or seven in the Kerguelen colony. The occlusor laminae in all cases are
distinct, slightly curved but not converging markedly towards the distal end of
the zooid, the visible length being 0,2 mm.
It may be shown, therefore, that C. australis Jullien is a junior subjective
synonym of C. acanthina (Lamouroux), which accordingly becomes the type
species of Chaperia Jullien. The subsequent synonymy of C. acanthina 1s
adequately provided by Brown (1952: 95); C. acanthina was also discussed by
Harmer (1926: 229), but his material included the Siboga specimens from the
tropical East Indies which appear to differ from Brown’s neotype, most notably
in possessing up to ten small spines. Finally, and inexplicably, Jullien (1888)
figured specimens of a Chaperia from Cape Horn which he attributed to
‘Flustra spinosa’, noting that it was the same as that to which he had in 1881
given the name Chaperia australis. His text, though brief, suggests that he had
by then concluded that C. acanthina and C. australis were identical, but his use
of the spurious ‘Flustra spinosa’ perhaps served to obscure his opinion.
Chaperia multifida (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 6
Membranipora galeata var. multifida Busk, 1884: 64.
Chaperia multifida: Kluge, 1914: 673, text-fig. 44. Marcus, 1922: 7, fig. 3.
Membranipora galeata var. multifida: O'Donoghue & De Watteville, 1935: 205.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 179, SM 180, SM 184, SM 1835.
Description
Colony encrusting, forming patches or cylindrical growths around erect
substrata; developing as erect bilaminar sheets or solid branching cylinders.
Zooids hexagonal or irregularly oval, separated by indistinct sutures,
0,44-0,65 mm long by 0,26-0,4 mm broad. Cryptocyst forming a narrow, finely
granular, concave rim, most prominent proximally and tapering rapidly towards
spine bases. Opesia circular or oval, marginally longer than wide in the larger
zooids, occupying three-fifths to three-quarters of total frontal length. Occlusor
laminae distinct, quite divergent distally; arising on each side from a point
below the distal spine and extending to half-way along the lateral margin of the
opesia. Two pairs of distolateral spines, thick, jointed at base with a distinct
coelomic cavity; proximalmost pair broadening rapidly, developed as multi-
branched palmate structures arching over and obscuring most of the frontal
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 6. Chaperia multifida (Busk). A. Portion of a live collected colony (on right)
with spines and pedunculate avicularia intact, and a dead fragment for comparison
(on left). x 29. B. Bleached fragment of a live collected colony. x 79.
21
22 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
surface of the zooid. Distalmost pair of spines typically erect, cylindrical,
clavate or spatulate, rarely palmate. A single sessile avicularium at the distal
end of each zooid, situated between the distalmost pair of spines; rostrum
triangular, distally orientated, with an incomplete cross-bar and a transversely
oval foramen in the palate; rarely, the rostrum may be broadened to give a
narrowly spatulate shape. Erect, elongate pedunculate avicularia numerous,
most frequently situated adjacent to the sessile avicularium on one or both
sides; sometimes developed between adjacent zooids, arising from the lateral
wall of one of them; one or more of the distal spines may also be replaced by
pedunculate avicularia. Ovicell prominent, hemispherical, with an oval or
irregular frontal area; in fertile zooids the distal pair of spines and the
avicularia are suppressed.
Remarks
The material from SM 179 and SM 185 comprised living colonies retaining
a reddish coloration in alcohol and forming cylindrical growths around hydroid
stems. All the material from the other stations consisted of dead fragments;
some of these were encrusting, unilaminar patches and some bilaminar sheets,
but the majority were fragments of cylindrical or flattened branching colonies
up to 10 mm high. Bleached zooids from SM 179, lacking spines and peduncu-
late avicularia are compared with those of a dead cylindrical fragment in
Figures 6A-B, and it may be seen that, despite the variation in colony
morphology, only one species is represented.
Chaperia capensis (Busk, 1884)
Figs 3k
Amphiblestrum capense Busk, 1884: 67, pl. 23 (fig. 3).
Chaperia acanthina var. australis: Marcus, 1922: 6, fig. 2.
Membranipora galeata var. inermis O'Donoghue, 1924: 38, pl. 1 (fig. 9).
Chapperia acanthina var. australis: O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1944: 415.
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 179, SM 180.
Description
Colony encrusting, forming cylindrical growths around erect substrata,
developing as erect, solid cylindrical structures, branching irregularly. Zooids
broad and flat, typically hexagonal, broader than long, separated by shallow
grooves; 0,5-0,6 mm long by about 0,6 mm broad. Cryptocyst finely granular,
concave, broadest proximally, narrowing towards the distal end. Opesia trans-
versely oval, occupying about three-fifths of total frontal length; occlusor
laminae well developed and distinct, seen to converge distally even in
unbleached undamaged material, extending lateroproximally almost to the
proximal edge of the opesia. One short cylindrical spine present at each distal
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES ue
corner, variable in length but typically no longer than the width of the opesia.
Avicularia and ovicells absent.
Remarks
The proportions of the zooids seem to vary according to the form of
growth of the colony; in regular cylindrical branches they tend to be longer
than broad, but may broaden considerably in encrusting sheets or irregular
branches. The type material from Simon’s Bay, South Africa consists of several
solid cylinders lacking bases. The specimens from Meiring Naude stations
SM 163/164 and SM 179 form hollow cylinders around hydroids; dead frag-
ments from SM 180 consisted mostly of solid cylinders, but some included a
hollow, encrusting cylindrical base.
The material described and figured by Marcus (1922: 6, fig. 2) as C.
acanthina var. australis clearly belongs in the synonymy of Chaperia capensis;
however, as discussed above, the identity of Jullien’s (1881) South African
records of C. australis can be decided only by examination of his specimens. C.
acanthina var. polygonia Kluge (1914: 676, text-fig. 47), from Simon’s Bay,
placed by Marcus (1922) in the synonymy of his C. acanthina var. australis,
differs from C. capensis in possessing five or six distal oral spines and widely
divergent occlusor laminae. It is probably correctly regarded as a variant of C.
acanthina.
Chaperia stephensoni O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1935
Chaperia stephensoni O'Donoghue & De Watteville, 1935: 205, pl. 5 (fig. 1), pl. 6 (fig. 11).
O’Donoghue, 1957: 74.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 184.
Remarks
Only small dead fragments of this species were recovered. C. stephensoni
may be recognized by the transversely oval opesia overarched by the distal wall
of the zooid, and by the single distal avicularium, which has a characteristic
elongate lanceolate rostrum curved slightly to the left or right at its tip. Two
spine bases are visible at each distal corner and the sessile avicularium is often
flanked on one or both sides by the swollen bases of erect avicularia.
Chaperia familiaris sp. nov.
Figs 3C-E, 7A
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26415, station SM 162, 32°55’S 28°31’E, 630 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 180.
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 7. A. Chaperia familiaris sp. nov. x 48. B. Dactylostega prima sp. nov. x 64. C. Dactylos-
tega tubigera (Busk), BMNH 1887.12.9.3462. x 24.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 5)
Description
Colony encrusting, forming small patches, retaining a reddish-brown
colour when preserved in alcohol, but fading when dried. Zooids hexagonal,
occasionally rounded distally, typically as wide as long, but tending to broaden,
separated by distinct sutures. Cryptocyst flat, finely granular, forming a
symmetrical plate of constant width around two-thirds of the periphery of the
Opesia between the proximalmost pair of spines, its free edge distinctly
bevelled. Opesia transversely oval, occupying approximately half the length of
the frontal surface. Occlusor laminae distinct, each extending from a point
one-third of the distance along the distal wall to the proximolateral corner of
the zooid; not markedly convergent distally, although in damaged zooids they
may be seen to join distally at the mid-line of the zooid. Two pairs of
distolateral spines, distinctly shorter than the length of the opesia; distal pair
cylindrical, proximal pair forked and slightly incurved. In brooding zooids only
the proximal pair is present. Ovicell prominent, broader than long, hemispher-
ical or somewhat irregular; ectooecium with a transversely oval frontal
foramen. No avicularia.
Etymology
Familiaris (L.)—familiar, an allusion to the morphological features
characteristic of the genus.
Remarks
Live specimens were obtained from all three stations, those from SM 162
and SM 180 were encrusting the large arenaceous foraminiferan Schizammina
pinnata (Pearcey) (see p. 144). C. familiaris seems to be most similar to C.
capensis (above) but differs in possessing two pairs of spines, most particularly
in the short, forked proximal pair, and in its very characteristic ovicells.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz Lop lop
0,48 0,47 0,30 0,31
Chaperia sp.
Fig. 9A
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 180, SM 184, SM 185.
Description
Colony forming unilaminar sheets, encrusting or possibly erect, or only
loosely attached to substratum. Zooids flat, typically broader than long,
tapered proximally and rounded distally, 0,6-0,9 mm long by 0,7-1,0 mm
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
broad. Cryptocyst flat or slightly depressed distally, granular; opesia transversely
oval, comprising up to two-thirds total length of zooid, no occlusor laminae
visible. Distal border of zooid with seven to nine closely spaced spine bases. No
avicularia or ovicells. Vertical walls very deep, up to 1,0 mm in some fragments;
in basal view zooid boundaries are marked by distinct ridges. Both vertical and
basal walls densely perforated by large multiporous septula, each in a distinct pit.
Remarks
Detached fragments of this distinctive species were found at each of the
stations indicated. All were dead and worn, and none gave any indication of
what the colony form might have been. It appears to belong to Chaperia but, in
view of the poor state of the material and the uncertainty regarding the status
of at least one South African species of this genus (p. 19), it seems inappropri-
ate to assign a specific name.
Notocoryne Hayward & Cook, 1979
Notocoryne Hayward & Cook, 1979: 54.
Notocoryne cervicornis Hayward & Cook, 1979
Notocoryne cervicornis Hayward & Cook, 1979: 55, fig. 3.
Material
Stations SM 151, SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 180, SM 184, SM 185.
Remarks
The present material shows a greater range of colony size than that
originally described by Hayward & Cook (1979), with specimens of 9,5 mm,
10 mm, and 11 mm in length. In all cases the characteristic faceted club-shape
was constant. None of the colonies was alive when collected.
Family Hiantoporidae MacGillivray, 1895
Hiantoporidae MacGillivray, 1895: 60. Osburn, 1950: 97.
Dactylostega gen. nov.
Colony encrusting, unilaminar, or erect, bilaminar. Cryptocyst developed
aS a narrow rim; gymnocyst reduced, obscured. Avicularia interzooidal, devel-
oped from a series of chambers present between the autozooids; other cham-
bers with simple frontal foramina assumed to be kenozooidal. Secondary
calcification originating from interzooidal chambers, projecting over the frontal
membrane of the autozooids as a series of blunt, irregular spikes infilling
concavities between autozooids and forming an enveloping ooecial cover.
Autozooids communicating with interzooidal chambers via small uniporous
septula. Ovicell hyperstomial, closed by zooidal operculum. Spines absent.
Type species: Dactylostega prima sp. nov.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES ay,
Etymology
Dactylos (Gr.)—finger; stegos (Gr.)—roof, describing the digitate frontal
shield seen in later ontogeny.
Dactylostega prima sp. nov.
Figs 7B, 8A
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26416, station SM 185, 33°39,3’S 27°11,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 131, SM 162, SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164,
SM 179, SM 180, SM 184, SM 185.
Description
Colony encrusting, unilaminar, or forming erect bilaminar sheets. Zooids
oval, deep; boundaries clear at the growing edge of the colony, but obscured by
the development of interzooidal avicularia and ?kenozooidal chambers. Opesia
oval, rimmed by a narrow, granular, basally deflected cryptocyst with distinct
beaded edge; of constant width around whole of opesia. Spaces between zooids
infilled by a continuous series of chambers, some of which develop as avicula-
ria, others forming irregular bodies with a frontal foramen (?opesia) sur-
rounded by a granular area of calcification (?cryptocyst). Avicularia most
frequently situated distolaterally to zooids, but often lateral in position as well,
particularly at the bifurcation of zooid rows. Interzooidal calcification increas-
ing in later ontogeny, appearing continuous over all of the interzooidal cham-
bers and forming a continuous projecting rim around the opesia of each zooid,
the edge developing short irregular processes that extend above the frontal
membrane. Ovicell immersed, hyperstomial; slightly broader than long with a
rather rectangular outline; apparently with a small central ectooecial fenestra in
early ontogeny, later covered by calcification derived from the interzooidal
chambers
Etymology
Primus (L.)—first, denoting the type species.
Remarks
The overarched ‘pericystal’ processes seen in D. prima produce an effect
similar to that of the frontal shield seen in, for example, Arachnopusia.
However, it may be seen from the micrographs (Fig. 7B) that in D. prima this
calcification emanated from the curious interzooidal chambers that characterize
the genus. The possible homology of the central foramen of the chamber and
its surrounding area of granular calcification with the opesia and cryptocyst of
the autozooid, and the small uniporous septula that link each chamber with the
zooids adjoining it, suggest its kenozooidal nature.
28
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 8. A. Dactylostega prima sp. nov., showing ovicells and kenozooidal chambers
in various stages of development. x 50. B. Cellaria punctata (Busk). X 80.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES Zs)
Live encrusting colonies were collected from each of the stations listed
above, and dead fragments of bilaminar sheets were obtained from SM 180 and
SM 164.
Foveolaria tubigera Busk (1884: 68), presently known only from Simon’s
Bay, Cape of Good Hope, shows many similarities to D. prima, in particular
the interzooidal chambers, and clearly belongs in the same genus (see fig. 7C).
Other species referable to Dactylostega are Hincksina nigrans (Hincks) (see
Osburn 1950: 44, pl. 5 (figs 3-4)) and Membraniporidra spissimuralis as
described by Hayami (1975: 102, pl. 13 (fig. 10)). Both these forms occur in the
Northern Pacific, D. nigrans being circumarctic and D. spissimuralis Hayami
(non Canu & Bassler) having been reported from the Pliocene of Japan. A
similar development of supraopesial denticulations and frontal avicularia occurs
in Odontionella cyclops var. tessellata (see Brown 1952).
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,62 0,42
Family Arachnopusiidae Jullien, 1888
Arachnopusiidae Jullien, 1888: 62. Moyano, 4970: 260.
Arachnopusia Jullien, 1888
Arachnopusia Jullien, 1888: 62. Moyano, 1970: 260.
Arachnopusia corniculata sp. nov.
Fig. 9B—C
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26417, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 131, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 250.
Description
Colony encrusting, unilaminar, zooids oval, separated by shallow grooves,
distinct at growing edge, but obscured in later ontogenetic stages. Frontal
membrane occupying most of frontal surface; a minimal area of smooth
gymnocyst proximally, and a narrow, granular cryptocystal rim, occasionally
developing a scalloped edge. Frontal shield developed from the proximal and
lateral edges of the zooid as a variable number of processes, fused medially to
obscure two-thirds of the total length of the frontal surface, leaving a D-shaped
distal aperture and a variable number (typically 3-6) of irregularly shaped
foramina. Area of each foramen subsequently reduced by further calcified
processes, which may fuse to divide it into two. Proximal border of aperture
straight, or developing a short, lobed or multipointed, medial process at an
oblique angle to the frontal plane. Similar processes occasionally present on the
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 9. A. Chaperia sp. B-C. Arachnopusia corniculata sp. nov. B. Zooids from the growing edge of the
colony, including one with an ovicell. C. Two zooids from a juvenile colony showing stages in the
development of the frontal shield. D-E. Bugulella problematica sp. nov. D. Zooids with distal spines, and
avicularia developed from lateral septula. E. Zooids with spines almost encircling the opesiae; avicularia and
zooids arising from lateral septula. F-G. Beania rediviva sp. nov. F. Showing the rounded distal end of the
autozooid. Note that the rostra of the two distal avicularia are broken short. G. An avicularium in lateral
view.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 31
distal edge of the aperture; oral spines absent. Avicularia adventitious, typically
paired, lateral to aperture; rostrum acute triangular, slightly curved, directed
distally or distomedially. Less frequently, avicularia may occur proximally, on
the edges of the zooid, with variable orientation. Ovicell hyperstomial, partly
immersed, closed by zooidal operculum; as broad as long, smooth and imper-
forate, becoming obscured by calcification derived from the frontal shield of the
distally succeeding zooid. Ancestrula tatiform, 0,4 mm long; opesia oval with a
narrow cryptocyst, bordered by spines. First zooids budded from the ancestrula
have five long oral spines.
Etymology
Corniculata (L.)—horned, referring to the lip of the aperture.
Remarks
The genus Arachnopusia has a wide distribution within the southern
hemisphere, although none of the described species has been reported from
South Africa. A. corniculata may be distinguished readily from other species of
the genus by the relatively large, paired, oral avicularia, and in particular the
laterally curved rostrum, and by the denticulate proximal border of the aper-
ture. The absence of oral spines is also a distinctive feature.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Lys Iz
0,64 0,27
Family Microporidae Gray, 1848
Microporidae Gray, 1848: 115, 147. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 112.
Micropora Gray, 1848
Micropora Gray, 1848: 115, 147. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 112.
Micropora similis sp. nov.
Fig. 5B
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26418, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 180, SM 233,
SM 239, SM 250.
Description
Colony forming thin unilaminar sheets. Zooids small, broad and flat,
hexagonal, or with proximal half distinctly tapered. Opesia (orifice) twice as
wide as long, proximal border straight, lateral corners rounded to give a more
or less elliptical effect; somewhat more angular in old or ovicellate zooids.
oe ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Lateral walls finely crenulate, slightly raised above the frontal surface, forming
small scarcely discernible bosses adjacent to the opesia. Cryptocyst finely
granular, punctured by numerous small pores; gently convex medially, distally
becoming concave close to the opesiules and steeply raised at the proximal edge
of the opesia. Opesiules situated close to opesia, distinct. Ovicell recumbent on
succeeding zooid, wider than long and rather depressed, with a transverse
frontal ridge, frequently developed medially into a low umbo. Avicularia
developed sporadically throughout the colony, each situated immediately distal
to an autozooid and orientated transverse to distalproximal axis; rostrum
semi-elliptical or bluntly triangular, oblique to frontal plane of zooid, cross-bar
slender, cylindrical.
Etymology
Similis (L.)—resembling, a reference to the similarity of this species to
other members of the genus.
Remarks
This small species resembles the north-eastern Atlantic Micropora nor-
mani Levinsen, which also possesses interzooidal avicularia. M. similis is
distinguished from this and other species of the genus, however, by its slender
opesia and by the densely punctured frontal wall.
Measurements (means of 15 (zooids) or 10 (avicularia) values) in mm
jz Iz Lav
0,54 0,44 ‘Os
Family Steginoporellidae Hincks, 1884, emend. Bassler, 1953
Steganoporellidae Hincks, 1884: 358.
Steginoporellidae: Bassler, 1953: G171.
Steginoporella Smitt, 1873
Steginoporella Smitt, 1873: 15. Pouyet & David, 1979: 764.
Steganoporella: Cook, 1964a: 45.
Steginoporella buskii Harmer, 1900
Steganoporella buskii Harmer, 1900: 272, pl. 12 (fig. 13), pl. 13 (figs 33-35). Cook, 1964a: 46,
pl. 1 (figs 1-3), fig. 1
Steginoporella buskii: Pouyet & David, 1979: 771, pl. 1 (fig. 9), text-fig. 2.
Material
Stations SM 131, SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164.
Remarks
Fragments of living colonies were collected from stations SM 163/164 and
SM 164, but the specimens from SM 131 and SM 163 were of dead, transported
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 25)
material. The specimens resemble others from Port Elizabeth (the type locality)
in having a fairly low level insertion of the cryptocyst in the distal wall (see
Cook 1964a). Although S. magnilabris (Busk) is known from east Africa, all
records of it from South Africa are referable to S. buskii.
Family Macroporidae Uttley, 1949
Macroporidae Uttley, 1949: 175. Brown, 1952: 134.
Macropora MacGillivray, 1895
Macropora MacGillivray, 1895: 54. Brown, 1952: 134.
Macropora africana sp. nov.
Fig. 5C-F
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26419, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163/164, SM 184, SM 185.
Description
Colony encrusting, unilaminar. Zooids broadly hexagonal, convex, sepa-
rated by deep grooves. Primary orifice semi-elliptical, proximal border straight,
closed by a distinctive calcified operculum with a finely granular, punctate
surface. Four or five short, thickened, distal oral spines present but lost in later
ontogenetic stages, only the brown chitinized bases remaining. Frontal wall
finely granular, perforated by numerous small pores; large dietellae visible at
the base of the vertical walls in zooids at the growing edge. Vicarious avicularia
sporadically distributed throughout colony, of a primitive form; cystid of similar
size to an autozooid, rostrum linguiform with a triangular palatal foramen.
Ovicell inflated, large (0,8 mm long), obscuring most of the frontal wall of the
succeeding zooid from which it is derived; with a frontal umbo and a series of
conspicuous radiating striations and marginal slits, closed by zooidal opercu-
lum. Ancestrula similar to later zooids but smaller (0,56 mm long), with seven
oral spines.
Etymology
Africanus (L.)—African.
Remarks
Macropora is an ancient genus known mostly from the Tertiary deposits of
Australia and New Zealand. The type species, M. centralis MacGillivray
(Miocene, Victoria), is possibly synonymous with M. grandis (Hutton) whose
distribution in time extends from the Lower Miocene to the present (Brown
1952). Recent specimens have been reported from New Zealand (Uttley &
Bullivant 1972) and the Philippines (Brown 1952). M. grandis is a larger species
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
than M. africana, with zooids up to 1,2 mm long, and is further distinguished
by a proportionally more elongate operculum and distinct oral shelf, by the
possession of a distinct raised peristome, by a complete absence of oral spines,
and by the absence of a zooid orifice distal to the ovicell.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
EZ Iz
0,78 0,62
Family Cellariidae Hincks, 1880
Cellariidae Hincks, 1880: 103. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 119.
Cellaria Ellis & Solander, 1786
Cellaria Ellis & Solander, 1786: 18. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 119.
Cellaria tectiformis Hayward & Cook, 1979
Cellaria tectiformis Hayward & Cook, 1979: 69, fig. 7.
Material
Stations SM 103, SM 131, SM 151, SM 233, SM 234.
Remarks
A single large, living, colony was obtained from each of the two stations
SM 233, and SM 234.
Cellaria punctata (Busk, 1852)
Fig. 8B
Salicornaria punctata Busk, 1852: 366 (partim).
Cellaria gracilis: Marcus, 1922: 19, fig. 11.
Cellaria punctata: Harmer, 1926: 337, pl. 21 (figs 14-16), text-fig. 13a.
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 180.
Description
Colony forming diffuse, straggling tufts up to 50 mm high. Joints consist-
ing of tangled masses of brown, chitinous tubes, each arising from inconspicu-
ous calcified sockets on the frontal surfaces of the zooids at the distal and
proximal end of each internode, possibly representing kenozooids. Internodes
straight or gently curved, up to 8 mm long, with a maximum width of 0,7 mm,
typically broadening distally, with distinct dilatations along length; comprised
of five to seven longitudinal series of zooids. Autozooids regularly
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 35)
hexagonal, separated by distinct sutures; cryptocyst granular, concave, the
central area particularly depressed and delimited by a prominent ridge. Opesia
situated in distal third of zooid, semicircular; distal border raised, forming a
distinct cowl, with finely beaded edge; proximal border with a projecting,
rounded lip, and a pair of thick lateral denticles. Avicularia vicarious, infre-
quent, typically present at distal end of each internode, close to joint; as large
as autozooid, with a broadly triangular rostrum occupying half frontal surface,
supporting a distally directed triangular mandible. Proximal border of avicula-
rian opesia with an anvil-shaped lip, distal corners of which fuse with sides of
opesia to delimit paired lateral opesiules; palate scarcely developed, with a
large rounded foramen. Fertile zooids constitute the characteristic dilatations,
typically seven in a whorl; ovicellar orifice inconspicuous, largely occluded by a
proximal projection from the succeeding zooid.
Remarks
This species was described by Busk (1852) from Queensland and rede-
scribed by Harmer (1926), who examined material from a number of Indo-
Pacific localities and included Marcus’s (1922) South African specimens and
Thornley’s (1905, given as 1895 in error) Ceylon material of ‘Cellaria johnsoni’
in his synonymy. The present material shows some differences from the
specimens studied by Harmer (for example, Holborn Island, Queensland,
BMNH 1928.9.13.87), most notably in zooid numbers. In the Holborn Island
specimen each internode comprises four to six longitudinal series of zooids; in
the Meiring Naude material the proximal end of each internode has five series
of zooids, broadens rapidly to six, and has seven in the fertile swellings. The
avicularian rostrum is more rounded in the Australian material, but zooid
morphology and size are comparable with the South African specimens. A
“specimen from the Red Sea (BMNH 1963.8.10.37 pt.) is identical to the
Meiring Naude specimens.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Ly Iz
0,48 0,29
Cellaria paradoxa Hayward & Cook, 1979
Cellaria paradoxa Hayward & Cook, 1979: 71, fig. 8.
Material
Station SM 103.
Remarks
Worn internodes of this species were present in the coarser sediment
fraction from station SM 103. A somewhat similar species with dimorphic
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
zooids was described from the Eocene of North and South Carolina as C.
bifaciata by Canu & Bassler (1920: 274, pl. 40 (figs 14-17)).
Family Aspidostomatidae Jullien, 1888
Aspidostomatidae Jullien, 1888: 77. Harmer, 1926: 322.
Aspidostoma Hincks, 1881
Aspidostoma Hincks, 1881: 159. Harmer, 1926: 323.
Aspidostoma livida sp. nov.
Fig. 10
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26420, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 131, SM 164, SM 184, SM 239.
Description
Colony erect, bilaminar, reticulate, forming broad, plate-like lobes, larg-
est fragment obtained measuring 45 X50 mm; alcohol-preserved material
retaining a deep blue-grey colour. Fenestrulae up to 4 mm long, apparently
regularly distributed, about four occurring in each cm? of colony surface.
Zooids hexagonal, convex, separated by distinct grooves, thickly calcified with
a coarsely granular surface. Frontal wall convex proximally, dipping distally
towards a small deep-set opesia; proximal edge of opesia (delimiting the
‘polypide tube’) forming a thickened axehead-shaped lip. A thick median
ridge extends for a short distance proximally from the outer edge of the
opesial lip. Distal end of zooid raised as a prominent hood, frequently deve-
loped on each corner into short flattened processes. Operculum transversely
oval, thickly calcified, white. Ovicell globose, rather flattened frontally, with a
coarsely granular surface; opening via a hooded aperture distal to the zooid
operculum. Interzooidal avicularia sporadically distributed over the colony;
rostrum acute triangular, distolaterally directed; cross-bar incomplete, palate
with an elliptical central foramen. Fenestrulae rimmed by single series of large
kenozooids.
Groups of frontally budded zooids appear to inaugurate new laminae. The
form of the colony could not be discerned, but the large bilaminar plates were
flat or gently dished, rather than convoluted, and new plates appear to develop
perpendicular to their predecessors. Unlike the fenestrate colonies of Dimor-
phocella moderna (see p. 48) from the same station, A. livida shows no
formation of central ribs of calcification.
Etymology
Lividus (L.)—bluish, referring to the colour of the colony.
37
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
il ofa
ds and
i
Deta
icelled zoo
IG
ing two ov
laria. <x 40
includ
and avicu
lls,
x 40.
Il
f a colony,
ing Ovice
ice
Portion o
Develop
A
B.
damaged ov
nov.
x< DS
da sp
ids
1
Aspidostoma liv
ight) two kenozoo
Fig. 10.
(bottom r
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
The material from station SM 239 comprised a large number of reticulate
fragments which may have represented just one large colony, no basal attach-
ment was found. The only erect Recent species of Aspidostoma develop slender
cylindrical colonies, although Waters (1905: 243) described specimens of A.
giganteum (Busk) that displayed a loosely anastomosing form. Erect branched
species of Aspidostoma were described from the Tertiary of New Zealand by
Brown (1952).
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
1e7; Iz
0,89 O75
Family Scrupocellariidae Levinsen, 1909
Scrupocellariidae Levinsen, 1909: 130. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 128.
Caberea Lamouroux, 1816
Caberea Lamouroux, 1816: 128. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 128.
Caberea darwinii Busk, 1884
Caberea darwinii Busk, 1884: 29, pl. 32 (fig. 6c—f).
Caberea darwinii: Hastings, 1943: 374, pl. 5 (figs 1-3), text-figs 21, 22A—C, 23A—D, 24A.
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 179, SM 184, SM 185, SM 239.
Remarks
The geographical distribution of Caberea darwinii has been discussed at
length by Hastings (1943). It extends from New Zealand westward to the
Patagonian Shelf and is widespread in Antarctic and Subantarctic waters; it has
been recorded from Kerguelen, Prince Edward Island, and Marion Island, but
has not been reported before from South Africa.
Eupaxia Hasenbank, 1932
Eupaxia Hasenbank, 1932: 321, 363.
Eupaxia quadrata (Busk, 1884)
Cellularia quadrata Busk, 1884: 18, pl. 5 (fig. 5).
Eupaxia incarnata Hasenbank, 1932: 363, fig. 30A—C.
Eupaxia quadrata: Hayward & Cook, 1979: 63, fig. 6C-F.
Material
Station SM 232.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 39
Remarks
This species was redescribed and figured by Hayward & Cook (1979). A
single fragment of a live colony was collected during the present survey.
Menipea Lamouroux, 1812
Menipea Lamouroux, 1812: 183. Harmer, 1923: 339. Hastings, 1943: 331.
Menipea crispa (Pallas, 1766)
Cellularia crispa Pallas, 1766: 71.
Menipea crispa: Marcus, 1922: 11. Hastings, 1943: 332. O’Donoghue, 1957: 75, figs 1-2.
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 179.
Remarks
M. crispa appears to have a limited geographical distribution, from
Saldanha Bay (South Africa) to Madagascar (Hastings 1943). Live specimens
were collected from each of the three Meiring Naude stations, which ranged in
depth from 50 to 90 m.
Menipea triseriata Busk, 1852
Menipea triseriata Busk, 1852: 22, pl. 23 (figs 2-4).
Menipea triseriata: Harmer, 1923: 342, pl. 17 (fig. 18), pl. 19 (figs 40-42). O’Donoghue,
IETS WO
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 164, SM 179, SM 180, SM 185.
Remarks
This distinctive species is known only from South Africa. The present
material includes several very large, luxuriantly branched colonies.
Menipea ornata (Busk, 1852)
Cellularia ornata Busk, 1852: 20, pl. 20 (figs 3-4).
Menipea ornata: Harmer, 1923: 340.
Menipea flabellum: Marcus, 1922: 13, fig. 7.
Cellularia infantae O’Donoghue, 1924: 30, pl.1 (fig. 6). O'Donoghue & De Watteville,
1935: 207; 1937: 12.
Material
Station SM 185.
Remarks
The confused synonymy of this species has been clarified by Harmer
(1923) and by Hastings (1943: 332).
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Menipea marionensis Busk, 1884
Menipea marionensis Busk, 1884: 21, pl. 4 (figs 3, 3a).
Menipea marionensis: Harmer, 1923: 341, pl. 17 (fig. 22), pl. 19 (figs 43-45).
Material
Stations SM 179, SM 180, SM 185.
Remarks
This species appears to be known only from the Cape of Good Hope. The
present specimens were obtained living, at depths of 80 and 90 m.
Family Bicellariellidae Levinsen, 1909
Bicellariellidae Levinsen, 1909: 93. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 146.
Bugulella Verrill, 1879
Bugulella Verrill, 1879: 472. Maturo & Schopf, 1968: 36.
Bugulella australis Hayward & Cook, 1979
Bugulella australis Hayward & Cook, 1979: 64, fig. 6A-B. Millard, 1980: 143.
Material
Station SM 233.
Remarks
The material comprised a tangled mass, probably representing several
colonies, and was living when collected. Following its recent description in the
first report of the Meiring Naude Bryozoa (Hayward & Cook 1979), substantial
material was found in the Galathea deep-sea collections from a station in the
Tasman Sea at 610 m (Hayward 1981).
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
IZ Lop lop
0,74 0,28 0,18
Bugulella problematica sp. nov.
Fig. 9D-E
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26421, station SM 233, 32°15,2’S 29°09,8’E, 540-580 m.
Description
Colony erect, straggling, delicate; composed of branching uniserial chains
of zooids forming a dense tangled tuft. Zooids elongate, club-shaped: oval
distally, tapered proximally to a slender tubaeform shape; thinly calcified and
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 41
translucent. Opesia oval, with a narrow cryptocyst border; typically with three
pairs of slender spines regularly spaced around distal end, rarely up to ten
spines distributed around whole of opesial border. Each zooid budding up to
three new zooids: one distal, one on each side from a point level with the
proximal half of the opesia. Distal bud constant, colony developing as a
uniserial chain, some or all of whose members produce secondary chains, on
one or both sides, perpendicular to the first; tertiary chains may form in the
same way. The lateral budding points, marked by large, distinct septula, may
instead give rise to irregularly tubular kenozooids that link with septula of
zooids in neighbouring branches; rarely, such kenozooids develop at the distal
budding point. Avicularia pedunculate, with short, semi-elliptical mandibles;
single, more usually paired, arising from lateral budding points and thus
precluding development of side chains where they occur. Rarely, a single
avicularium develops distally, frontal to the proximal tubular portion of the
next zooid. Ovicell prominent, terminal; spherical, with finely tessellated sur-
face, closed by zooidal operculum.
Etymology
Problematicos (Gr.)—problematical.
Remarks
The budding pattern of Bugulella problematica, and the paired lateral
avicularia, serve to distinguish it from B. australis (above), in which lateral
branches are initiated by a second distal bud, which becomes fused with a
tubular structure (?kenozooid) arising from the lateral septulum of its twin. The
avicularium of B. australis is constantly distal in position, and the zooids tend to
be larger than those of B. problematica. However, zooids of the latter species
may be found with up to ten opesial spines, typical of B. australis, and the
ovicell is practically identical in both species. Specimens of the two species were
found intermingled in the same sample and some doubt must remain that the
apparently significant difference in budding pattern may prove to be an
astogenetic effect.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Lop lop
0,51 O25 0,15
Family Beaniidae Canu & Bassler, 1927
Beaniidae Canu & Bassler, 1927: 14. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 150.
Beania Johnston, 1840
Beania Johnston, 1840: 272. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 150.
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Beania magellanica (Busk, 1852)
Diachoris magellanica Busk, 1852: 54, pl. 67 (figs 1-3).
Beania magellanica: Hastings, 1943: 414, figs 34C, 35G.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 179, SM 239.
Distribution
Widespread; reported from the Mediterranean to the Falkland Islands,
from Australia to Japan, and throughout the Indian Ocean. Recorded from
South Africa by Marcus (1922) and O’Donoghue (1957).
Beania rediviva sp. nov.
Fig. 9F-G
Beania erecta: Hasenbank, 1932: 342, fig. 1SA—C.
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26422, station SM 250, 31°59,3’S 29°22,5’E, 150-200 m.
Etymology
Redivivus (L.)—renewed, alluding to the newly recognized identity of the
species.
Remarks
The Antarctic-Subantarctic Beania erecta Waters was redescribed by
Hastings (1943: 416), who excluded Hasenbank’s (1932) record from Agulhas
Bank from her synonymy. Hasenbank’s figure showed several significant differ-
ences from typical B. erecta: the distal ends of the zooids- were smoothly
rounded, lacking the paired lateral oral projections seen in B. erecta, and the
avicularia were very large, with a slender, strongly hooked rostrum comprising
almost half the total length. These features are shown particularly well in the
present specimen (Fig. 9G) and it is appropriate to introduce a new name for
Hasenbank’s species.
Family Bugulidae Gray, 1848
Bugulidae Gray, 1848: 110, 146. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 151.
Bugula Oken, 1815
Bugula Oken, 1815: 89. Ryland & Hayward, 1977: 151.
Bugula dentata (Lamouroux, 1816)
Acamarchis dentata Lamouroux, 1816: 135, pl. 3 (fig. 3a—b).
Bugula dentata: O’Donoghue, 1924: 33; 1957: 82. Harmer, 1926: 439, pl. 30 (figs 5-6), pl. 32
(figs 21-25).
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 43
Material
Station SM 180.
Remarks
This well-characterized species was reported from South Africa by
O’Donoghue (1924), who collected it on the lower shore at Agulhas Light,
Cape Province. All South African records were documented in a later paper
(O’Donoghue 1957).
Family Cribrilinidae Hincks, 1880
Cribrilinidae Hincks, 1880: 182. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 56.
Cribrilaria Canu & Bassler, 1929
Cribrilaria Canu & Bassler, 1929: 33. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 62.
Cribrilaria innominata (Couch, 1844)
Lepralia innominata Couch, 1844: 114, pl. 22 (fig. 4).
Cribrilaria innominata: Harmelin, 1970: 84, figs 1d-f, 2, pl. 1 (figs 4-6). Hayward & Ryland,
M/S 564> figs 17:
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164.
Remarks
This widespread species is characterized by its umbonate frontal shield,
and the presence of a large, conspicuous, suboral lacuna. Live colonies were
collected at both of the above stations.
Cribrilaria venusta (Canu & Bassler, 1925)
Fig. 11A
Puellina venusta Canu & Bassler, 1925: 22, pl. 2 (fig. 5).
Cribrilaria venusta: Harmelin, 1976a: 180, pl. 2 (figs 3-5).
Material
Station SM 239.
Remarks
This is a distinctive species recognized initially by its broad and relatively
flat frontal shield composed of numerous slender costae. These are usually little
thickened, though occasionally developing a series of peripheral knobs. The
first pair of costae proximal to the orifice fuse and thicken medially to form a
triangular umbo and there are no suboral pores; conversely the pores between
the umbonate first pair of costae and the second pair are typically large and
distinct. There are five oral spines. The avicularian rostrum is slender, acumi-
nate, and frequently with a gentle lateral curve.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 11. A. Cribrilaria venusta (Canu & Bassler). B. Figularia sp., two zooids, with an ovicell from a
missing zooid. C. Cribrilaria africana sp. nov., a specimen from SM 164. D. Vittaticella sp. E-F. Giganto-
pora foraminosa sp. nov. E. Portion of a branch, showing progressive elaboration of the spiramen.
F. Outline diagram of primary orifice. Scale = 0,5 mm for A—D, F; 1 mm for E.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 45
Cribrilaria venusta has only recently been redescribed by Harmelin
(1976a), who summarized its known distribution. The present material is
closely similar in zooid size (0,46-0,6 mm xX 0,38-0,44 mm) and morphology to
specimens collected from the western end of the English Channel. Although
the present record marks a significant extension of its geographical range, the
distribution of C. venusta, like those of other species of Cribrilaria, is
imperfectly known and will probably prove to be very broad.
Cribrilaria africana sp. nov.
Fig. 11C
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26423, station SM 164, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 250.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids oval, rather flat; costate frontal shield
comprising larger part of frontal surface, with only a narrow rim of gymnocyst.
Costae with small marginal tubercles, but without a central umbo. Orifice with
straight, smooth proximal edge, six or seven closely spaced oral spines. Suboral
region (between orificial bar and first pair of frontal costae) broad, triangular
and flat, with up to five large pores, and many small pores. Avicularium small,
Squeezed in between successive zooids, or occasionally developed on gymno-
cyst, semi-pedunculate; rostrum slender, c.0,1 mm long. Ovicell small, spher-
ical, hyaline, with a small, median umbo, frequently with an avicularium closely
adjacent to it on each side.
Etymology
Africanus (L.)—African.
Remarks
This species is readily distinguishable from those reviewed by Harmelin
(1976a) by the conspicuous suboral pores and the small semi-pedunculate
avicularium.
Measurements (means of 16 values) in mm
187, Iz
0,39 0,29
Figularia Jullien, 1886
Figularia Jullien, 1886: 608. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 70.
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figularia philomela (Busk, 1884)
Cribrilina philomela Busk, 1884: 132, pl. 17 (fig. 6).
Figularia philomela: Hayward & Cook, 1979: 76, fig. 9B.
Material
Station SM 163.
Remarks
The present material, comprising several small encrusting live colonies,
was collected in waters far shallower than those sampled by the first series of
Meiring Naude stations.
Figularia sp.
Fig. 11B
Material
Station SM 163.
Remarks
The material comprised two fragments of live colonies, the largest
including five complete zooids, together with portions of four others. The
zooids were large and flat (0,8-0,9 mm x 0,7-0,8 mm); the costate frontal
shield was small, constituting less than half of the total frontal surface, although
costae and intercostal pores were distinct. Two or more large pseudopores were
present on each of the costae, and the rest of the frontal surface, and the
surface of the ovicell, were covered with similar pseudopores, indicated by
brown chitinized cuticle. This species does not seem to have been described
before, but the paucity of material precludes a complete description being
presented here.
Family Exochellidae Bassler, 1953
Exochellidae Bassler, 1953: G205. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 78.
Escharoides Milne Edwards, 1836
Escharoides Milne Edwards, 1836: 218. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 78.
Escharoides contorta (Busk, 1854)
Eschara contorta Busk, 1854: 89, pl. 108 (figs 1-3).
Mucronella contorta: Busk, 1884: 155, pl. 20 (fig. 9). O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1937: 18.
Escharoides contorta: O’Donoghue, 1957: 88, figs 10-11.
Material
Stations SM 151, SM 162, SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 180,
SM 184, SM 185; SM 239.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 47
Remarks
This species is known only from South Africa. It was particularly
abundant in the present collections and live colonies were collected from most
of the stations listed. Colony form varied greatly, from simple encrusting sheets
to broad bilaminar plates and slender, branching cylindrical growths.
Family Adeonidae Jullien, 1903
Adeonidae Jullien in Jullien & Calvet, 1903: 53. Cook, 1973: 246.
Dimorphocella Maplestone, 1903
Dimorphocella Maplestone, 1903: 140.
Description
Colony erect, branching, bilaminar. Autozooids with sinuate secondary
calcified orifice. Frontal shields umbonuloid, zooids surrounded by marginal
frontal septula. Brooding zooids dimorphic, large, with wide, non-sinuate
orifices; frontal shields with several spiramina. Adventitious avicularia uni-
lateral or paired, acute; interzooidal marginal avicularia sometimes present,
mandibles slung on paired condyles.
Remarks
The genus is inferred to have umbonuloid ontogeny of zooid frontal
shields, as in Adeona and Adeonellopsis (see Cook 1973). The enlarged
brooding zooids and condylate avicularia are also characteristic of the family.
Dimorphocella differs from the other genera in the strongly sinuate autozooid
orifice, and the apparent lack of frontal spiramen pores in autozooids.
Dimorphocella is known from the Tertiary of Australia, but has not been
reported as Recent (see below). The genus was introduced somewhat
informally by Maplestone (1903), who stated, ‘I propose this genus for a form
presently to be described, and Adeonella triton McG’. The species then
described, D. pyriformis Maplestone (1903: 141, pl. 16 (fig. 1)), was illustrated
with strongly sinuate autozooid orifices, and paired, medially orientated
avicularia. The brooding zooids had an enlarged distal cavity and a central,
circular, porous frontal area, and paired avicularia orientated distally.
Adeonella triton MacGillivray (1895: 90, pl. 19 (fig. 23)) was originally
described with similar characters, except that the autozooidal avicularia were
unilateral and the brooding zooids were not distally expanded. A. triton, as
later described by Maplestone (1903, pl. 16 (fig. 2)) had paired, distally
orientated avicularia and a denticulate process on the proximal side of the
brooding zooid orifice, but appears to be the same species. Although Canu &
Bassler (1920: 571, fig. 170A—B; 1929: 384) indicated A. triton as ‘genotype’ of
Dimorphocella, Maplestone’s (1903) choice was definite, if unorthodox, and D.
pyriformis was later listed as type species by Bassler (1935: 95; 1953: G213,
fig. 161, 5). Canu & Bassler (1920) included Dimorphocella portmarina
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Maplestone (1913: 359, pl. 28 (fig. 5)), a Recent Australian species, in
Dimorphocella, but this form has conspicuous autozooidal spiramina and is
referable to Adeona (see Canu & Bassler 1929).
Waters (1881: 340, pl. 18 (fig. 85)), described another Tertiary Australian
species as Schizoporella submersa. No brooding zooids were described and
none have been found in specimens in the British Museum (Natural History)
collections (D32901-2, D34733, see fig. 14A). The autozooidal characters of S.
submersa are similar to those of D. pyriformis. S. submersa as described by
MacGillivray (1895: 82, pl. 11 (figs 8-9)) may not be the same species (see
Brown 1958: 60).
Dimorphocella moderna sp. nov.
Figs 12-13
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26424, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 164, SM 179, SM 180, SM 185, SM 250.
Description
Colony erect, bilaminar, fenestrate, deeply pigmented, formed of slightly
curved, frequently anastomosing plates. Central part of plates becoming
thickened and forming branched strengthening ribs. Zooids arranged in
alternate bifurcating and recombining series, forming fenestrulae that are
bordered by large interzooidal avicularia. Autozooids with a complete series of
marginal frontal septula, sometimes with additional frontal septula. Frontal
shields otherwise imperforate except for a suboral spiramen which is occluded
early in ontogeny. Secondary calcified orifice with a deep proximal sinus.
Brooding zooids very large, raised distally, with a wide orifice, denticulate
proximally. Central frontal area with several spiramen pores. Adventitious
avicularia usually unilateral, occasionally absent in autozooids, in all cases
orientated distally. Large, interzooidal fenestral avicularia acute, with raised
rostra, mandibles hinged on prominent paired condyles, orientated distally.
Etymology
Modernus (L.)—of the present, referring to the Recent occurrence of the
species.
Remarks
D. moderna is represented by worn fragments from all the stations listed,
except from SM 239. This station provided abundant material that was alive
when collected. Although no complete colony is present, and the substratum
and mode of attachment is unknown, the larger plates indicate that colonies
probably exceed 100 mm in height or diameter. Each plate is slightly curved,
and the zooids on the outward-facing convex side are occluded by extrazooidal
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
12. Dimorphocella moderna sp. nov. A. Frontal surface of a branch, showing
dimorphic orifices. x 48. B. Basal surface. x 36.
49
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
50
ion of two branches. X 27.
ion of a branch showing
fus
Sect
C
il showing
. X 66.
1a
Deta
lar
kening
A
icarlous avicu
nov.
ith v
hocella moderna sp
f a branch w
imorp
D
in oO
.
ig. 13.
B. Marg
F
, x 24°5:
frontal thic
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 51
calcification earlier in astogeny than those of the concave surface (see Fig.
12A-B). Although the budding pattern of plates is primarily in one plane,
secondary plates arise later in astogeny at right angles to the primary plates,
and anastomose with them. These secondary plates originate from a frontally
budded group of three to seven zooids that later form a bilaminar expansion.
The central rib of each plate is formed by localized thickening of the frontal
shields of zooids, which becomes extrazooidal. The thickening also occurs on
the convex surface in advance of that on the concave surface (Fig. 13C), but
at the base of the colony is equally developed on both surfaces, forming a
cylinder 6mm in diameter. The frontal shields may exceed 2,80 mm in
thickness, but the zooidal cavity is not occluded. Neighbouring unthickened
zooids, even at the base of the colony, possess lophophores, and are inferred
to have been capable of feeding. The fenestrulae are oval and are formed by
the regular bifurcation and recombination of zooid series. They are more
frequent in occurrence than those of Aspidostoma livida (see p. 36). Some
growing edges that had been damaged before collection show that regenerated
zooids (with lighter pigmentation) re-form fenestrulae in the same position as
before. There is some variation in orifice width among autozooids (see Fig.
13A). This appears to be related to the bifurcation and recombination of
series, but by analogy with Adeonella (see Harmer 1957), may also reflect a
sexual function.
The umbonuloid nature of the frontal calcified shield may be seen at the
growing tip of a few young secondary branches of anastomosing plates, which
have been protected. The exposed growing edges of the primary plates have
been damaged. The minute frontal spiramen is apparently occluded early in
ontogeny. This may be correlated with the presence of a sinus in the secondary
calcified orifice. This, by analogy with similar sinuate cryptocystidean forms
(e.g. Laminopora), would allow passage of water into the ascus during
protrusion of the lophophore.
Colonies are the substratum for several encrusting bryozoans, cirripedes,
foraminifera, serpulids, etc., and have numerous small ophiuroids in the
cavities formed by the anastomoses of plates.
No Recent species truly referable to Dimorphocella has been reported
before (see above), and the genus does not now seem to be represented in
Australian seas. Fossil Australian colonies were erect and branched, but D.
moderna resembles the fenestrate colonies of Adeona, which are found from
the Australian Tertiary-to-Recent. These colonies reach a height and diameter
of 25 cm, and are attached and supported by flexible rooting structures formed
by alternating cuticular and calcified kenozooidal elements. Large colonies of
Adeona also develop strengthening ribs by extrazooidal frontal calcification. At
present, the attachment of both D. moderna and the fenestrate Aspidostoma
livida, which were abundant at station SM 239, is unknown.
D. moderna closely resembles D. triton, differing in its colony form and
the presence of fenestral avicularia.
a2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
7, Iz Lbr.z Ibr.z
0,61 0,35 0,69 0,53
Lor lor Lbr.or l.br.or
0,15 0,13 0,06 OMA
Lad.av. Lint.av
0,24 0,45
Lm Im
0,14 0,25
Family Exechonellidae Harmer, 1957
Exechonellidae Harmer, 1957: 651.
Exechonella Duvergier, 1924
Exechonella Duvergier, 1924: 18, see Cheetham, 1966: 62. Canu & Bassler, 1927: 4. Cook,
1967: 337.
Exechonella sp.
Fig. 5G
Material
Stations SM 164, SM 185, SM 250.
Remarks
Only small and badly damaged colonies of this species were found. The
zooids were up to 1,3 mm long by 0,9 mm broad, pyriform in shape with the
distal end formed into a tubular peristome, broken short in all cases. The frontal
wall consists of an umbonuloid shield perforated by large round pores, rimmed
by concentric calcification, indicating that they are progressively infilled.
Avicularia, spines and ovicells were not evident. Sufficient detail of the zooid
morphology was preserved to suggest that this is a species of Exechonella (Cook
1967), but the material was too damaged to permit identification to species.
Family Watersiporidae Vigneaux, 1949
Watersiporidae Vigneaux, 1949: 15, 20.
The family includes genera with finely pseudoporous frontal shields and
opercula with well-developed sclerites. Avicularia are usually absent, but
polymorphic zooids may occur (Cook 1979). Ovicells are present in some
species of Pachycleithonia but absent in other genera.
Pachycleithonia Canu & Bassler, 1930
Pachycleithonia Canu & Bassler, 1930: 25. Cook, 1983b.
Colonies encrusting. Zooids large; orifice with almost rectangular sinus
and often massive condyles. Frontal cuticle and opercula dark brown or purple.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 53)
The affinities and general characters of the genus, which has a worldwide
tropical and subtropical distribution, have been discussed by Cook (19835).
Ovicellate brooding zooids have not been described in the type species, P.
nigra Canu & Bassler, from the Galapagos Islands, but distinctive, reticulate,
hyperstomial ovicells are known in P. mutabilis and P. africana.
Pachycleithonia mutabilis (Canu & Bassler, 1929)
Fig. 14B
Galeopsis mutabilis (?partim) Canu & Bassler, 1929: 273, pl. 28 (figs 4-5), ?fig. 111A-B, ?non
pl. 28 (fig. 6).
Gigantopora mutabilis: Harmer, 1957: 883, pl. 40 (fig. 8).
Pachycleithonia mutabilis: Cook, 1983b.
Material
Stations SM 129, SM 131.
Description
Pachycleithonia with elongated tubular peristome and large peristomial
spiramen. Zooids communicating by distal and lateral septula situated at the
base of the vertical walls, surrounded by calcified buttresses. Frontal septula
large: one pair on each side of the orifice, another pair at each lateral corner of
the zooid. Ovicell hyperstomial not closed by the zooidal operculum; formed by
a very thinly calcified, or wholly cuticular inner capsule derived from the
maternal zooid, surrounded by a reticulate ooecial cover derived from the
frontal shield of the distal zooid.
Remarks
The Meiring Naude material consists only of three small fragments, one of
which has a single ovicell. Like many of the species described here, P. mutabilis
is a relatively shallow-water form and these specimens represent transported
debris. The elongated peristome, with its prominent spiramen, is easily
damaged and is not present in all zooids.
Both Harmer (1957) and Cook (1983b) have noted that the material
originally described by Canu & Bassler (1929) from the Philippine Islands
appears to have comprised two species. One of these (Canu & Bassler 1929,
pl. 28, figs 4-5) resembles the material described by Harmer (1957) from
Indonesia, and also the Meiring Naude fragments; the other (pl. 28, fig. 6) has
larger zooids and was described as having minute lateral oral avicularia.
However, this latter photograph had been retouched, and it appears that the
‘avicularia’ are, in fact, the elongated cavities (areolae) above a distal pair of
frontal septula. A. H. Cheetham (1979 in litt.) examined the original specimen
and commented, “They do appear to be aerolae, and ... can be seen to lie
above large septular openings’. The opercula figured by Canu & Bassler (1929,
fig. 111A—B) might have originated from either or both of their specimens. The
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
54
ithonia mutabilis
Pachycle
x 64.
: B.
18.46.
Xx 63
10
BMNH 1882
y)
tmorphocella submersa (Waters)
(Canu & Bassler)
D
A
14
ig.
F
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 55)
opercula of the Siboga specimens, and of a specimen from the Mascarene
Islands (BMNH 1882.10.18.46), closely resemble those of Watersipora arcuata
Banta (see Ryland 1974, fig. 3B), and those of the west African species
P. africana Cook (19836). P. africana is very similar to P. mutabilis in several
other characters, and also has reticulate ovicells. Unlike P. mutabilis, however,
the ovicell is closed by the operculum, and although the peristome is elongated
it is not tubular and a spiramen rarely develops.
Distribution
P. mutabilis is known from the Philippines and Indonesia, Mauritius and
south-east Africa.
Family Euthyrisellidae Bassler, 1953
Euthyrisellidae Bassler, 1953: G226.
Tropidozoum Harmer, 1957
Tropidozoum Harmer, 1957: 1106. Cook, 1975: 161. Cook & Chimonides, 1981b: 64.
Colonies rooted, cellariiform, internodes connected by cuticular keno-
zooidal joints. Zooid frontal surfaces occupying only part of the curved face of
the internode; the other side consisting of a column of extrazooidal coelom,
limited by a cuticular wall. Frontal shields depressed, with foramina; hypostegal
coelom on both sides of the calcification. Brooding zooids large, with inflated
basal walls and dimorphic orifices. Avicularia absent.
The characters and relationships of this interesting genus are discussed by
Cook & Chimonides (19815).
Tropidozoum burrowsi Cook & Chimonides, 1981
Tropidozoum sp. Cook, 1975: 165, pl. 1 (NB explanation of pls. 1 and 3 transposed), fig. 2B.
Tropidozoum burrowsi Cook & Chimonides, 1981b: 65, figs 5—6, 10.
Material
Stations SM 131, SM 151.
Description
Tropidozoum with narrow basal coelom. Zooids with small frontal
foramina; orifice with a deep triangular sinus. Orifice of brooding zooid wide,
without a sinus.
Remarks
T. burrowsi is known to live in relatively shallow water (15 m), as does the
closely related Indonesian species, T. cellariiforme Harmer. The worn
internodes from stations SM 131 and SM 151 (780 m and 900 m respectively)
have obviously been transported. Previous records from South Africa (BMNH
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1949.11.10.184, off Durban, 90 m) were also of transported internodes, and it
would appear that living colonies will eventually be found only in shallow or
coastal waters.
Distribution
Madagascar and South Africa.
Family Smittinidae Levinsen, 1909
Smittinidae Levinsen, 1909: 335. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 98.
Smittina Norman, 1903
Smittina Norman, 1903: 120. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 98.
Smittina sitella sp. nov.
Fig. 15D-E
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26425, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 185, SM 239.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids oval, convex, separated by distinct grooves.
Primary orifice slightly wider than long, proximal border largely occupied by a
very broad lyrula, condyles small and generally inconspicuous. Peristome well
developed, deep, distal border encroaching on to frontal surface of succeeding
zooid, typically bearing one or two lateral lobes and incorporating medioproxi-
mally a conical avicularian cystid. Rostrum situated on distal face of cystid,
elongate, triangular, acute to frontal plane. Adventitious avicularia also present
adjacent to orifice, typically paired, occasionally single; cystid short, conical,
rostrum directed laterally, or proximally, or oblique to either direction. Frontal
wall finely granular with a few widely spaced pores, each becoming deeply
immersed and conspicuous in later ontogeny. With the development of the
suboral avicularium the pores proximal to the orifice become occluded and in
highly calcified zooids frontal perforation appears to be limited to marginal
areas. Ovicell hyperstomial, prominent, spherical, with regularly spaced pores.
Ectooecium produced as a conspicuous frontal lip.
Etymology
Sitella (L.)—a little bucket, referring to the shape of the ovicell.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,67 0,44
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 3//
Fig. 15. A-C. Smittina ferruginea sp. nov. A. Zooids from the growing edge. B. Ovicelled zooids, with
additional avicularia. C. Outline diagram of primary orifice. D-E. Smittina sitella sp. nov. D. A group of
zooids, with ovicells and lateral avicularia. E. Outline diagram of primary orifice. F. Smittoidea errata sp.
nov. G-—H. Smittoidea circumspecta sp. nov. G. A group of zooids, with varying development of the suboral
avicularia. H. Outline diagram of primary orifice. I-J. Celleporaria capensis (O’Donoghue & de
Watteville). I. Three autozooids and a vicarious avicularium. J. A young zooid with oral spines intact.
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Smittina ferruginea sp. nov.
Fig. 1SA—C
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26426, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar, forming broad irregular sheets. Zooids
large, hexagonal, rather flat, separated by shallow grooves. Primary orifice
subterminal, wider than long; lyrula broad and low, occupying greater part of
proximal border, condyles short, quadrate, conspicuous. No oral spines.
Peristome low, scarcely projecting above frontal surface of zooid; distal border
formed from frontal calcification of succeeding zooid, incorporating proximally
the cystid of a small, median suboral avicularium. Rostrum of avicularium
triangular or semi-elliptical, partly enclosed within peristome, acute to frontal
plane and directed proximally. Additional avicularia may be developed lateral
to the peristome, single or paired; rostrum slender, elongate, straight or gently
curved, typically directed proximally or obliquely proximally, rarely obliquely
distal. Frontal wall finely granular, closely perforated by numerous round
pores, each becoming immersed in a distinct pit as calcification continues.
Ovicell hyperstomial, prominent, spherical, finely granular and regularly
perforated by numerous small round pores; ectooecium forming a frontal lip
continuous with the rim of the peristome.
Etymology
Ferruginus (L.)—rust-coloured.
Remarks
Several large well-grown colonies were collected from station SM 239,
encrusting the living colony of Aspidostoma livida. The preserved material
retained a dull purplish brown colour with scattered patches of deeper reddish
brown. These patches corresponded to sites of active frontal budding, marking
the development of new laminae, and the pigment was seen to be concentrated
in the polypides of the young zooids, and in a narrow fringe around the
undifferentiated growing edge of each lamina.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,87 0,58
Smittoidea Osburn, 1952
Smittoidea Osburn, 1952: 408. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 108.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 3
Smittoidea circumspecta sp. nov.
Fig. 15G-H
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26427, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 184, SM 185, SM 239.
Description
Colony encrusting, forming small round white patches. Zooids small,
hexagonal, broad and convex, separated by deep grooves. Primary orifice
longer than wide, distinctly narrowed proximally, with broad, basally deflected
condyles; proximal border with a slender lyrula, fragile and frequently missing.
Five or six slender closely spaced oral spines on the distal and lateral borders of
the orifice; peristome scarcely developed, forming at the most a low lateral wall
on each side. Suboral avicularium rarely single, typically twinned, frequently
tripled or quadrupled; cystid short, cylindrical and erect, rostrum facing
distally, perpendicular to frontal plane, mandible semicircular. The avicularian
complex forms a two-, three-, or four-lobed digitate process immediately
proximal to, and largely obscuring, the orifice. Frontal wall finely granular,
with a single series of conspicuous marginal pores. Ovicell spherical, recumbent
on succeeding zooid, with numerous small round pores.
Etymology
Circumspectus (L.)—guarded, an allusion to the oral avicularia.
Remarks
The elongate orifice, the closely spaced oral spines and the cluster of
suboral avicularia impart a highly characteristic appearance to this species,
which allows it to be readily distinguished from all other species of Smittoidea.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,46 0,37
Smittoidea errata sp. nov.
Fig. 15F
Smittoidea ?hexagonalis: Hayward & Cook, 1979: 89, fig. 12A-B.
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26428, station SM 163/164, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: station SM 239.
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids quadrate, flat or slightly convex, separated by
distinct grooves. Primary orifice broader than long, with a short square lyrula
occupying about half of the proximal border; condyles distinct, triangular,
basally deflected. Three short distal oral spines present in newly budded zooids;
peristome a low thickened rim enclosing orifice distally and _ laterally,
proximally incorporating a small suboral avicularium. Mandible semicircular,
acute to frontal plane, directed proximally. Occasionally replaced by an
enlarged spatulate avicularium, directed proximolaterally (Hayward & Cook
1979). Frontal wall fine grained, with a series of marginal pores. Ovicell
hyperstomial, recumbent on succeeding zooid; oval, thinly calcified, with about
twenty small irregularly shaped frontal pores.
Etymology
Erratum (L.)—a mistake, referring to the previous misidentification of this
species.
Remarks
The single specimen of this species collected from station SM 86 during
the first Meiring Naude cruise (Hayward & Cook 1979) was erroneously
ascribed to ‘Smittina’ hexagonalis O’Donoghue 1924, which, in fact, lacks a
suboral avicularium. Three small living colonies were present in the second
collection, two of which were incubating embryos.
Measurements (means of 15 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,67 0,51
Smittoidea calcarata sp. nov.
Fig. 16A—-B
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26429, station SM 233, 32°15,2’S 29°09,8’E, 540-580 m.
Description
Colony encrusting, unilaminar, delicate and hyaline. Zooids flat and
broad, irregularly polygonal, separated by shallow grooves. Primary orifice
wider than long, proximal border with a tapered peg-like lyrula, condyles
sharp, slender and conspicuous; distal border almost straight, two short distal
oral spines visible in peripheral zooids, occluded by the development of
succeeding zooids. Peristome short, erect, distal portion formed from the
frontal calcification of the succeeding zooid, with a narrow, parallel-sided
median fissure proximally. Avicularium situated immediately proximal to
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 61
H
05
mm
Fig. 16. A-B. Smittoidea calcarata sp. nov. A. Two zooids from close to the growing edge. B. An ovicelled
zooid. C—D. Parasmittina tropica (Waters). C. Zooids with entire peristomes, showing different types of
avicularia. D. Older zooids, with thickened peristomes. E-H. Parasmittina novella sp. nov. E. A group of
_zooids, with different types of avicularia. F. A zooid bearing an enlarged avicularium with flared serrate
rostrum. G. Zooids with smaller avicularia, with serrate rostra. H. Outline diagram of primary orifice.
62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
peristomial fissure, cystid low, rostrum elliptical, directed proximally, mandible
semicircular. Frontal calcification thin, fine grained and sutured, with a single
series of marginal pores. Ovicell oval, depressed frontally, developing a slight
lip continuous with the zooid orifice; surface finely granular, with scattered,
small, irregular pores.
Etymology
Calcar (L.)—a spur, referring to the sharp condyles within the primary
orifice.
Remarks
A single large colony, measuring approximately 20 mm X 10 mm encrust-
ing Dimorphocella, was collected from station SM 233.
Measurements (means of 15 values) in mm
1EZ Iz
1205 0,79
Parasmittina Osburn, 1952
Parasmittina Osburn, 1952: 411. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 114.
Parasmittina tropica (Waters, 1909)
Fig. 16C—D
Smittia tropica Waters, 1909: 174, pl. 17 (figs 10-14).
Smittina tropica: Harmer, 1957: 934, pl. 64 (figs 23-28).
Parasmittina tropica: Cook, 1968: 215.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 184, SM 185, SM 239.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids elongate, oval or irregular, rather flat. Primary
orifice wider than long, a prominent quadrate lyrula occupying most of the
proximal border, tapered distally to a greater or lesser extent; condyles large
and conspicuous. Four short distal oral spines present in newly budded zooids.
Peristome developing early in ontogeny, encircling primary orifice, and
extending on to frontal surface of ovicell in fertile zooids; tubular, its edge
variably lobed or produced. Proximomedially, the inner edge of the peristome
develops a pair of longitudinal ridges delimiting a central channel, which in
damaged specimens gives the illusion of a sinuate orifice. Frontal wall nodular,
with a single series of large and distinct marginal pores. Adventitious
avicularium arising laterally at base of peristome, directed proximally, laterally
or medially, typically single, occasionally, paired; rostrum slender, elongate, up
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 63
to 0,15 mm long. Ovicell spherical, with numerous small pores; recumbent on
succeeding zooid and eventually deriving an ooecial cover from it.
Remarks
Parasmittina tropica is readily distinguished from other species of this
genus by the form of the peristome and by the characteristically slender
avicularia. Some specimens included zooids bearing a second type of avicula-
rium, broader proximally than the usual type (Fig. 16C), but as the latter
frequently occurred on the same zooids also, this variation does not seem to be
significant. The lyrula also varied greatly in width, but again such variation was
observed within single colonies. In the structure of the peristome and the
presence of slender parallel-sided avicularia all the numerous specimens here
ascribed to P. tropica are closely similar.
Distribution
Described originally from the Red Sea coast of the Sudan (Waters 1909),
this species has subsequently been reported from west Africa (Cook 1968) and
the Mediterranean (Hayward 1974), and was accorded a wide distribution in
the Indo-West-Pacific region by Harmer (1957). Soule & Soule (1973) have
shown that some of Harmer’s material comprises a distinct species, P. serrula
Soule & Soule, and, consequently, the distribution of P. tropica may be more
restricted than Harmer supposed.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,54 0,28
Parasmittina novella sp. nov.
Fig. 16E-H
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26430, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar. Zooids oval, rectangular or irregular,
convex, separated by shallow grooves. Primary orifice wider than long, lyrula
short, anvil-shaped, occupying half width of proximal edge, condyles blunt,
broad and conspicuous; two to four short, evanescent, distal oral spines, bases
occluded by development of peristome. Distal portion of peristome developed
from frontal calcification of succeeding zooid; prominent laterally and proxi-
mally, thin and erect, with a deep, parallel-sided medioproximal fissure;
extending on to frontal surface of ovicell in fertile zooids, forming a complete
ring. Free edge of peristome even or lobed. Frontal calcification at first smooth
and hyaline, with a single series of small inconspicuous marginal pores; later
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
thicker and rather nodular. Avicularia lateral or proximolateral to peristome,
single, paired or occasionally tripled, directed proximally; rostrum slender,
parallel-sided and straight, or gently curved, up to 0,17 mm long, palate with a
triangular foramen, pivotal bar thin, without a columella. In many, but not all,
instances the distal edges of the rostrum are slightly flared and distinctly serrate
(Fig. 16G). A larger avicularium may be developed on one side of the zooid,
with an elongate, proximally directed rostrum up to 0,4 mm long; the rostrum
is variably flared distally with fine or coarse serrations. Ovicell small, spherical,
recumbent on distally succeeding zooid, surface finely granular, with numerous
small pores.
Etymology
Novus (L.)—new.
Remarks
Parasmittina novella differs most markedly from P. tropica (Waters) and
from the eastern Pacific P. serrula Soule & Soule in the size of its zooids; for
the latter species Soule & Soule (1973) gave mean dimensions of Lz 0,368 mm,
Iz 0,284 mm, while the zooids of P. novella were 0,6-1,0mm long and
0,38-0,6 mm wide. Although the two species are similar in possessing avicularia
with flared serrate rostra, those of P. serrula seem to be less variable in all
respects than those of P. novella. Both species resemble P. tropica in the form
of the peristome, but in P. novella this is a far more delicate structure, lacking
the proximal longitudinal thickening and sinuate appearance of Waters’s
species.
Measurements (means of 40 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,74 0,44
Porella Gray, 1848
Porella Gray, 1848: 127, 148. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 116.
Porella capensis O'Donoghue, 1924
Fig. 17A-B
Porella capensis O’Donoghue, 1924: 45, pl. 2 (fig. 14).
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 164, SM 239.
Remarks
Several small colonies of this species were found, occurring as irregular
encrusting patches on organic calcareous substrata. The characteristic peri-
stome clearly develops, as O’Donoghue (1924) described, as separate elements,
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 65
K
Fig. 17. A-B. Porella capensis O'Donoghue. A. Zooids with typical development of peristome; note the
lyrula. B. The ancestrula. C. Arthropoma circinatum (MacGillivray). D. Arthropoma sp. E-F. Escharella
discors sp. nov. E. Part of a colony, cleaned to show the lyrula below the peristomial denticle. F. Outline
diagram of primary orifice. G. Escharina waiparaensis Brown. H. Calyptotheca nivea (Busk). I. Emballo-
theca ambigua sp. nov. J—K. Calyptotheca porelliformis (Waters). J. Two young zooids. K. Two ovicelled
zooids. Scale = 0,5 mm for A-H, J—K; 1 mm for I.
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
a broad flared proximolateral portion and two distolateral portions. Small
adventitious avicularia may occur on the distolateral parts of the peristome rim,
but the specimens were too worn or damaged for further details to be observed.
The lyrula, not described by O’Donoghue, is quadrate and quite distinct.
Family Escharellidae Levinsen, 1909
Escharellidae Levinsen, 1909: 314. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 136.
Escharella Gray, 1848
Escharella Gray, 1848: 125, 148. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 136.
Escharella discors sp. nov.
Fig. 17E-F
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26431, station SM 163/164, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Description
Colony encrusting, forming small irregular white patches. Zooids small,
oval, convex, separated by deep grooves. Primary orifice wider than long,
proximal border with a broad anvil-shaped lyrula occupying the whole of its width;
encircled by a tall, thickened, cylindrical peristome, with eight slender spines
disposed around its distal and lateral edges. Proximal edge of peristome peaked
medially and bearing a bifurcate denticle on its inner face. Frontal wall thickly
calcified, finely granular, marginal pores small and rather conspicuous. Ovicell
spherical, tilted basally, the oval orifice opening into the top of the peristome.
Etymology
Discors (L.)—different.
Remarks
The morphology of the primary orifice and the number of oral spines are
the most useful characters for distinguishing the different species of Escharella.
E. discors has a further distinction in the large and conspicuous peristomial
denticle, which in uncleaned specimens may be confused with the lyrula.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
ez Iz
Ori 0,31
Family Petraliellidae Harmer, 1957
Petraliellidae Harmer, 1957: 692.
The family includes a closely related group of genera, all of which are
characterized by zooids with large orifices, and frontal shields with pseudopores
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 67
and marginal septula. Multiporous septula in the basal walls give rise to
anchoring rhizoids; large distinctive, hyperstomial ovicells occur (see Cook &
Chimonides 1981a).
Mucropetraliella Stach, 1936
Mucropetraliella Stach, 1936: 363, 372. Harmer, 1957: 709. Cook & Chimonides, 1981a: 118.
Characterized principally by the presence of a suboral complex consisting
of a central lyrula and a mucro associated with an avicularium.
Mucropetraliella asymmetrica sp. nov.
Fig. 18
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26432, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 164, SM 179, SM 180, SM 185.
Description
Colonies unilaminar, loosely encrusting, anchored by rhizoids originating
from basal pore plates. Primary orifice wide, with two to three spines. Lyrula
short and wide, sometimes extended laterally; lateral denticles pointing
proximally. Lateral sinuses unequal and asymmetrical, the larger one occurring
basally to the rostrum of the avicularium. Suboral mucro long and very stout;
proximal part of the orifice and the frontal shield considerably raised. Suboral
avicularium small, completely hidden at the base of the mucro, which is
directed frontally and distally; rostrum curved, directed laterally, palate vertical
to frontal plane, mandible rounded, hinged on a stout curved bar and directed
medially. One or two pairs of small lateral oral avicularia present, also with
rounded mandibles, directed laterally at an acute angle to frontal plane. In a
few zooids other small rounded avicularia occur at the base of the mucro; one
of the oral avicularia may be enlarged, with a conspicuous swollen cystid, the
rostrum raised, with a serrated edge, elongate and slightly spatulate, often
orientated proximally. Ovicells rather elongated, finely tuberculate, with one or
two small frontal avicularia.
Etymology
Asymmetros (Gr.)—without symmetry, referring to the suboral sinuses.
Remarks
The lyrula and suboral avicularium are difficult to see as they are situated
vertically below the mucro, which may reach a length of 1,2 mm and frequently
obscures the orifice completely. M. asymmetrica closely resembles M. watersi
Harmer (1957: 721, pl. 46 (fig. 9), fig. 67, from the East Indies), which was
introduced for Petralia vultur var. armata Waters (1913: 518, pl. 70 (figs 15-20),
from east Africa). Harmer noted that synonymy of the two species might be
68
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 18. Mucropetraliella asymmetrica sp. nov. A.A group of
zooids in frontal view to show primary orifice and lateral
avicularia. x 39. B. Fragment of a colony in distal view, showing
elevation of the mucrones and associated avicularia. x 30. C. A
developing ovicell. x 61.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 69
doubted as Waters did not mention oral spines in his description. Comparison
of the Siboga specimens described by Harmer (1957) with one from the coast of
Kenya (BMNH 1975.4.16.5) shows them to be closely similar. The zooids of M.
watersi are less robust than those of M. asymmetrica and somewhat smaller
(Lz 0,85-1,0 mm, Iz 0,55—0,65 mm, lor 0,24-0,31 mm); the primary orifice has
four to six spines and symmetrical, equally developed lateral sinuses. The
proximal part of the orifice is not greatly raised and the suboral complex is
easily visible. Enlarged laterally or proximally directed avicularia are common
and ovicells are generally as wide or wider than long (cf. Harmer 1957).
Although most of the specimens of M. asymmetrica are fragmentary and
often worn, one colony from station SM 239, and another very young colony
(with Micropora similis) on a lamellibranch shell from station SM 164 were
alive when collected.
Measurements in mm
(range of 10 values)
Lz Iz lor
0,85-1,30 0,60-0,90 0,30-0,42
(means of 3 values)
Lov lov
0,55 OS
Family Schizoporellidae Jullien, 1883
Schizoporellidae Jullien, 1883: 527. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 166.
Arthropoma Levinsen, 1909
Arthropoma Levinsen, 1909: 332. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 190.
Arthropoma cecilii (Audouin, 1826)
Flustra cecilii Audouin, 1826: 239, pl. 8 (fig. 3).
Schizoporella cecilii: O'Donoghue, 1924: 42.
Arthropoma cecilii: Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 190, fig. 79.
Material
Station SM 185.
Remarks
A single live colony of this species was found. A cecilii has a wide
distribution in temperate, subtropical and tropical waters of the Atlantic,
Indian and western Pacific oceans.
Arthropoma circinatum (MacGillivray, 1869)
Fig. 17C
Lepralia circinata MacGillivray, 1869: 134.
Arthropoma circinatum: Harmer, 1957: 1003, pl. 72 (figs 29-30). Powell, 1967: 256, text-figs
29-30.
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Station SM 163.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids hexagonal, convex, separated by deep grooves;
0,46-0,5 mm long by 0,34-0,4 mm broad. Primary orifice D-shaped, proximal
border straight or slightly concave, with a short, quadrate median sinus. Six
oral spines present. Frontal wall finely granular, with distinct marginal pores,
extending towards the midline of the zooid proximolateral to orifice; elsewhere,
minute scattered pores are occasionally visible in the frontal calcification.
Peristome forming a slender crescentic lip proximal to the sinus, variably
developed. Ovicell hyperstomial, prominent, spherical; surface finely granular,
imperforate.
Remarks
A single dead colony was found, few of the zooids of which were
completely undamaged. The morphological features of this specimen were very
similar to those of specimens from New Zealand (BMNH 1899.5.1.1017) and
Bass Strait (BMNH 1899.5.1.1018), although the New Zealand specimen has
avicularia identical to those figured by Powell (1967, fig. 30) for ‘A. circinatum
form B’. No complete avicularia were found in the Meiring Naude specimen,
but a damaged zooid at the periphery of the colony bore a structure on the
frontal wall which seemed to represent a developing ‘form B’ avicularium.
Distribution
Arthropoma circinatum seems to be widespread in the western Pacific,
from New Zealand to Japan (Harmer 1957; Powell 1967), and has been
reported from Tristan da Cunha (Busk 1884) and southern California (Osburn
1952). The record from Ceylon listed by Harmer (1957: 1004) is based on a
specimen from the collection of L. R. Thornely that, on examination, proved
to be a species of Schizomavella.
Arthropoma sp.
Fig. 17D
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 185.
Remarks
Very small colonies of this species were recovered from two stations.
Although superficially similar to A. cecilii, the zooids differed in possessing five
or six distal oral spines, and a smaller orifice with a more slender sinus. However,
the material was fragmentary and none of the colonies represented a complete
astogenetic series. Consequently, although its affinities with Arthropoma seem
clear, this species must remain unnamed until further material is collected.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES Tak
Escharina Milne Edwards, 1836
Escharina Milne Edwards, 1836: 230. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 192.
Escharina pesanseris (Smitt, 1873)
Hippothoa pesanseris Smitt, 1873: 43, 76, pl. 7 (figs 159-160).
Escharina pesanseris: Harmer, 1957: 998, pl. 67 (figs 12-14, 18-19).
Material
Station SM 250.
Remarks
A single live colony of this distinctive species was collected; it is
recognized by the characteristic duck-foot shape of the avicularian mandible
(Harmer, 1957: pl. 67 (fig. 12)). Escharina pesanseris has been reported from
numerous localities in the Caribbean, the subtropical-tropical Atlantic, and the
Indo-West-Pacific region. It is known from Ceylon and Madagascar but does
not seem to have been recorded before from South Africa.
Escharina waiparaensis Brown, 1952
Fig. 17G
Escharina waiparaensis Brown, 1952: 229, figs 163-165. Powell, 1967: 275, pl. 6 (fig. a),
text-fig. 45.
Material
Stations SM 164, SM 239.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids broad and flat, rounded distally, separated by
raised, compressed sutures. Primary orifice wider than long; anter semiorbicu-
lar, with a slightly convex proximal border, poster slender, slit-like, broadening
proximally. Four short distal oral spines present. Frontal wall coarsely granular,
perforated by numerous closely spaced, minute pores. Avicularia paired, lateral
to orifice, level with the sinus; cystid small and rounded, supporting an
elongate, distally directed, setiform mandible. Ovicells were not found.
Numerous small basal pore chambers present.
Remarks
E. waiparaensis was described by Brown (1952) from the Miocene and
Pliocene of New Zealand; recent specimens were reported by Powell (1967)
from Three Kings Islands, northern New Zealand. Brown’s material lacked
spines, but Powell described two distal oral spines and two lateral ‘eminences’,
possibly representing thickened spine bases. The Meiring Naude material,
which included several living colonies, had four lightly calcified oral spines in
the youngest zooids, but the ontogenetically earliest zooids lacked spines
TP ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
altogether. In all respects the present material was identical with Powell’s
specimens from Three Kings Islands (BMNH 1964.8.12.59C, 59D).
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
lez Iz
ORAZ 0,63
Calyptotheca Harmer, 1957
Calyptotheca Harmer, 1957: 1008.
Calyptotheca nivea (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 17H
Schizoporella nivea Busk, 1884: 163, pl. 17 (fig. 1). Marcus, 1922: 25, fig. 15.
Schizoporella tenuis: O'Donoghue & De Watteville, 1935: 214.
Emballotheca nivea: O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1944: 424. O’ Donoghue, 1957: 87.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 179, SM 185, SM 232.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar. Zooids quadrate, broad, flat or slightly
convex, separated by distinct raised sutures; 0,5—0,8 mm long by 0,38—0,52 mm
broad. Primary orifice subterminal, orbicular, as wide as long, or slightly wider
than long; poster forming a shallow U-shaped sinus below conspicuous
quadrate lateral condyles. Frontal wall regularly and closely perforated by
numerous round pores, each in a shallow pit, giving a rugose appearance.
Avicularia adventitious, small, typically paired, situated lateral to orifice, close
to suture of zooid; mandible semi-elliptical, short, variably orientated. Ovicell
hyperstomial, closed by zooidal operculum; oval, flattened frontally, regularly
perforated and typically crossed by sutures. Orifice of ovicelled zooid broader
than that of non-fertile zooid, with a wider and more shallow sinus.
The shape of the primary orifice showed some variation between the
different specimens, and earlier astogenetic stages tended to have a more
narrow sinus. In the colony from station SM 185 the zooids had developed
short cylindrical umbones proximal to the orifice, like those of the specimen
figured by Marcus (1922). The small avicularia are often very numerous, but
tend to be distributed along the interzooidal sutures.
Distribution
Calyptotheca nivea seems to be known only from the southern and eastern
coasts of South Africa. Reports of its occurrence elsewhere in the Indo-West-
Pacific region have been shown by Harmer (1957) to be attributable to other
species of Calyptotheca.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 73
Calyptotheca porelliformis (Waters, 1918)
Fig. 17J-K
Schizoporella porelliformis Waters, 1918: 15 (footnote), pl. 2 (figs 19-21).
Calyptotheca porelliformis: Harmer, 1957: 1008, 1020.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 185.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar. Zooids broad, quadrate, flat or slightly
convex, separated by distinct raised sutures; 0,56-0,76 mm long by 0,4-0,6 mm
broad. Primary orifice as broad as long, anter and poster of equivalent length;
anter D-shaped, poster shallowly concave, condyles prominent, blunt and
downcurved. Frontal wall rugose, regularly and closely punctured by numerous
round pores, each in a pit; a low, nodular ridge develops around proximal half
of orifice. Avicularia adventitious, minute, oval, with semi-elliptical mandible;
infrequent, situated lateral to orifice, close to sutures, single or paired, but
often absent altogether. Ovicell recumbent on succeeding zooid, hyperstomial,
closed by zooidal operculum; oval, flat frontally, closely punctured and very
rugose. Anter of ovicelled zooids much shorter than that of non-ovicelled
zooids.
Distribution
This species does not seem to have been reported since its original
description by Waters (1918) from Port Elizabeth.
Emballotheca Levinsen, 1909
Emballotheca Levinsen, 1909: 89, 333. Harmer, 1957: 1086.
Emballotheca ambigua sp. nov.
Fig. 171
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26433, station SM 250, 31°59,3’S 29°22,5’E, 150-200 m.
Description
Colony erect, dichotomously branching; branches cylindrical, somewhat
uneven or curved, about 2,5 mm thick, composed of whorls of four zooids.
Zooids large and broad, convex, separated by faint sutures. Frontal calcifica-
tion thick, finely granular, with numerous small closely spaced pores and a
single series of more distinct marginal pores. A conspicuous thick light brown
epitheca present. Primary orifice broader than long; anter approximately
semicircular, poster forming a shallow semi-elliptical trough between short
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
blunt lateral condyles. In fully developed, undamaged zooids the condyles
appear twinned (Fig. 171). Ovicell very large, immersed and scarcely protrud-
ing from branch surface, obscuring most of the distally succeeding zooid, but
not disturbing the four-whorled arrangement; orifice of ovicelled zooid
enlarged, more nearly quadrate, with the poster considerably broadened.
Etymology
Ambiguus (L.)—uncertain, referring to the systematic placing of the
species.
Remarks
The material comprised two fragments, each 15 mm long; both were living
when collected and perhaps represent parts of a single colony. The very large
ovicells, dimorphic orifices and prominent condyles of this species suggest it is
allied to the species of Emballotheca described by Harmer (1957). However, it
should be noted that the distinction between this genus and Calyptotheca
Harmer is unclear (see Dumont 1981), and the systematic placing of E.
ambigua must, therefore, be regarded as tentative.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
EZ Lor lor
1,42 0,35 0,36
Family Stomachetosellidae Canu & Bassler, 1917
Stomachetosellidae Canu & Bassler, 1917: 44. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 208.
Stomachetosella Canu & Bassler, 1917
Stomachetosella Canu & Bassler, 1917: 45. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 208.
Stomachetosella balani (O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1944)
Schizoporella balani O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1944: 426, pl. 16 (figs 15-16).
Stomachetosella balani: O’Donoghue, 1957: 87.
Schizoporella balani: Hayward, 1980: 705, fig. 3G.
Material
Station SM 185.
Remarks
This characteristic South African species was recently redescribed and
figured by Hayward (1980). Its affinities with the boreal Atlantic species
currently assigned to Stomachetosella seem doubtful, and the relationship of all
Recent species to the type species, S. crassicollis Canu & Bassler, requires
re-examination. S. balani appears more similar to the Philippine species,
Schizoporella perforata Canu & Bassler (1929: 318), than to other species of
Stomachetosella.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 75
Family Cleidochasmatidae Cheetham & Sandberg, 1964
Cleidochasmatidae Cheetham & Sandberg, 1964: 1032.
Systematic problems involving species within this family are reviewed on
p. 104.
Cleidochasma Harmer, 1957
Cleidochasma Harmer, 1957: 1032. Cook, 1964b: 11.
Cleidochasma porcellanum (Busk, 1860)
Lepralia porcellana Busk, 1860: 283, pl. 31 (fig. 3).
Cleidochasma porcellanum: Cook, 1964b: 11, pl. 1 (fig. 4), pl. 2 (figs 1-2), fig. 4A-E.
Material
Station SM 163.
Description
Colony encrusting, zooids with imperforate, semi-transparent porcellan-
ous frontal shields and four small marginal septula. Orifice rounded distally,
with a small rounded sinus delineated by large proximally directed condyles.
Avicularia small, often paired, lateral and suboral, mandible rounded or
subtriangular, directed laterally; if not present, avicularium replaced by one of
the marginal septula. Ovicells hyaline and prominent at first, hyperstomial, not
closed by the operculum, becoming partially immersed. Proximal edge of
ovicell with paired lateral indentations and an area of thin calcification.
Remarks
A single, fairly large colony, comprising approximately 1250 zooids, was
found. It was alive when collected, and includes a well-preserved growing edge.
The earlier stages of colony growth are obscured by small groups of frontally
budded zooids. The orifice is more elongated than those of east African
specimens (BMNH 1976.7.20.7, Wasin, Zanzibar) and of the west African
specimens illustrated by Cook (19645).
C. porcellanum is a widely distributed and very variable species-complex
which includes C. bassleri (Calvet), as described by Harmer (1957). Records
are circumtropical and subtropical, with a depth range of 1-220 m.
Cleidochasma protrusum (Thornely, 1905)
Gemellipora protrusa Thornely, 1905: 119, pl. 7.
Cleidochasma protrusum: Harmer, 1957: 1040, pl. 71 (figs 1-4), fig. 112. Hayward & Cook,
1979389:
Material
Station SM 131.
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
A single, small dead colony was found. The characteristic morphotype of
the South African populations of C. protrusum was noted by Hayward & Cook
(1979).
Cleidochasma cribritheca (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 19A
Gemellipora cribritheca Busk, 1884: 176, pl. 33 (fig. 5).
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164.
Description
Colony encrusting, unilaminar, appearing white and porcellanous. Zooids
oval to hexagonal, convex, separated by shallow grooves; 0,4—-0,6 mm long by
0,2-0,3 mm broad. Primary orifice longer than wide, anter suborbicular, poster
elongate, V-shaped; condyles prominent, proximally directed. Orifice becoming
immersed as calcification thickens, but without a defined peristome; no oral
spines. Frontal wall at first smooth, with numerous small frontal pores;
becoming more rugose in later ontogenetic stages, with pores sunk in small pits.
Avicularium single, proximal to sinus, on a small tumid cystid; mandible
semi-elliptical or semicircular, directed proximally. Ovicell recumbent on
succeeding zooid, oval, flattened frontally and perforated by numerous small
pores; later enveloped distally and laterally by a thickened ooecial cover.
A colony from SM 163 (Fig. 19A) included early astogenetic stages. These
were partly obscured by later zooids but showed clearly two small zooids, each
with numerous small oral spines. These may represent a twinned ancestrula;
alternatively, the ancestrula may be obscured by the two largest zooids and the
small zooids may be simply the first to be budded from the ancestrula.
Distribution
This species is known only from South African waters.
Cleidochasma perspicua sp. nov.
Fig. 19B
Material
Holotype: SAM—-A26434, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids hexagonal, convex, separated by shallow
grooves. Primary orifice cleithridiate: anter orbicular, poster wider than long,
V-shaped, condyles large and distinct, blunt, basally deflected. Peristome
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES ia
H
Fig. 19. A. Cleidochasma cribritheca (Busk). B. Cleidochasma perspicua sp. nov. C-D. Hippoporella
spinigera (Philipps). C. Portion of a young colony. D. Outline diagram of primary orifice. E-F. Hippo-
porella labiata sp. nov. E. Portion of a young colony. F. Outline diagram of primary orifice.
G. Hippomenella avicularis (Livingstone). H. Celleporaria tridenticulata (Busk).
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
developed as a low rim distally and laterally, frequently with two or more short
umbones laterally; a third small umbo may be developed proximal to the
orifice. Frontal wall thick, vitreous, smooth, with very few sparsely distributed
and indistinct marginal pores; thick, translucent secondary calcification infills
the grooves between zooids in later ontogenetic stages, pore openings migrate
medially as this encroaches and the passage of the pore appears tubular
(Fig. 19B). Avicularium adventitious, single, proximolateral to orifice; cystid
tumid, rostrum slender, acute triangular, directed obliquely laterally, palate
with a triangular foramen, cross-bar stout with a thickened, quadrate
columella. The avicularia are sporadically developed, frequently missing from
many zooids. Ovicell recumbent on succeeding zooid, as wide as long, flattened
frontally and with a distinct labellum; calcification smooth and imperforate,
developing a small median umbo. Large basal pore chambers present.
Etymology
Perspicuus (L.)—transparent, an allusion to the frontal calcification.
Remarks
The holotype comprises a single unilaminar colony, 5 mm” in area. It was
alive when collected and many of the ovicells contained embryos. C. perspicua
is most similar to C. porcellanum (Busk), which appears to have a circumtropi-
cal distribution. In particular, the primary orifice of this species is very similar
to that of a variant of C. porcellanum from Ceylon, illustrated by Cook (19645,
text-fig. 4). However, the large tumid avicularian cystids and the conspicuous
frontal labellum of the ovicell are sufficient to distinguish C. perspicua from
other species of Cleidochasma. For further discussion of this species see p. 104.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,45 0,4
Hippoporidra Canu & Bassler, 1927
Hippoporidra Canu & Bassler 1927: 21, 31. Cook, 1964b: 22. Taylor & Cook, 1981: 244.
Hippoporidra senegambiensis (Carter, 1882)
Cellepora senegambiensis Carter, 1882: 416, pl. 16 (fig. 1A—-V).
Hippoporidra senegambiensis: Cook, 1964b: 29, pl. 3 (figs 3-4), figs 7B—C, 8A—D; 1968: 196,
4pl. 8 (fig. C).
Material
Station SM 185, one young colony on Turritigera shell.
Description
Colonies encrusting gastropod shells, usually those inhabited by pagurid
crabs. Zooids multilamellar, produced by frontal budding, with two to four
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 79
series of frontal marginal septula and orifices with rounded sinus and distinct
condyles. Colony becoming mamillate by budding of groups of prominent,
large (?male) zooids with small orifices and tuberculate peristomes. Inter-
zooidal and adventitious avicularia triangular or rounded. Ovicelled zooids
occurring in hollows among the mamillae, ovicells with a small frontal area.
Remarks
H. senegambiensis is common in west African waters, to a depth of 100 m.
The single specimen found, which encrusts a small Turritigera shell 10 mm in
length, is a young colony without ovicells that was alive when collected.
Another species of Hippoporidra, H. picardi, has been reported from South
Africa from depths of 45 to 200m. H. picardi has larger, more recumbent
zooids, with orifices having a small rounded sinus.
Hippoporella Canu, 1917
Hippoporella Canu, 1917: 36. Harmer, 1957: 1096. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 218.
Hippoporella spinigera (Philipps, 1899)
Fig. 19C-D
Escharoides spinigera Philipps, 1899: 440, 448, pl. 43 (fig. 12).
Hippoporella spinigera: Harmer, 1957: 1100, pl. 73 (fig. 13).
Mucronella serratilabris O’Donoghue, 1924: 48, pl. 3 (fig. 18).
Material
Stations SM 131, SM 151, SM 163, SM 164, SM 250.
Description
Colony encrusting, forming small circular, silvery patches. Zooids oval to
hexagonal, small and rather broad; separated by shallow grooves, later
obscured by calcification. Primary orifice broader than long, appearing rather
quadrate; distal edge arched, proximal edge almost straight, blunt lateral
condyles present. Seven long, slender, closely grouped distal oral spines.
Peristome developed proximally as a blunt, prominent mucro, with a broad,
quadrate, finely serrated lip on its distal edge. Adventitious avicularia paired,
lateral to orifice; mandible acute triangular, directed laterally or distolaterally.
Additional avicularia present on frontal wall: most frequently elongate, situated
on midline of zooid, with slender triangular mandible directed proximally;
more rarely, one or two avicularia, similar to oral type but slightly larger,
situated elsewhere on frontal wall, with variable orientation. Frontal wall
smooth, imperforate except for inconspicuous marginal pores. Basal pore
chambers present. Ovicell hyperstomial, recumbent on succeeding zooid,
spherical, with a large quadrate orifice, often developing a small umbo.
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
H. spinigera is characterized by the small size of its zooids, the distinctive
peristomial mucro and the closely grouped slender oral spines. Originally
described fom the Loyalty Islands (Philipps 1899), it has since been reported
from Hong Kong, the Philippines, and Sumbawa (Harmer 1957), and a single
specimen was recorded from South Africa by O’Donoghue (1924), as
Mucronella serratilabris. Some Australian Tertiary species such as Mucronella
mooraboolensis MacGillivray (1895: 100, pl. 13 (fig. 9)) and Rhynchopora
spinifera MacGillivray (1895: 102, pl. 13 (fig. 19)) may be related to H.
spinigera.
Measurements (means of 10 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,32 O27)
Hippoporella labiata sp. nov.
Fig. 19E-F
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26435, station SM 250, 31°59,3’S 29°22,5’E, 150-200 m.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids hexagonal, convex, small; separated by distinct
grooves. Primary orifice lepralioid: anter longer than wide, with a finely
denticulate edge, proximal border of poster gently concave; prominent, blunt
lateral condyles present. Seven or eight short oral spines closely spaced around
distal border of aperture. Frontal wall thick, vitreous, with a nodulated surface,
imperforate except for indistinct marginal pores; a short cylindrical umbo
developing just proximal to orifice and arching towards it. Avicularia
adventitious, situated lateral to orifice, typically paired, mandible semi-
elliptical, directed obliquely laterally; often replaced on one or both sides by a
second type with an elongate, parallel-sided, distally-rounded mandible. Ovicell
hyperstomial, pyriform, imperforate, with a distinct frontal labellum; becoming
submerged in secondary calcification derived from distally succeeding zooids.
Small basal pore chambers present.
Etymology
Labiatus (L.)—lipped, referring to the prominent suboral umbo.
Remarks
This species has a remarkable superficial resemblance to H. multidentata
(Thornely), from Ceylon, described and figured by Harmer (1957: 1099,
pl. 73 (figs 9-12)). Comparison of the present material with Thornely’s type
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 81
specimen (BMNH 1906.12.3.4) shows several important differences. The orifice
of H. labiata is proportionately less broad than in H. multidentata; the ovicell is
longer and more distinctly pyriform than the rather squat ovicell of H.
multidentata. Finally, the avicularia of H. labiata are very much larger than
those of H. multidentata which, moreover, are consistently monomorphic. The
systematic status of this species is considered at greater length on p. 104.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,45 0,39
Hippomenella Canu & Bassler, 1917
Hippomenella Canu & Bassler, 1917: 41. Brown, 1949: 513.
Hippomenella avicularis (Livingstone, 1926)
Fig. 19G
Lepralia tuberculata var. avicularis Livingstone, 1926: 93, pl. 5 (figs 1-3).
Hippomenella spatulata Harmer, 1957: 1095, pl. 72 (figs 27, 31).
Material
Stations SM 131, SM 163.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids large, oval, convex, separated by deep
grooves. Primary orifice with a semi-orbicular anter separated from a narrower
U_ shaped poster by prominent, blunt, basally deflected condyles. Orifice rim
with six or seven spine bases. Frontal calcification thick and smooth, with
numerous, very small inconspicuous pores; these are distributed around the
periphery of the zooid, their frontal openings tend to shift centripetally as the
frontal calcification thickens (giving a striated appearance to the wall), but the
central area remains imperforate. Small adventitious avicularia present on all
zooids, lateral to orifice and typically paired, mandible semi-elliptical, disto-
laterally directed. Identical avicularia sporadically present frontally, up to five
on a single zooid, orientation variable but directed away from the central area
of the zooid. One or both of the lateral-oral pair may be replaced by an
elongate avicularium with a slender spoon-like mandible. Small basal pore
chambers present.
Remarks
This species was represented by several small dead colonies; ovicells were
present but were so badly damaged that their structure could not be discerned.
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Distribution
H. avicularis has been rarely reported and appears to be known from just
three localities in the western Pacific (Harmer 1957).
Measurements (means of 16 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,92 OZ
Family Microporellidae Hincks, 1879
Microporellidae Hinks, 1879: 156. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 220.
Microporella Hincks, 1877
Microporella Hincks, 1877: 526. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 220.
Microporella sp.
Fig. 20A
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 239.
Description
Colony encrusting. Zooids oval to hexagonal, broad, flat or slightly
convex, separated by shallow grooves. Primary orifice subterminal, semicir-
cular, with four or five short, distal oral spines. Frontal wall finely granular,
perforated by numerous small pores; ascopore situated just proximal to orifice
in distal third of zooid. Avicularium single, developed midway along the length
of the zooid; mandible slender, setiform, up to 0,2 mm long, directed obliquely
distally. No ovicells present.
Remarks
The familiar Microporella ciliata appears to have an almost cosmopolitan
distribution, but the degree of morphological variation which it displays over its
entire geographical range requires examination. The present material, consist-
ing of two small colonies, is similar to M. ciliata, but in comparison with
specimens from British waters appears rather larger, with more robust
avicularian mandibles. No complete astogenetic series was represented in the
Meiring Naude specimens, and neither colony possessed ovicells. consequently,
the material is left unnamed until better specimens should be collected.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
eZ Iz
0,57 0,42
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 83
Fig. 20. A. Microporella sp. B-C. Flustramorpha marginata (Krauss). B. Ovicelled zooids. C. Young
zooids, showing shape of primary orifice. D. Flustramorpha flabellaris (Busk). E. Fenestrulina indigena sp.
nov., ancestrula and first two zooids. F. Flustramorpha angusta Hayward & Cook, young zooids showing
shape of primary orifice. G. Fenestrulina indigena sp. nov., a group of zooids from close to the colony edge.
H. Flustramorpha angusta Hayward & Cook, ovicelled zooids.
84 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Flustramorpha Gray, 1872
Flustramorpha Gray, 1872: 168. Busk, 1884: 135.
All three species of Flustramorpha known from South Africa were present
in the Meiring Naude samples. The genus is a homogenous one and the three
species are often difficult to distinguish; it seems useful, therefore, to describe
briefly the features considered here to be of importance. F. flabellaris (Busk)
typically develops a tufted colony of short, broad lobes, but its most distinctive
feature is the avicularium that, unlike those of the other two species, has a
short acuminate mandible, and a palate that is almost parallel to the frontal
plane of the zooid. In F. marginata (Krauss) and F. angusta Hayward & Cook
the avicularium has a setiform mandible, and the palate is orientated at an
oblique, or even perpendicular, angle to the frontal plane.
The avicularian mandibles of F. angusta were not preserved in the type
specimen. They are similar to those of F. marginata, setiform and up to
0,75 mm long; they are broadened basally close to the point of articulation
(Fig. 20H). The ovicell of F. angusta is proportionately smaller, narrower and
more depressed than that of F. marginata, its width being considerably less
than that of the maternal zooid. Further, whereas in F. marginata the ovicell is
prominent at all stages of growth, in F. angusta it is progressively obscured by
secondary calcification which typically overhangs its aperture on each side. The
orifice of F. angusta is semi-elliptical, with a straight proximal border
(Fig. 20F), whereas that of F. marginata has distinct lateral condyles that
impart to it a characteristic outline at all ontogenetic stages (Fig. 20C).
Finally, it may be the case that the colony form of these latter two species
are a further useful specific character. The specimens of F. angusta were all
slender, unbranched, strap-like colonies, up to 50 mm long, with a maximum
width of 3,5 mm. The material of F. marginata was mostly fragmentary, but
included two regularly bifurcating colonies, 30 mm and 40 mm high, with a
maximum branch width of 4 mm.
Flustramorpha flabellaris (Busk, 1854)
Fig. 20D
Eschara flabellaris Busk, 1854: 91, pl. 107 (figs 7-10).
Microporella flabellaris: Marcus, 1922: 28, fig. 16.
Material
Stations SM 179, SM 180.
Flustramorpha marginata (Krauss, 1837)
Fig. 20B-C
Flustra marginata Krauss, 1837: 35, fig. 3.
Flustramorpha marginata: Busk, 1884: 135, pl. 20 (fig. 8). Hayward & Cook, 1979: 80.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 184, SM 185, SM 239.
Flustramorpha angusta Hayward & Cook, 1979
Fig. 20F, H
Flustramorpha angusta Hayward & Cook, 1979: 80, fig. 11E.
Material
Stations SM 131, SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 184, SM 1835.
Fenestrulina Jullien, 1888
Fenestrulina Jullien, 1888: 37. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 224.
Fenestrulina indigena sp. nov.
Fig. 20E-G
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26436, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: station SM 163/164.
Description
85
Colony encrusting. Zooids oval to hexagonal, convex, separated by distinct
grooves. Primary orifice semicircular, with a thin raised rim, relatively
small—constituting less than one-tenth of the total zooid length; six or seven
short distal oral spines present. Frontal wall thin and hyaline, with a few
radiating sutures; marginal pores distributed in a single series, small and rather
inconspicuous. Ascopore situated just proximal to orifice in the distal half of
the zooid, small, transversely oval; a short umbo develops proximal to the
ascopore but does not support it. Ovicell recumbent on succeeding zooid,
globular, as wide as long; smooth surfaced, with faint marginal flutings.
Ancestrula tatiform, oval, 0,32 mm long, with twelve marginal spines.
Etymology
Indigenus (L.)—native to.
Remarks
Fenestrulina indigena may be distinguished from other species of the genus
by the number of oral spines, and by the characteristic frontal umbo, which
does not seem to be in any way associated with the ascopore.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,60 0,43
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Family Hippothoidae Levinsen, 1909
Hippothoidae Levinsen, 1909: 274. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 246.
Trypostega Levinsen, 1909
Trypostega Levinsen, 1909: 280. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 258.
Trypostega venusta (Norman, 1864)
Lepralia venusta Norman, 1864: 84, pl. 10 (figs 2-3).
Trypostega venusta: Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 258, fig. 111.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 239.
Distribution
Trypostega venusta has a circumtropical, warm-temperate distribution. It
has been reported from the Red Sea, Mauritius, and east Africa (Harmer 1957)
but has not been recorded before from South Africa.
Family Gigantoporidae Bassler, 1935
Gigantoporidae Bassler, 1935: 32. Harmer, 1957: 878.
Gigantopora Ridley, 1881.
Gigantopora Ridley, 1881: 47. Harmer, 1957: 879.
Gigantopora polymorpha (Busk, 1884)
Gephyrophora polymorpha Busk, 1884: 167, pl. 34 (fig. 2).
Adeonella ponticula O'Donoghue, 1924: 54, pl. 4 (fig. 23).
Gigantopora polymorpha: Brown, 1952: 208, figs 145-146. Hayward & Cook, 1979: 81.
Material
Stations SM 179, SM 180, SM 185.
Remarks
Numerous live colonies of this characteristically South African species
were collected at stations SM 179 and SM 185.
Gigantopora foraminosa sp. nov.
Fig. 11E—F
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26437, station SM 163/164, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 131, SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 184.
Description
Colony erect, rigid, cylindrical, branching irregularly; attached by an
encrusting base, up to 21 mm high in present material, the branches broadening
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 87
distally. Zooids in alternating longitudinal series, disposed all around the branch
axis; rectangular, flat or slightly convex, separated by distinct raised sutures.
Primary orifice longer than wide; anter D-shaped, poster concave, constituting a
broad, shallow, U-shaped sinus between small lateral condyles. Frontal wall
closely perforated by numerous round pores, each in a distinct pit. Peristomial
complex occupying distal half of zooid; initiated by the development of paired
lateral oral avicularia with elongate, acute triangular rostra, directed medially.
These arch over the primary orifice and fuse medially; proximal to the area of
fusion, a transversely oval spiramen communicates with the space above the
primary orifice, distally a rim of calcification delimits a semicircular secondary
orifice. Border of secondary orifice frequently peaked medially on either or both
the distal and proximal edge. The gap between the two avicularian cystids is
infilled as the opening of the spiramen is elaborated; this develops a lobed distal
hood, above which two further lacunae are seen, separated medially by a
longitudinai ridge. In later ontogenetic stages these lacunae are completely
obliterated. Ovicell large, prominent but partially immersed; broadly oval and
densely punctured by small pores, becoming rather rugose. Secondary orifices of
ovicellate zooids broader than those of non-ovicellate zooids. Vertical walls of
zooids with large and distinct multiporous septula.
Etymology
Foraminosus (L.)—full of holes.
Remarks
This species is distinguished from G. polymorpha by its generally larger
dimensions, by its relatively longer primary orifice, and by the characteristic
twinned lacunae below the oral avicularia. A similar fossil species, Porina
cribraria, was described from the Australian Tertiary by MacGillivray
(1895: 104, pl. 14 (fig. 25)).
Measurements (mean values) in mm
Zooids Ovicell
n Lz Iz n Lov lov
25 1207 0,6 8 0,48 0,66
Family Adeonellidae Gregory, 1893
Adeonellidae Gregory, 1893: 241. Cook, 1973: 246.
Adeonella Busk, 1884
Adeonella Busk, 1884: 183. Cook, 1968: 180.
The genus Adeonella is abundantly represented in eastern South African
waters and a total of 15 species may now be recognized. A. regularis (Busk,
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1884) seems to have been the first species to be described from this area; the
type specimen is no longer extant, however, and the status of this species
remains to be clarified. Similarly, A. pygmaea Levinsen (1909), the identity of
which even Levinsen was uncertain about, has not been reported since the
original, rather brief account. O’Donoghue (1924) described four new species
of Adeonella from South Africa; A. coralliformis, A. expansa, and A. ligulata
are well-defined species, the type specimens of which have been examined
during the preparation of this account. A. ponticula O’Donoghue (1924) has
proved to be identifiable with Gigantopora polymorpha (Busk) (Hayward &
Cook 1979); A. pectinata Busk, described from a single specimen collected by
the Challenger off Cape York, Queensland, was reported by O’Donoghue
(1924) from two South African localities but his specimens prove to represent
A. gibba sp. nov. Adeonella meandrina O’Donoghue & De Watteville (1944)
has been shown (Cook 1973) to be referable to the umbonuloid genus
Adeonellopsis, and A. jellyae Levinsen (1909) may be assigned to Laminopora
Michelin, 1842 (Cook 1983a).
The first Meiring Naude collections included two undescribed species of
Adeonella, A. majuscula and A. cracens (Hayward & Cook 1979). A. falcicula
and A. cultrata were then described (Hayward 1981) from South African
specimens collected by the Galathea deep-sea expedition. The present
collections yielded eight new species of Adeonella, and it would seem useful at
this stage to present a Key to the presently known South African species of the
genus. The morphological features of most use in distinguishing between the
different species are: the shape of the primary orifice, the shape and position of
the spiramen, the size, orientation, and position, relative to the secondary
orifice, of the peristomial avicularia. Certain later ontogenetic features seem to
be consistent in some species, and the form of the colony may prove also to be
an important character.
PROVISIONAL KEY TO THE SOUTH AFRICAN SPECIES OF ADEONELLA
Primary orifice orbicular, oval or quadrate, without asinus —..................... 2,
—) Pomary ontice withia distince Sinus a eee ere eee one err eene 6
2. Primary orifice longer than broad, quadrate. Spiramen broadly oval, developing a
proximal concavity in later ontogeny; flanked by one or two small medially directed
avicularia. Other avicularia rare. Marginal vicarious avicularia absent
A. infirmata sp. nov.
— Primary orifice oval or rounded. No concavity proximal to spiramen _—..................
3. Primary orifice almost circular. Spiramen oval, situated close to distal end of
peristome, flanked by small paired medially directed avicularia, a second pair often
present on distal rim of peristome. Marginal vicarious avicularia absent
A. falcicula Hayward (1981)
— Primary orifice transversely oval. Spiramen flanked by paired or single avicularia.
Enlarged vicarious avicularia present on colony margins ==———S—........... sss vee 4
4. Spiramen distinctly oblong, its primary outline contrasting with, and visible beneath,
the rounded opening developed in later ontogeny. Small paired avicularia developed
lateral to spiramen, extending distally towards, but not reaching the proximal border
of the secondary ontfiices) 1 ee ee A. cracens Hayward & Cook (1979)
— Spitamen round or ovalat all ontogenetic staces! eae renee ene eee 5
2.
18).
14.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 89
Spiramen large, round; situated in the middle of the zooid, well proximal to the
secondary orifice. A single avicularium present in early ontogeny, elongate, extending
obliquely medially, between the spiramen and the secondary orifice. Smaller frontal
avicularia abundant in later ontogenetic stages ..... A. majuscula Hayward & Cook (1979)
Spiramen large, oval; situated in distal half of zooid, close to base of peristomial
calcification. A single frontal avicularium developed just proximal to spiramen,
extending obliquely distally towards, and almost reaching, the proximal border of the
secondary orifice. Other frontal avicularia apparently absent ... A. cultrata Hayward (1981)
Spiramen, in early ontogenetic stages, overarched from one side by a distinct hood, so
that the plane of its aperture is perpendicular to the frontal plane of the zooid. A
simalludistallyadimectediaviculaniumradjacentto spiramen) =.) 4.4 ee 7
Spiramen, in early ontogenetic stages, with a low distal arch, and frequently with a
distinct concavity proximal to it, or normal to frontal plane, but without a laterally
GeVelOpe Cah OO CBee cath ira thee daa th ace MHRNG ore GNOME RS ARO Ae os AY hint 9
Primary orifice as broad as, or broader than long. A single, median, proximally
directed avicularium developing proximal to, and partly obscuring, the spiramen in
later ontogeny, Colony storming slender blades = -.55 5.) ..4.... 5556.14: A. gibba sp. nov.
Primary orifice longer than broad. No median, proximally directed avicularium
Sinus of primary orifice forming a short symmetrical U. Small avicularia frequent on
frontal wall and around peristome in later ontogeny. Colony forming slender blades
A. abdita sp. nov.
Sinus of primary orifice forming a broad, shallow U. Small avicularia infrequent in
later ontogeny; typically one extending obliquely between spiramen and secondary
orifice, and one orientated transversely along proximal border of secondary spiramen.
Colonystonnimne broadhat platesy=n eas aae es] ae: A. expansa O’ Donoghue (1924)
. Spiramen large, oval or circular, with the sinus visible through it in at least the earliest
CMIOLUSDEWS STSS TO A ee tae eg aie earn Me car! ce eee ge ee Se 10
Spiramenismalls circular, sinus mot visible ase sna ese enone ne ene e eee 14
. Primary orifice with slender, pointed sinus. A single, median, proximally directed
avicularium developed proximal to the spiramen in later ontogeny. Colony forming
SOMO ORCEDIATC Si ieee Lit owe clan Packs, « soul a een eats Sis ae RR oh A. alia sp. nov.
Primary orifice with a V- or U-shaped sinus. Colony typically forming slender blades.. 11
. Sinus narrow, parallel-sided. Peristomial avicularia typically paired, arising distal to
spiramen and extending medially above distal border of secondary orifice
A. decipiens sp. nov.
Sinus forming a symmetrical, broader U-shape. Peristomial avicularia single or paired 12
Primary orifice broader than long. Peristomial avicularium single, short; situated
adjacent to spiramen, extending obliquely distally towards proximal border of
SeECONG AIVAOMIN CCH res te ee hess Gea wee hs We oon a4 Cees are to Sauamun aps een A. conspicua sp. nov.
Primary orifice as long as, or longer than broad. Peristomial avicularia typically paired 13
Peristomial avicularia paired, arising distal to spiramen and directed medially, the
apices of the rostra almost converging distal to the secondary orifice. Frontal wall
CONVEXoproximalitOrspiramMeny qs arssns 25s aes bs: A. coralliformis O'Donoghue (1924)
Peristomial avicularia paired, arising adjacent to, or just distal to the spiramen and
directed medially, extending between the spiramen and the proximal border of the
secondary orifice. Frontal wall concave proximal to spiramen; later filled by a
pLOxdnialllvadinectedraviCulaniUmMls yaa 4 cle oie at ksh oc ae ore A. confusanea sp. nov.
Primary orifice as broad as long, anter and poster of almost equal length. Spiramen
situated in distal half of zooid but distant from the proximal border of the secondary
©) Telli 6c MMR MP ME re URE ACMA cogs at ae or eae pened Mas Costbe os pes A. distincta sp. nov.
Primary orifice much broader than long; poster very shallow, constituting less than
one-third of orifice length. Spiramen small, situated close to proximal border of
SECONGARVAOTINCE Rasch. tn aa ahaa tha aises Gane dh Ss eh ates A. ligulata O’Donoghue (1924)
90 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Adeonella majuscula Hayward & Cook, 1979
Adeonella majuscula Hayward & Cook, 1979: 82, fig. 1OE—-H.
Material
Station SM 233.
Remarks
Part of a single large colony, 75 mm high, was collected from a depth of
540-80 m.
Adeonella cracens Hayward & Cook, 1979
Adeonella cracens Hayward & Cook, 1979: 85, fig. 10I-L. Hayward, 1981: 44, Fig. 22A.
Material
Station SM 103.
Remarks
Dead fragments only were recovered from the above station.
Adeonella decipiens sp. nov.
Fig. 21A—-E
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26438, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 131, SM 163/164, SM 179, SM 180, SM 184,
SM 185.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid; branches bilaminar, slender, up to 5 mm
wide. Zooids oval to hexagonal, broadening distally, tapered proximally,
separated by indistinct grooves which are increasingly obscured in older zooids.
Primary orifice semi-orbicular, sinus slender, U-shaped; peristome thickened,
prominent, tending to project from branch surface; inner proximal edge with a
blunt projecting knob (Fig. 21B), later hidden as secondary calcification
progresses, secondary orifice eventually orbicular. Frontal wall convex, finely
granular, with numerous small pores, indistinct in newly developed zooids,
more pronounced in later ontogenetic stages. Spiramen oval and large, situated
at base of peristome so that calcification between it and the secondary orifice
forms merely a slender bridge in young zooids; despite further thickening, the
proximal border of the primary orifice is visible in all but the most heavily
calcified zooids. Adventitious avicularia paired, lateral to the orifice, rostrum
acute triangular, directed distomedially along the distal border of the secondary
orifice. In later ontogenetic stages these avicularia may be obliterated and
replaced by a second generation with a similar orientation, or more proximally
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 91
Fig. 21. A-E. Adeonella decipiens sp. nov. A. Four typical zooids. B. Zooids from a growing edge,
showing characteristic shape of early peristome. C. Older zooids with hooded spiramina. D. View of a
branch edge, showing vicarious and adventitious avicularia. E. Outline diagram of primary orifice.
F-J. Adeonella confusanea sp. nov. F. Young zooids, with concave frontal walls. G. Later zooids, with
thickened frontal walls. H. View of a branch edge, with vicarious avicularia. I. Zooids from near the base
of the colony, with secondarily developed frontal avicularia. J. Outline diagram of primary orifice.
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
situated with the rostra extending between the spiramen and the proximal
border of the secondary orifice; rarely, the avicularia may be developed
frontally, proximal to the spiramen. Vicarious avicularia developed along the
branch edge, with enlarged, distally directed rostra, interspersed with what may
be small kenozooids, or autozooids with obliterated orifices; both these and the
vicarious avicularia may bear small adventitious avicularia.
Etymology
Decipia (L.)—deception, a reference to the similarity between this species
and A. coralliformis.
Remarks
At the distal tips of branches the peristomes and avicularia project
markedly from the surface. With continued calcification both are progressively
immersed, the spiramen becomes deeply sunk, more rounded and smaller. A.
decipiens is superficially similar to A. coralliformis O’Donoghue but is readily
distinguished by the small size of its zooids and by the primary orifice, which is
almost circular in A. coralliformis. The material included numerous living and
dead fragments, up to 22 mm long.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,50 0,36
Adeonella confusanea sp. nov.
Fig. 21F—J
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26439, station SM 185, 33°39,3’S 27°11,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 179, SM 185.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid, attached by an encrusting base; branches
bilaminar, up to 39 mm long in present material, with a maximum width of
4mm. Zooids oval to rectangular, hexagonal in central part of branch, convex,
separated by deep grooves. Primary orifice semi-orbicular, with a short
U-shaped sinus; peristome with a broad blunt denticle within proximal border,
visible in earlier ontogenetic stages, developing a transversely oval secondary
orifice. Avicularia typically paired, occasionally single, arising lateral to
spiramen, rostrum acute triangular, directed distomedially between spiramen
and secondary orifice, close to the proximal border of the latter. Frontal wall
granular, convex and rather rugose, with numerous small pores; spiramen
circular, situated close to proximal base of peristome, sinus visible through it in
a i ee ee
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 23)
youngest zooids. Later in ontogeny, additional avicularia may be developed
elsewhere on the frontal wall; most frequently, a single avicularium is
developed medially, proximal to spiramen. Proximally directed vicarious
avicularia present in a single linear series along the branch edge.
Etymology
Confusaneus (L.)—mixed, referring to characters shared with other
species (below).
Remarks
The proximally directed frontal avicularium, which develops in later
ontogenetic stages, is also seen in A. abdita (p. 97). However, that species may
be distinguished from A. confusanea by the shape of the primary orifice (Fig.
23D), and by the broad, flat, plate-like branches of the colony.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,48 O27
Adeonella conspicua sp. nov.
Fig. 22A—D
Material
Holotype: SAM-A26440, station SM 179, 33°30,3’S 27°22,1'E, 80 m.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid. Zooids oval to hexagonal, or irregular,
separated by distinct grooves. Primary orifice almost semicircular, with a short,
wide and shallow sinus. Peristome thickened, nodular, but relatively depressed,
secondary orifice semicircular. Frontal wall convex, nodular, with small but
distinct pores; spiramen circular, situated close to base of peristome. Sinus of
primary orifice visible through it in newly developed zooids. Avicularia
typically single, rarely paired, situated lateral to spiramen; rostrum triangular,
relatively short, at an acute angle to frontal plane, directed distomedially or,
rarely, proximally. In zooids towards the basal region of the colony, avicularia
may be developed elsewhere on the frontal wall. Marginal vicarious avicularia
very characteristic, rostrum hooked and projecting from the edge of the
branch; interspersed with smaller types, or bearing them.
Etymology
Conspicuus (L.)—manifest, referring to the characters of the species.
Remarks
A single juvenile colony was found, 9 mm high and bearing three short
lobes with a maximum width of 2 mm. Despite this shortage of material, the
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 22. A-D. Adeonella conspicua sp. nov. A. Young zooids at a branch bifurcation, note prominent
hooked avicularian rostra. B. Older zooids with nodular frontal walls. C. The branch edge, with vicarious
avicularia. D. Outline diagram of primary orifice. E-H. Adeonella distincta sp. nov. E. Four typical
zooids. F. The branch edge, with vicarious avicularia. G. Old zooids from the colony base. H. Outline
diagram of primary orifice. I-K. Adeonella infirmata sp. nov. I. Young zooids from close to the colony
margin, note kenozooids on right. J. Old zooids with thickened frontal walls. K. Outline diagram of
primary orifice.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 95
specimen seems sufficiently distinctive to warrant the introduction of a new
specific name.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,47 ORs
Adeonella distincta sp. nov.
Fig. 22E—H
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26441, station SM 185, 33°39,3’S 27°11,6’E, 90 m.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid, attached by encrusting base; branches
bilaminar, slender, up to 35 mm long in present material, with a maximum
width of 2 mm. All branches in the same plane. Zooids elongate, rectangular,
separated by deep grooves, becoming irregular in outline in later ontogeny.
Primary orifice broadly drop-shaped: anter semicircular, poster forming a broad
and symmetrical U-shape. Peristome developing an orbicular secondary orifice.
Avicularium single or, rarely, paired, situated lateral to spiramen and directed
distally; rostrum acute triangular, not quite reaching the proximal border of the
secondary orifice. Frontal wall convex, finely granular, with numerous small
pores; spiramen more or less centrally placed, midway along the length of the
zooid, at first longitudinally oval, becoming quite circular as frontal calcification
thickens. Vicarious avicularia developed along branch edges, interspersed with
small kenozooids, which may or may not bear small adventitious avicularia.
Etymology
Distinctus (L.)—different.
Remarks
The orientation of the frontal avicularium may vary within the colony, and
in some zooids the rostrum may extend medially between the spiramen and the
secondary orifice. In the oldest parts of the colony avicularia may be developed
proximal to the spiramen, but there are rarely more than three per zooid. This
species is most similar to A. cracens Hayward & Cook (1979) but is distinguished
by the smaller size of its zooids and by the shape of the primary orifice, which in
A. distincta is sinuate but in A. cracens forms a simple transverse ellipse.
Fragments of three live colonies of this species were collected.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,59 0,30
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Adeonella infirmata sp. nov.
Fig. 22I-K
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26442, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid, attached by an encrusting base; branches
bilaminar, up to 45 mm high in present material, with a maximum width of
5mm. Zooids elongate, hexagonal or rectangular, rounded distally and often
tapered proximally; smallest zooids in middle region of branch. Primary orifice
bell-shaped, proximal border shallowly convex below indistinct condyles.
Peristome with orbicular secondary orifice. Avicularium single or paired,
arising laterally at a level midway between the spiramen and the secondary
orifice; rostrum acute triangular, short, directed distally or distomedially,
typically extending to proximolateral corners of secondary orifice. Frontal wall
convex, finely granular, evenly perforated by numerous small pores; spiramen
situated close to proximal border of secondary orifice, large, transversely oval,
arched, the proximal border of the primary orifice visible in all but the most
heavily calcified zooids. Small adventitious avicularia may develop elsewhere
on the frontal wall in the later stages of ontogeny, with variable orientation.
Vicarious avicularia present in single linear series along branch edge, the rostra
of which frequently project noticeably from the branch edge. These may
alternate with small kenozooids.
Etymology
Infirmis (L.)—weak, referring to the rather delicate form of the colony.
Remarks
Zooid rows frequently terminate at the edges of the branch in small
kenozooids which often bear adventitious avicularia. The longitudinal branch
keel typical of some of the species described here (p. 99) is only poorly
developed in A. infirmata; it seems to be formed from thickened frontal
calcification rather than from inflated avicularian cystids, although small
adventitious avicularia are more frequent in the middle regions of the branch.
Fragments of five living colonies were collected.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
ez Iz
0,71 0,30
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 97
Adeonella abdita sp. nov.
Fig. 23A-E
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26443, station SM 239, 32°14,8’S 29°00,8’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 1835.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid, attached by an encrusting base; branches
bilaminar, up to 30 mm long in present material, with a maximum width of
5mm. Zooids elongate, rectangular or oval, frequently tapered proximally;
separated by distinct grooves, becoming obscured in older parts of colony.
Primary orifice as wide as long, with inconspicuous, blunt lateral condyles
demarcating a broad, shallow proximal sinus. Peristome with a transversely
oval secondary orifice, the inner proximal edge developing a blunt denticle.
Frontal wall convex, granular, closely punctured by numerous small pores.
Spiramen medially situated in the distal third of the zooid, orbicular, oval or
elongate, overarched from the left or right by a distinct hood, so that its
Opening appears to be perpendicular to the frontal plane of the zooid. A single
avicularium adjacent to spiramen, rostrum acute triangular, directed distally;
becoming quite immersed, below the level of the spiramen hood. A second
avicularium may be developed on the other side of the spiramen, preventing
complete development of its hood; occurs rarely in some colonies, more
frequently in others. Additional avicularia may develop laterally, between the
Sspiramen and the secondary orifice, smaller than the frontal type, single or
paired, with rostrum directed towards the peristome. In the oldest parts of the
colony these may be very frequent, with four or five developed around the
distal end of the zooid, all directed towards the peristome. Frontal avicularia
are progressively immersed and eventually completely obscured; peristomial
avicularia then proliferate, but there is no regeneration of regularly cule rueites
frontal avicularia (cf. A. gibba, p. 99).
In well-grown colonies each branch has a median longitudinal keel,
formed by the development of numerous adventitious avicularia, each with a
particularly voluminous cystid. Large vicarious avicularia present in single
linear series along branch edges.
Etymology
Abditus (L.)—hidden, referring to the spiramen.
Remarks
Adeonella expansa O’Donoghue shows a similar development of the
spiramen to that of A. abdita, but differs in that the adjacent avicularium is
very small, being scarcely longer than the spiramen itself. Further, unlike the
present species, the peristomial avicularia are almost medially situated, with
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 23. A-E. Adeonella abdita sp. nov. A. Young zooids showing characteristic form of spiramen and
adjacent avicularium. B. Older zooids, with numerous additional avicularia. C. Zooids from the branch
keel, showing immersed spiramina and prominent avicularian cystids. D. Outline diagram of primary orifice.
E. View of the branch edge, showing vicarious avicularia. F-J. Adeonella gibba sp. nov. F. Young zooids
showing characteristic form of spiramen and adjacent avicularium. G. Later zooids with nodular frontal
walls. H. The branch edge showing vicarious avicularia. I. Old zooids from the colony base, with
proximally directed frontal avicularia. J. Outline diagram of primary orifice.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 99
transversely orientated mandibles. The colony of A. expansa develops broad
plate-like branches.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,76 0,34
Adeonella gibba sp. nov.
Fig. 23F—J
Adeonella pectinata: O’Donoghue, 1924: 51.
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26444, station SM 179, 33°30,3’S 27°22,1’E, 80 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 179, SM 180, SM 185.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid, rising from an encrusting base; branches
bilaminar, up to 4 mm wide. Zooids oval to rectangular, convex; separated by
deep grooves, less apparent in oldest parts of colony. Primary orifice as wide as
long, proximal half constituting a broad shallow sinus. Peristome with an
orbicular secondary orifice, inner proximal border with a broad shelf-like
denticle. Frontal wall granular, closely perforated by numerous round pores
which become accentuated as calcification continues; marginal series particu-
larly prominent in later ontogenetic stages. A pronounced umbo frequently
present on proximal frontal wall. Spiramen medially situated in distal half of
zooid; relatively large and rather elongate, partly hidden by a lateral hood, the
aperture thus appearing perpendicular to frontal plane of zooid. A single lateral
avicularium developed, sporadically, just proximal to aperture, rostrum
extending obliquely distally on to the peristome; frequently absent. Larger,
vicarious, avicularia present in single linear series along branch edges, and
often intercalated in zooid rows at the margins of the branch; mandible acute
triangular, distally directed.
As secondary calcification proceeds the spiramen becomes deeply
immersed, and the frontal wall quite concave; a second frontal avicularium is
then budded, obscuring the first and partly filling the concavity. This new
avicularium is orientated proximally in all zooids; the extended opening of the
Spiramen is just visible at its distal end. A median longitudinal ridge may be
apparent along the branches of the oldest part of the colony, formed by the
development of extra adventitious avicularia; elsewhere, however, the avicula-
ria do not proliferate as they do in A. abdita (above).
Etymology
Gibbus (L.)—protuberant, referring to the frontal umbones of later
zooids.
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
The secondary frontal avicularium, with its constant orientation, is a
characteristic feature of this species and serves to distinguish it further from
Adeonella abdita.
Measurements (means of 25 values) in mm
IL Iz
(SY 0,29
Adeonella alia sp. nov.
Fig. 24A—D
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26445, station SM 179, 33°30,3’S 27°22,1’E, 80 m.
Description
Colony erect, branching, rigid, attached by an encrusting base; branches
bilaminar, broad and flat with lobed edges, up to 20 mm wide. Zooids rounded
distally, tapered proximally. Primary orifice with semicircular anter and slender
V-shaped poster, condyles strongly marked. Peristome with a semicircular or
semi-elliptical secondary orifice, the inner proximal border thickened and
raised medially to form a broad denticle with a serrated margin. Spiramen
situated close to base of peristome, its orifice vertical to frontal plane of zooid;
proximal edge incomplete in younger zooids, later quite rounded. Frontal wall
finely granular, with large, deeply sunk pores giving it a rugose appearance.
Avicularium single or paired, arising adjacent to spiramen, elongate rostrum
directed distomedially towards the proximal border of the secondary orifice.
When only a single avicularium is present a short conical umbo may be
developed on the opposite side of the spiramen. In early ontogeny the middle
area of the frontal wall, proximal to the spiramen, is deeply concave;
subsequently an extra adventitious avicularium develops here, with a prominent
tumid umbo and an elongate, proximally directed rostrum. Other, smaller,
avicularia may develop elsewhere on the frontal surface, and along the branch
edges, in the oldest parts of the colony.
Etymology
Alius (L.)—another.
Remarks
The single colony found was 40 mm high, with broad lobed branches;
either flat, or concave, or distinctly twisted about the longitudinal axis. The
concave frontal wall, and the subsequent development of a proximally directed
avicularium, recall the morphology of A. gibba (above). However, A. alia is
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 101
Fig. 24. A-D. Adeonella alia sp. nov. A. Young zooids, with typical concave frontal walls. B. Later
zooids, with characteristic development of frontal avicularia. C. Two zooids in oblique view to show
peristomial denticle. D. Outline diagram of primary orifice. E. Reteporella dinotorhynchus Hayward
& Cook. F-G. Sertella lata (Busk). F. Portion of a colony showing ovicelled zooids. G. Outline
diagram of primary orifice. H. Schizoretepora tessellata (Hincks).
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
distinguished from that species by the shape of the primary orifice, the form of
the spiramen, and by the characteristic form of its colony.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
EZ Iz
OFS2 0,29
Family Tessaradomidae Jullien, 1903
Tessaradomidae Jullien in Jullien & Calvet, 1903: pl. 14. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 242.
Tessaradoma Norman, 1869
Tessaradoma Norman, 1869: 309. Lagaaij & Cook, 1973: 494. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 242.
Tessaradoma bispiramina Hayward & Cook, 1979
Tessaradoma bispiramina Hayward & Cook, 1979: 90, fig. 13A—D.
Material
Stations SM 103, SM 151, SM 233, SM 234.
Remarks
Living colonies were collected from stations SM 233 and SM 234, within
the bathymetric range observed by Hayward & Cook (1979).
Tessaradoma circella Hayward & Cook, 1979
Tessaradoma circella Hayward & Cook, 1979: 91, fig. 13E—H. Hayward 1981: 48, fig. 25.
Material
Stations SM 103, SM 233.
Remarks
The astogeny of the basal attachment ring of Tessaradoma circella and the
morphology of the ancestrula have recently been described by Hayward (1981).
Family Sertellidae Jullien, 1903
Sertellidae Jullien in Jullien & Calvet, 1903: 57. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 260.
The genera and species here assigned to the Sertellidae do not, perhaps,
constitute a natural assemblage, yet display a confusing similarity in many of
their morphological features. Lagaaij (1952: 109-110) followed accepted taxo-
nomic practice in proposing the use of Sertellidae Jullien (1903) for the genera
then grouped in the old family Reteporidae Smitt (1868), the type genus of
which (Retepora Lamarck, 1801) appears to have no recognizable or acceptable
type species. Levinsen (1902, 1909) had expanded the Reteporidae to include
encrusting, non-fenestrate genera such as Rhynchozoon and Schizotheca.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 103
Despite the objection of Harmer (1933), this arrangement is now generally
accepted (e.g. Osburn 1952; Powell 1967).
The substantial number of genera of both erect and encrusting forms
presently included in the Sertellidae appears to have several important
morphological characteristics in common. The primary orifice, though widely
variable in shape, typically has a denticulate or beaded distal rim (‘vestibular
arch’), and distinct condyles; the ovicell is imperforate, often prominent, and in
most species is provided with a conspicuous frontal lip or labellum. In several
genera (Sertella, Schizotheca, Triphyllozoon, for example) the ovicell is further
characterized by a frontal fissure of variable size and extent. The peristome is
often well developed, often with a notch, fissure or ‘pseudospiramen’
proximally, and frequently incorporating a suboral avicularium. Adventitious
and vicarious avicularia occur in most genera.
The genera of erect species seem to constitute a fairly homogenous group,
although some species diverge from the common pattern. Schizoretepora
tessellata (Hincks), for example, has a smooth orifice rim and a minimal
development of the peristome. The growth form of this species (see p. 108),
and of the bilaminate species of Reteporella described by Hayward & Cook
(1979), perhaps suggest a link with the encrusting genera Schizotheca and
Rhynchozoon. The ovicell of the former, moreover, is very similar to those of
S. tessellata and Reteporella. Rhynchozoon is characterized principally by its
distinctly beaded orifice rim, by the ovicell, which has a frontal ‘area’ of
uncalcified ectooecium and often possesses a short labellum, and by the
peristomial complex, which includes a hammer- or anvil-shaped uncinate
process projecting distally over the orifice. The uncinate process is variably
developed; in the new species here assigned to Rhynchozoon it varies from an
inconspicuous structure in R. incallidum to the massive development seen in R.
oscitans and R. stomachosum. In R. ptarmicum there is no uncinate process;
this fact caused some difficulty in deciding to which genus the species should be
assigned, but in comparison with certain other species in the present collections
prompted consideration of the systematic relationships of the Sertellidae with
other family groups.
The genus Brodiella was introduced by Uttley & Bullivant (1972) for
Schizoporella longispinata Busk. This well-defined species was first described
(Busk 1884) from the Straits of Magellan, was reported from two localities in
the Chatham Islands, New Zealand (Uttley & Bullivant 1972), and was found
in the present collections. The affinities of Brodiella with Rhynchozoon seem
clear; in both genera the zooid has a conspicuously beaded orifice and the
Ovicell typically develops a distinct labellum. On this basis Gautier (1962)
referred the warm-temperate North Atlantic species, Lepralia armata Hincks,
to Rhynchozoon and it is now clear (D. P. Gordon 1978, in litt.) that the
species is correctly placed in Brodiella. Curiously, Uttley & Bullivant (1972)
remarked upon the similarity of the two genera, yet assigned Brodiella to the
Schizoporellidae. Although the Meiring Naude specimens of B. ignota sp. nov.
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
did not include ovicelled zooids, its morphology seems quite consistent with the
generic diagnosis of Brodiella. The genus is here placed within the Sertellidae,
emphasizing its relationship to Rhynchozoon. However, it must then be
recognized that there is a need to consider the systematic affinities of two large
and heterogenous genera, Cleidochasma Harmer and Hippoporella Canu, both
currently assigned to the family Cleidochasmatidae Cheetham & Sandberg
(1964). Species of both genera were present in the Meiring Naude collections.
Cleidochasma perspicua sp. nov. (p. 76) conforms most nearly to the
diagnosis of Cleidochasma, although its ovicell, which has a well-marked
frontal labellum, is clearly more similar to those of Rhynchozoon and
Brodiella than the spherical, tuberculate ovicells of most species of Cleido-
chasma. A second species, C. contractum (Waters), figured by Cook
(1964b: 15, fig. SA), also has the same, typically Sertellid, ovicell morphology
and, moreover, a finely denticulate orifice rim. Hippoporella labiata sp. nov.
(p. 80) constitutes a more severe test of current systematics, and its inclusion
in Hippoporella can only be regarded as a doubtful compromise. The
morphology of the ovicell and the denticulate orifice rim again suggest an
affinity with the encrusting genera placed among the Sertellidae, but the
species does not conform strictly with the taxonomic diagnosis of any of them.
The lepralioid orifice and prominent suboral umbo suggest that it might be
temporarily accommodated in Hippoporella, particularly as this genus includes
many tropical species (e.g. Harmer 1957: 1096. Cook 19646: 8) that seem to
have little in common with the boreal-arctic type species, H. hippopus
(Smitt). The Australian species Schizoporella pulchra MacGillivray (1891: 81,
pl. 9 (fig. 7)) illustrates the apparent convergence of characters in tropical,
particularly Indo-West-Pacific, species of these different genera. S. pulchra
forms encrusting, multilaminar colonies (e.g. BMNH 1897.5.1.758); the zooid
has a broadly cleithridiate orifice with a finely denticulate distal rim. There
are single or paired lateral oral avicularia, with short, distally directed,
semicircular mandibles; one of these is frequently supplanted by an enlarged
avicularium with a slender spatulate mandible. These avicularia seem to be
interzooidal in origin and analogous to those seen in Brodiella, yet the tall
basally jointed spines and proximal peristome rim characteristic of that genus
are lacking in S. pulchra. The ovicell is prominent, frontally flattened, with a
large area of uncalcified ectooecium and in the older parts of the colony the
frontal walls of many zooids are obscured by massive, frontally budded,
vicarious avicularia with broad scaphoid mandibles. These features are most
usually associated with Rhynchozoon.
It seems clear, in conclusion, that any further investigation into systematic
relationships within the Sertellidae must be combined with a thorough review
of the morphology and systematics of many tropical species at present placed
among the Cleidochasmatidae. The need for such a study is highlighted by the
anomalous positions of several species reported upon here, but is beyond the
scope of the present work.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 105
Sertella Jullien, 1903
Sertella Jullien in Jullien & Calvet, 1903: 57. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 260.
Sertella lata (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 24F—G
Retepora lata Busk, 1884: 115, pl. 27 (fig. 1).
Material 3
Stations SM 163, SM 179, SM 185.
Description
Colony generally thick and robust; trabeculae composed of three to seven
longitudinal series of zooids, fenestrulae oval, small, 0,5-1,0 mm long. Primary
orifice of zooid about twice as broad as long, lacking the usual denticulate rim;
condyles basally deflected and not visible in frontal view. Peristome thin, with a
central fissure and a small proximal pseudosinus, a single short spine present on
each edge of peristome. Adventitious avicularia numerous, distributed over the
entire frontal surface of the colony, mandible either semi-elliptical or acute
triangular, mostly less than 0,1 mm long; rarely, an enlarged avicularium
occurs, with a triangular mandible up to 0,15 mm long. Ovicell prominent,
pear-shaped, convex, with a longitudinal frontal fissure and a very long
labellum extending deep into the peristome. Basal surface of colony densely
papillate, with a few scattered avicularia; frontal calcification becoming
similarly papillate in later ontogenetic stages.
Remarks
The most characteristic feature of Sertella lata is the pear-shaped ovicell
with its very long labellum. This feature was not illustrated by Busk (1884,
pl. 27 (fig. 1)) who shows the ovicell orifice opening just above the level of the
peristome. However, examination of the type specimen shows this detail to be
incorrect, and in all respects it is in close correspondence with the Meiring
Naude material. This species is known only from South Africa.
Sertella verecunda sp. nov.
Figs 25, 26A
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26446, station SM 185, 33°39,3’S 27°11,6’E, 90 m.
Description
Colony robust, holotype 6 mm high with a spread of 15 mm. Trabeculae
stout, comprising five to eight longitudinal series of zooids, fenestrulae
irregularly oval, up to 2 mm long. Zooids hexagonal or irregular, small, about
0,4 mm long by 0,2 mm broad; frontal calcification tessellated, with a few large
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
distinct marginal pores. Primary orifice transversely oval, deeply immersed and
seen only at broken edges. Peristome tubular and deep, secondary orifice
scarcely raised above frontal surface of zooid, a single pair of lateral oral spines
present in early ontogeny; proximal border with a rounded notch, later closed
forming a circular pseudosinus, persisting through later ontogenetic stages.
Avicularia sporadically developed on frontal wall, one, two or more per zooid,
either short, with a rounded rostrum bearing a semicircular mandible, a thick
cross-bar and stout columella, or more elongate, almost bispatulate, with a
semi-elliptical mandible, a centrally placed cross-bar and a delicate columella.
The short type has a denticulate distal margin to the rostrum. Large vicarious
avicularia distributed around edges of fenestrulae; rostrum quadrate, parallel-
sided, palatal foramen triangular, cross-bar slender with a delicate columella.
Ovicell pyriform, smooth surfaced, with an elongate central fissure and a short
labellum; obscured by a thickened ooecial cover early in ontogeny. Basal
surface of colony with both types of adventitious avicularia, often numerous.
Etymology
Verecundus (L.)—bashful, an allusion to the hidden primary orifice.
Remarks
S. verecunda may be distinguished from other species of Sertella by its
pronounced pseudosinus, and the absence of peristomial avicularia, by the two
types of adventitious avicularia, and by the characteristic quadrate fenestral
avicularia.
Schizoretepora Gregory, 1893
Schizoretepora Gregory, 1893: 224. Harmer, 1933: 619.
Schizoretepora tessellata (Hincks, 1878)
Fig. 24H
Retepora tessellata Hincks, 1878: 358, pl. 19 (figs 9-12). Busk, 1884: 112, pl. 27 (fig. 8).
O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1935: 210; 1937: 15. O’Donoghue, 1957: 91.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 180, SM 1835.
Description
Colony rather delicate; trabeculae composed of four to six longitudinal
series of zooids, or up to eight at points of trabecular fusion, fenestrulae
elongate-oval, up to 1,6 mm long. Zooids hexagonal or irregular, rather flat,
separated by distinct sutures at first, boundaries later indistinct. Primary orifice
semi-elliptical, longer than wide; distal border smooth, proximal border gently
concave, with a short notch-like sinus. Peristome developing initially as a thin
erect flange on each side of the orifice, not developed proximally; later
107
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
i]
h
N
N
N
7)
ia and
with
lar
ing avicu
showi
ip of a branch,
t
f a colony,
ing
x 100.
ion o
icells.
Port
ids from the grow
Ils
A.
ing OV
nov
Zoo
develop
B
x 100
ina
Fig. 25. Sertella verecunda sp
pseudospiram
108 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
immersed and somewhat unclear, but proximal side of orifice still distinct. Up
to six distal and lateral oral spines present, only the proximal pair of which
persist as secondary calcification proceeds. Frontal calcification finely granular
with a small number of marginal pores. Avicularia variably developed;
frequently proximolateral to orifice, small, with a semi-elliptical mandible; also
elsewhere on frontal wall, small, with more elongate, semi-elliptical or acute
triangular mandibles. Gigantic avicularia typically frequent; cystid obscuring
most of the zooid bearing it, rostrum elongate, acute triangular, up to 0,3 mm
long, perpendicular to frontal plane of zooid. Ovicell prominent, spherical,
with a conspicuous oval orifice situated well above peristome rim. Basal surface
sutured, with numerous small avicularia and typically a gigantic avicularium at
the proximal end of each fenestrula.
Remarks
Schizoretepora tessellata is unusual among the Sertellidae in possessing the
facility to grow as a typical fenestrate colony, or as a folded bilaminar sheet.
This facility may be expressed in a single colony, with substantial bilaminate
colonies producing peripheral fenestrulae (e.g. BMNH 1962.6.4.17pt., Millers
Point, Cape Town). Described originally from South Australia, it was reported
from Simon’s Bay (Cape of Good Hope) by Busk (1884). Comparison of
Australian and South African specimens with the Meiring Naude samples shows
some variation in the width of the primary orifice both between and within each
of the three series of specimens. Additionally, some of the Australian
specimens develop long (0,8 mm) antenniform spines. However, the avicularia
and ovicells are closely comparable in all instances.
Reteporella Busk, 1884
Reteporella Busk, 1884: 126. Harmer, 1934: 572.
Reteporella dinotorhynchus Hayward & Cook, 1979
Fig. 24E
Reteporella dinotorhynchus Hayward & Cook, 1979: 95, fig. 14A—D.
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 184, SM 1835.
Remarks
The material from station SM 185 comprised a more complete ontogenetic
sequence than was provided by the first Meiring Naude samples, and it is clear
that the original description of this species must be amplified. In particular, it is
evident that a small adventitious avicularium develops on the peristome
adjacent to the lateral notch. This is missing in even the least worn fragments,
and is obscured by the peristome in the oldest parts of the colony. Developing
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 109
ovicells were found in the present specimens, but no complete examples
remained; the ovicell seems to have a substantial frontal fissure.
Iodictyum Harmer, 1933
Todictyum Harmer, 1933: 624; 1934: 537.
Iodictyum flosculum sp. nov.
Fig. 27A—C
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26447, station SM 164, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 185.
Description
Colony white, forming a delicate cup shape, up to 8mm high with a
spread of 6 mm in present material; trabeculae composed of three alternating
series of zooids, increasing to four or five at trabecular fusion, fenestrulae
elongate-oval, up to 0,8 mm long. Zooids quadrate, rather flat, separated by
distinct raised sutures; calcification smooth, imperforate except for a few rather
large round marginal pores, usually situated at the proximal end of the zooid.
Primary orifice semicircular, distal edge not denticulate, proximal edge slightly
concave, with large blunt lateral condyles. Peristome characteristic of genus:
developed early in ontogeny and completely hiding orifice; erect, broadly
flared, the free edge drawn into a number of delicate spikes, aligned with a
second series of smaller spikes around the inner rim of the peristome. The
inner denticulations of the peristome are continuous with delicate ridges which
extend down its interior surfaces; proximally, two of the ridges delimit a
U-shaped channel which appears as a distinct pseudosinus in damaged zooids.
With increasing calcification the peristome is immersed, the outer spikes are
lost and the aperture appears as a simple denticulate opening. Avicularia
infrequent, orientated oblique to proximal edge of peristome, rostrum
elongate, subtriangular, hooked at tip. Ovicell not found. Basal surface of
colony faintly papillate, crossed by conspicuous sutures, lacking avicularia.
Etymology
Flosculus (L.)—a little flower.
Remarks
This delicate species represents the first occurrence of the genus Jodictyum
remote from the western Pacific.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
ILyZ Iz
0,42 0,19
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Rhynchozoon Hincks, 1895
Rhynchozoon Hincks, 1895: V. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 271.
This large and difficult genus is widely distributed in both temperate and
tropical waters. Most bryozoan faunas of the continental shelf seas include one
or more species of Rhynchozoon, yet few of these are adequately characterized
and taxonomic confusion obscures the identity of most of them. In almost all
species of Rhynchozoon the primary orifice of the zooid becomes immersed in a
secondarily developed peristomial complex which is frequently ornamented
with a variety of knobs and processes, and there is often a proliferation of small
adventitious avicularia. These later stages of ontogeny are often subject to
great variation within a single colony and cannot be used as reliable specific
characters. The shape of the primary orifice and the morphology of the suboral
avicularium, together with its uncinate process, should be used as the most
important features for discriminating between species and it is clear that when
this is done a greater diversity of species is revealed than is apparent from the
literature (e.g. Hayward 1974). These features, together with selected second-
ary characters, show that the South African fauna includes a rich variety of
species, none of which from among those represented here may be identified
with either of the two species described by O'Donoghue & De Watteville
(1935), or with any of the Indo-West-Pacific species reported by Harmer
(1957).
Rhynchozoon documentum sp. nov.
Fig. 26B-C
Material
Holotype: SAM—-A26448, station SM 163/164, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 164.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar, forming small nodular sheets. Zooids
distinct only at growing edge, oval and convex; frontal wall smooth, with large
marginal pores. Primary orifice broader than long; anter transversely oval, with
finely denticulate rim, poster forming a short, U-shaped sinus, oral spines
lacking. Suboral avicularium large, distinct in early ontogenetic stages,
mandible elongate elliptical, uncinate process well developed and conspicuous,
delimiting laterally a closed pseudosinus. Peristome developing a thickened rim
obscuring primary orifice and suboral avicularium; proximally a median fissure
is flanked by short conical processes, in later ontogeny further short columnar
processes are developed around the whole of the secondary orifice. Frontal
avicularia often numerous, small, with semicircular or semi-elliptical mandibles.
Etymology
Documentum (L.)—an example.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
a
~ 03
s @r r @
Fig. 26. A. Sertella verecunda sp. nov., the edge of a fenestrula (left) with a vicarious avicularium.
x 96. B—C. Rhynchozoon documentum sp. nov. B. Zooids at a growing edge, note primary orifice
C. Later zooids, each with one frontal avicularium and
and conspicuous areolae. X 76.
conspicuous areolae. x 64,3.
nD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
J
Fig. 27. A-C. Jodictyum flosculum sp. nov. A. Young zooids showing typical flared spinose peristomes.
B. Old zooids with worn peristomes; a single suboral avicularium. C. a complete juvenile colony, possibly
including the ancestrula. D-F. Rhynchozoon incallidum sp. nov. D. Zooids from the growing edge.
E. Later zooids, with ovicells and developed peristomes. F. Outline diagram of primary orifice.
G-H. Rhynchozoon oscitans sp. nov. G. Four young zooids; note conspicuous uncinate process. H. Outline
diagram of primary orifice. I-K. Rhynchozoon stomachosum sp. nov. I. Two young zooids. J. Later
zooids, with typical development of the umbo, and two vicarious avicularia. K. Outline diagram of the
primary orifice.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 113
Remarks
In later ontogenetic stages the marginal pores of the zooids are
particularly distinct, appearing as elongate tubular structures within the rather
vitreous calcification, and appear to be associated with the production of
numerous small adventitious avicularia. This particularly conspicuous morpho-
logical feature seems to be a fairly constant characteristic of this species.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
GZ Iz
0,39 0,32
Rhynchozoon beatulum sp. nov.
Fig. 28
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26449, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163/164, SM 184, SM 185.
Description
Colony encrusting, forming small irregular sheets, apparently unilaminar.
Zooids oval to hexagonal, strongly convex; frontal wall finely granular,
becoming increasingly vitreous in later ontogenetic stages, marginal pores
conspicuous. Primary orifice wider than long; anter orbicular, with finely
denticulate rim, poster broad, shallowly concave, two short, widely-spaced,
distal oral spines present in newly budded zooids. Suboral avicularium large
and distinct, rostrum hooked, with elongate triangular mandible; uncinate
process bluntly triangular. Peristomial thickening moderate: a short, blunt
umbo develops on the cystid of the avicularium, and a second umbo on the
opposite lateral edge of the secondary aperture, with a small asymmetrically
developed notch between; in later ontogenetic stages, one or two short knobs
may be developed on the distal rim of the peristome. Frontal avicularia
typically limited to one on each zooid, on the proximal! half of the frontal wall;
rostrum triangular, directed proximally. Ovicell rather elongate, with an oval
area of uncovered entooecium frontally, and a large frontal labellum; obscured
by a thickened ooecial cover.
Etymology
Beatus (L.)—happy, an allusion to the broad sinus.
Remarks
Despite the progressive thickening of the frontal calcification in later
ontogeny, the marginal pores of R. beatulum remain distinct. Further, the
suboral avicularium is rarely completely hidden, and the peristomial rim shows
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
only a limited development of umbones. The frontal avicularium is remarkably
constant in position, shape and orientation in all the present specimens, and
assists in distinguishing this species from others in the South African fauna.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,45 0,35
Rhynchozoon incallidum sp. nov.
Figs 27D-F, 29A-B
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26450, station SM 185, 33°39,3’S 27°11,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 180, SM 184.
Description
Colony encrusting, forming small unilaminar patches. Zooids oval to
hexagonal, frontal wall smooth and vitreous with few indistinct marginal pores.
Primary orifice as wide as long: anter semicircular, with finely denticulate rim,
poster forming a short quadrate sinus; up to four slender distal oral spines
present. Suboral avicularium on a voluminous cystid, developed apically as a
blunt umbo; rostrum triangular, perpendicular to frontal plane of zooid and
facing laterally, uncinate process poorly developed, not prominent. A second
umbo typically developed on opposite lateral border of orifice, a third may be
present distal to the suboral avicularium; these develop independently of the
spine bases. Frontal avicularia not found. Ovicell spherical, flattened frontally,
with an irregular area of uncovered entooecium and a short, broad labellum.
Ooecial cover developing early in ontogeny, frequently with one or more low
umbones, but ovicell remaining conspicuous. Zooid boundaries become
indistinct in later ontogenetic stages, additional umbones may be developed on
the frontal wall, but the primary orifice is not deeply immersed and generally
remains visible in frontal view.
Etymology
Incallidus (L.)—simple, referring to the relative simplicity of the zooidal
morphology.
Remarks
The shape of the primary orifice, the poor development of the uncinate
process and the relatively simple zooid morphology serve to distinguish R.
incallidum from other species of Rhynchozoon.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
IL Iz
0,45 OZ
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 115
S
Ow?
SENS
se
SAS
3
Sos
~.
oe
Fig. 28. Rhynchozoon beatulum sp. nov. A. Zooids at a growing edge.
x 46,5. B. Details of a primary orifice. x 240. C. Later zooids, showing
the characteristic frontal avicularium. x 61.
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
RhynchoZoon oscitans sp. nov.
Fig. 27G—H
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26451, station SM 185, 33°39,3’S 27°11,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: station SM 180.
Description
Colony encrusting, unilaminar. Zooids oval to hexagonal, convex,
distinct, separated by well-marked sutures. Frontal calcification thick and
smooth, with a few inconspicuous marginal pores. Primary orifice longer than
wide, lepralioid; proximal edge straight, distolateral rim denticulate above
massive rectangular, basally deflected condyles. Four or five oral spines
present, the distalmost pair persisting as short stumps in later ontogeny.
Peristome low; suboral avicularium situated medioproximally on outer peri-
stome rim, at oblique angle to frontal plane, mandible small, semi-elliptical.
Uncinate process large, quadrate, very conspicuous. Frontal avicularia and
ovicells not found.
Etymology
Oscitans (L.)—yawning, referring to the conspicuous primary orifice.
Remarks
Only two small specimens of this species were found, and neither
represents a complete astogenetic or ontogenetic sequence. However, the
shape of the orifice, and the massive uncinate process are very distinctive and
sufficient to distinguish R. oscitans from all known species of Rhynchozoon.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,53 0,37
Rhynchozoon stomachosum sp. nov.
Fig. 27I-K, 29C
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26452, station SM 234, 32°15’S 29°09,1’E, 500-520 m.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar. Zooids at growing edge large, oval and
convex; frontal calcification granular, becoming rather nodular in later
ontogenetic stages, marginal pores few and small but distinct. Primary orifice |
D-shaped, wider than long; proximal border almost straight, distolateral rim
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES iLY/
Fig. 29. A-B. Rhynchozoon incallidum sp. nov. A. A group of zooids from a dead colony.
x 100. B. Detail to show primary orifice and spine bases. x 300. C. Rhynchozoon
stomachosum sp. nov. X 41.
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
finely denticulate, apparently without condyles. No oral spines. Suboral
avicularium obliquely transverse to orifice, at a slight angle to frontal plane;
rostrum triangular, with hooked tip. Uncinate process large and conspicuous.
Peristome morphology variable; typically developing a columnar, clavate umbo
proximomedially, with a knobbed granular surface, adjacent to a shallow
notch; two, rarely more, short processes may also be present on the lateral
borders of the peristome. Alternatively, two shorter, more slender, equisized
umbones may develop, flanking a more prominent peristomial notch. Frontal
avicularia of two sizes: on peripheral zooids situated laterally, close to suture,
and directed proximolaterally, the plane of the palate typically at a right angle
to the frontal plane; in later ontogeny a larger avicularium may develop on the
frontal wall along the midline of the zooid, directed proximally with the plane
of the palate normal to the frontal plane. In both types the rostrum is elongate,
slightly expanded distally to give a slender spatulate shape, straight or gently
curved laterally; cross-bar entire, palate with a narrow, elongate central fissure.
Ovicell longer than wide, flattened frontally, with a distinct labellum; frontal
ectooecium finely tuberculate.
Etymology
Stomachosus (L.)—itritable, an allusion to the aggressive aspect of the
peristomial complex.
Remarks
The material comprised a single colony, 20 mm in diameter, with an
undulating, unilaminar growing edge and a thickened multilaminar central
region. The calcification is thick, particularly that of the basal walls; the basal
surface of the colony was apparently mostly unattached to the substratum, and
is encrusted with epizooites.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
OM 0,54
Rhynchozoon ptarmicum sp. nov.
Fig. 30
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26453, station SM 179, 33°30,3’S 27°22,1’E, 80 m.
Other material: stations SM 185, SM 239, SM 250.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar, forming extensive nodular sheets.
Zooids convex, large; frontal calcification thick and vitreous, becoming
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
Fig. 30. Rhynchozoon ptarmicum sp. nov. A. Young zooids, showing the form of
the primary orifice. x 67. B. Later zooids, showing proliferation of avicularia and
orifices immersed in thickened calcification. x 50.
119
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
distinctly nodular in later ontogeny, marginal pores small. Primary orifice
slightly longer than wide; anter orbicular, with finely denticulate rim, poster
shallow, transversely elliptical; condyles large and conspicuous, triangular,
basally deflected. Four to six distal oral spines present in early ontogeny,
obscured by the development of a low thickened peristome, bearing a number
of short conical umbones. Suboral avicularium small, not enveloped by the
peristome and always distinct, rostrum at acute angle to frontal plane, directed
obliquely laterally, mandible short, broadly subtriangular; sporadically devel-
oped and frequently absent. No uncinate process. Additional avicularia often
abundant, of two types: small, adventitious, with a rounded cystid and short
semicircular or subtriangular mandible, developed along lateral borders of
zooid and encroaching on to frontal wall, often numerous, up to ten per zooid;
large, ?vicarious, with a swollen cystid supporting an elongate, triangular,
hooked rostrum (0,35 mm), with complete cross-bar and massive, quadrate,
bifid columnella. A slightly smaller version of the latter type (?adventitious)
may replace the suboral avicularium in some zooids. Ovicell elongate oval,
frontal surface granular, striated, labellum distinct; ooecial cover developed in
later ontogeny, often tuberculate.
Etymology
Ptarmos (Gr.)—a sneeze, an allusion to the open aspect of the orifice.
Remarks
Live colonies were collected from all four stations, the largest (SM 179)
was a massive, nodular, multilaminar growth measuring 70 mm by 35 mm. The
young colonies from SM 185 had a pale blue-grey coloration. The ?vicarious
avicularia resemble those of Strophiella tuberigera Jullien & Calvet (1903: 66,
pl. 9 (fig. 1)), reported from the Gulf of Gascony, from 135 m. S. tuberigera
has a ‘beaded’ orifice and is probably referable to Rhynchozoon; it differs
completely from R. ptarmicum in the shape of the primary orifice.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,73 Or52
Brodiella Uttley & Bullivant, 1972
Brodiella Uttley & Bullivant, 1972: 35.
Brodiella longispinata (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 31A-B
Schizoporella longispinata Busk, 1884: 163, pl. 17 (figs 2A, C).
Brodiella longispinata: Uttley & Bullivant, 1972: 36, fig. 26.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES IVA
Q5
mm
Fig. 31. A-B. Brodiella longispinata (Busk). A. Three young zooids. B. Portion of a colony showing
ovicells and different types of avicularia. C—D. Brodiella ignota sp. nov. C. A typical zooid. D. Three
zooids showing variation in avicularia type. E-F. Turbicellepora conica (Busk). E. Portion of a colony
showing active frontal budding. F. Vicarious avicularia, and adventitious avicularia clustered on the
peristome rim of a brooding zooid. G-—H. Turbicellepora valligera sp. nov. G. Young zooids, showing
typical development of the peristome. H. Zooids from an older part of the colony, with numerous small
avicularia.
122 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Stations SM 185, SM 239.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar. Zooids oval to hexagonal, heavily
calcified, separated by distinct grooves at first, boundaries later obscured by
secondary calcification. Primary orifice cleithridiate: anter orbicular, with a
denticulate rim, separated from the short rounded poster by prominent
condyles; operculum well chitinized, dark brown, with a distinct marginal
sclerite and a longitudinal median groove. Six distal oral spines, jointed basally,
of variable length, often greatly enlarged. Proximal side of orifice enclosed by a
low, thickened, peristomial rim, extending between the bases of the most
proximal pair of spines. Frontal wall thick, vitreous, with a characteristic
surface of rounded nodules imparting a rippled effect; marginal pores
infrequent and not readily visible. Avicularia adventitious, lateral to orifice,
single or paired, cystid low, tumid, rostrum elliptical, pivotal bar stout with a
thickened columnella, mandible semi-elliptical, directed laterally or obliquely
distally. Either or both avicularia may be replaced by an enlarged type with an
elongate, acute triangular mandible directed distally; alternatively or addition-
ally this enlarged avicularium may occur on the frontal wall, when the mandible
is directed proximally. Ovicell prominent, almost perpendicular to frontal plane
of zooid, oval, flattened frontally, with a short quadrate labellum above the
aperture and an uncovered frontal area of entooecium.
Remarks
The incidence of the different types of avicularia varies, and the larger
type may be more common than the small in some specimens. Both types are
seen in Busk’s original specimen (BMNH _ 1887.12.9.653), which in other
respects as well differs in no way from the Meiring Naude material.
Distribution
Brodiella longispinata was described by Busk (1884) from the Straits of
Magellan and has been reported subsequently from New Zealand and the
Chatham Islands (Uttley & Bullivant 1972). A synonymy of recent and fossil
New Zealand records is given by these authors.
Brodiella ignota sp. nov.
Fig. 31C-D
Material
Holotype: SAM—A26454, station SM 250, 31°59,3’S 29°22,5’E, 150-200 m.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar. Zooids oval to hexagonal, large and
broad, convex, separated by distinct grooves. Primary orifice comprising an
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 123
orbicular anter, with finely denticulate rim, and a short, rounded poster below
blunt condyles. Six or seven slender, distal oral spines; proximally, a thin
peristomial rim encloses the orifice between the proximalmost pair of spines,
particularly developed in heavily calcified older zooids. Frontal wall thick,
vitreous and glistening, surface texture of densely packed rounded nodules;
marginal pores few in number, small and inconspicuous, generally visible only in
newly budded zooids. Avicularia paired, situated lateral to distal half of orifice;
cystid small, tumid, rostrum elliptical, directed laterally or medially, mandible
semicircular. Either or both avicularia frequently replaced by an enlarged type
with an elongate spatulate mandible directed distomedially, close to distal border
of orifice, reminiscent of Hippaliosina; palate with a small foramen almost
occluded by a thick columella. Rarely, one or both types of avicularia may occur
on the frontal wall. Small basal pore chambers present. Ovicells not found.
Etymology
Ignotus (L.)—unknown.
Remarks
The dimorphic avicularia, arising close to the primary orifice, the
denticulate anter, the peristomial rim and the characteristically thick, nodular
and vitreous frontal wall are all features of Brodiella, exemplified in the type
species B. longispinata (above). B. ignota differs from that species in the
proportions of the orifice, the shape and orientation of the enlarged avicularia
and in possessing more slender oral spines. D. P. Gordon (1979 in litt.) has
pointed out that the northern hemisphere species Lepralia armata Hincks
(Hayward & Ryland 1979: 206, as Buffonellaria) also belongs to Brodiella.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lz Iz
0,83 0,61
Family Celleporidae Busk, 1852
Celleporidae Busk, 1852: 85. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 274.
Turbicellepora Ryland, 1963
Turbicellepora Ryland, 1963: 34. Hayward & Ryland, 1979: 284.
Turbicellepora conica (Busk, 1884)
Fig. 31E—F
Cellepora conica Busk, 1884: 203, pl. 28 (fig. 10), pl. 36 (fig. 1).
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164, SM 179, SM 180, SM 184, SM 185.
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description
Colony forming small nodules on erect substrata, pisiform, or branching in
one or more planes to give a stellate appearance. Zooids closely packed,
individual boundaries scarcely discernible. Primary orifice longer than broad;
anter suborbicular, poster deep, V-shaped, constituting one-third of total
orifice length. Peristome thin, tubular, incorporating proximolaterally a short
cylindrical avicularium; mandible semi-elliptical or subtriangular, acute to
frontal plane, directed obliquely laterally. Ovicell prominent, thinly calcified,
frontal surface closely punctured by numerous small round pores. Vicarious
avicularia of two types: elongate, broadly elliptical or slightly spatulate, with
thin cross-bar and large palatal foramen, small (0,2 mm long) and generally
infrequent; outnumbered by small vicarious avicularia, identical to suboral
type, with semi-elliptical mandible.
Remarks
The peristome tends to encircle the orifice completely, extending on to the
lateral regions of the ovicell. On older zooids the small avicularia tend to
multiply and typically become clustered around the rim of the deeply immersed
peristome, four or five commonly occur together. However, this very
characteristic feature seems to be present only in colonies in which growth by
frontal budding has slowed, in young colonies the continued budding of zooids
results in a surface composed of numerous cylindrical peristomes. The
multiplication of these small avicularia is thus apparently an ontogenetic, and
possibly gerontic, effect.
Turbicellepora conica is known only from Simon’s Bay, South Africa
(BMNH 1899.7.1.482, 483, 484, 486).
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lor lor
0,14 Oetat
Turbicellepora valligera sp. nov.
Fig. 31G—H
Material
Holotype: SAM-—A26455, station SM 163, 33°04,6’S 28°06,6’E, 90 m.
Other material: station SM 239.
Description
Colony developing from an encrusting base, forming a slender, erect
cylindrical growth. Zooids distinct, strongly convex and thickly calcified; frontal
wall fine-grained and smooth, with three or four very large marginal pores.
Primary orifice longer than broad, with a deep V-shaped poster comprising
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES WS
about one-third of the total length; hooded distally by a thin, erect peristomial
rim, the free edge of which is often peaked medially or produced into two or
more processes. Paired lateral oral avicularia; slender, cylindrical, with small
semicircular mandibles, linked distally by the peristome. Proximal to orifice a
conspicuous median umbo develops, often produced into an erect spike.
Vicarious avicularia of two types: broadly spatulate, cross-bar slender with a
thick median columella, palate with a small foramen; small, oval, with a
semicircular mandible, often abundant.
Etymology
Vallum (L.)—a palisade, referring to the enveloping peristome.
Remarks
This species is superficially similar to Osthimosia bicornis (Busk) from
which it differs in the position of the oral avicularia, which are proximolateral
in O. bicornis. Further, the ovicell of O. bicornis has the single central pore
characteristic of the genus; only a single partly immersed ovicell was found on
the material of T. valligera, but it was typical of Turbicellepora, being closely
punctured by small pores. The numerous small vicarious avicularia are also
seen in 7. pustulata (Busk), but this species is characterized by a single lateral
oral avicularium, and the absence of the columella on the cross-bar of the
spatulate avicularium.
Measurements (means of 20 values) in mm
Lor lor
0,15 Om
Celleporaria Lamouroux, 1821
Celleporaria Lamouroux, 1821: 43. Harmer, 1957: 663.
Celleporaria tridenticulata (Busk, 1881)
Fig. 19H
Cellepora tridenticulata Busk, 1881: 343, pl. 26 (fig. 9).
Celleporaria tridenticulata: Harmer, 1957: 670, pl. 42 (figs 510).
Material
Stations SM 162, SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 164.
Description
Colony encrusting, multilaminar, forming small nodules. Zooids oval,
convex, separated by distinct grooves; boundaries distinct in peripheral zooids,
later obscured. Primary orifice D-shaped, the straight proximal border with
three or four short conspicuous denticles, each of which may be bifid
126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
terminally. Peristome scarcely developed, forming at the most a low rim around
the distal and lateral borders of the orifice; three or four short distal oral spines
present. Adventitious avicularium median suboral, cystid frequently columnar;
mandible short, semi-elliptical, typically directed transversely. Vicarious avicu-
laria sparsely developed, mandible narrowly spatulate, or subtriangular. Ovicell
prominent, oval, overarching much of the primary orifice; thinly calcified, with
a wide triangular frontal orifice.
Remarks
Celleporaria tridenticulata has been widely reported in the Indo-West-
Pacific region, from the Great Barrier Reef and New Guinea to Ceylon and
Mauritius. This is the first record of its occurrence in South African waters.
Celleporaria capensis (O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1935)
Fig. 151-J
Holoporella capensis O’Donoghue & De Watteville, 1935: 203, pl. 5 (figs 9-10), pl. 6 (fig. 15).
Material
Stations SM 163, SM 163/164, SM 180, SM 185.
Description
Colony encrusting, developing multilaminar sheets and nodules. Zooids
oval, convex, thinly calcified; frontal calcification finely granular, translucent,
with a few inconspicuous marginal pores. Orifice large, subterminal, wider
than long, almost semicircular, proximal border slightly concave; two short
and thick, widely spaced, distal oral spines present in young zooids.
Peristome, when developed, forming simply a thin raised proximal lip,
occasionally overarching the orifice in older zooids; rarely, peaked medially to
form a short columnar umbo. Adventitious avicularia proximolateral to
orifice, mandible elongate, semi-elliptical, directed distally; one or two present
in newly budded zooids, later proliferating. Vicarious avicularia sporadically
developed, mandible elongate, semi-elliptical or slightly spatulate. No com-
plete ovicells found.
Remarks
C. capensis is known only from South Africa. Described originally from
Still Bay, southern Cape (O’Donoghue & De Watteville 1935), it was
subsequently reported from St. James and Oudekraal, south-western Cape
(O’Donoghue & De Watteville 1937), and from Port Elizabeth (O’Donoghue
& De Watteville 1944).
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 27
Family Vittaticellidae Harmer, 1957
Vittaticellidae Harmer, 1957: 765. Wass & Yoo, 1975: 286.
Vittaticella sp.
Fig. 11D
Material
Station SM 185.
Description
Zooids slender, clavate; small, less than 0,4 mm long, including proximal
node, daughter zooid of doubleton scarcely smaller than the mother zooid.
Primary orifice D-shaped, proximal border gently concave, a distinct lip
proximally. Frontal wall smooth, with scattered, minute, pores; vittae elongate,
narrow, extending from a point well proximal to the orifice, to close to the
proximal end of the zooid, each with a well-marked series of pores on each
side. Scapular chambers developed as prominent paired avicularia, with short
semicircular mandibles; usually symmetrical, except in daughter zooids in which
the inner, axial, avicularium is not developed. Suprascapular and infrascapular
chambers very small, closely united with avicularium and not conspicuous.
Ovicell not observed.
Remarks
The material was scanty, comprising part of a single small colony, and
insufficient for a more detailed morphological study. From its general features
this species seems to belong to the same group of species as the Indo-West-
Pacific V. tenella Harmer, V. venusta (MacGillivray), and V. praetenuis
(MacGillivray) (Harmer 1957: 776; Wass & Yoo 1975: 295), and could not be
readily identified with any species known from the South African region.
However, the vittaticellid fauna of the western Indian Ocean is poorly known.
Family Mamilloporidae Canu & Bassler, 1927
Mamilloporidae Canu & Bassler, 1927: 9. Harmer, 1957: 887.
Anoteropora Canu & Bassler, 1927
Anoteropora Canu & Bassler, 1927: 10. Harmer, 1957: 888.
Anoteropora latirostris Silén, 1947
Anoteropora latirostris Silén, 1947: 58, Pl. 5 (figs 25-27), figs 49-50. Hayward & Cook,
1979: 103.
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 185.
Description
Colony lunulitiform, large (up to 16 mm diameter), attached to sandy
sediments by numerous basal rhizoids with deep vertical walls; frontal shield
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
small, with an almost central orifice. Both autozooids and brooding zooids with
a large lateral avicularium, with curved, acute mandible.
Remarks
Eight complete colonies and fragments of several others were collected.
Two of the five colonies from station SM 185 were alive at the time of
collection and have intact basal rhizoids.
Distribution
Indo-West-Pacific.
ORDER CYCLOSTOMATA
Fragments of numerous species of Cyclostomata were present in the
bottom sediments of most of the stations reported upon here, and were
especially abundant in those from SM 163/164 and SM 129. Many of the
specimens were of dead and worn colonies, evidently transported, including
species of Hornera, Tubulipora, and ?Tervia. The free tubular parts of
peristomes and the brooding gonozooids are absent or damaged in most
specimens rendering identification difficult. Although at least 20 distinct colony
growth forms may be recognized, only 16 taxa have been identified, often
doubtfully, to genus or species level. More than 40 species of cyclostomata have
been reported from the South African region by Busk (1867, 1875, 1886),
O’Donoghue (1924), O’Donoghue & De Watteville (1935, 1944) and Brood
(1976b). Of these only 9 species have been found in the present Meiring Naude
collections, although 1 additional form, Crisia aff. holdsworthii, was listed by
Hayward & Cook (1979: 116). One notable absentee is Tennysonia stellata
Busk (1867: 242, pl. 36 (figs 10-11)), which was first reported from South
Africa, and has large, robust colonies. Another South African species, —
Disporella buski Harmer (1915: 161, pl. 12 (figs 4-5)), is known to have a wide
distribution but is also absent from the present collections.
Generally, nominal species, at least, have very wide distributions and
some species have been identified, both here and by Brood (1976b), with forms
reported from the Philippines by Canu & Bassler (1929), from Indonesia by
Harmer (1915), and from Australia by MacGillivray (1885). Examination of the
type suites of some species, for example those described by Busk (1875, 1886)
in the British Museum Catalogue and the Challenger Report respectively, has
revealed, however, a wide range of variation within populations of nominal
species. Some of these variants may even prove to be specifically distinct. It is
obvious that revision of the South African cyclostome fauna will require
detailed analysis of well-preserved, preferably living, colonies. Harmelin
(1976b) has demonstrated that within the Mediterranean Tubuliporina many
colony forms, and even zooid morphologies, are radically modified by
environmental influences, and that convergence of character states can occur
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES Wy)
Fig. 32. A. Idmidronea contorta (Busk). X 16. B. Mecynoecia clavaeformis (Busk). X 17.
C_-D. Idmidronea crassimargo (Canu & Bassler). C. Two fragments of a colony, including
a gonoecium. X 26,3. D. Detail to show ooeciostome. xX 62.
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
among systematically unrelated species. Until such a detailed study may be
made, it is pointless to attempt to revise specific and generic concepts, or to
assign very worn fragments to previously described species. In assigning the
present material to particular species it is not implied that the specimens have
been compared with type material, unless so stated; rather, it is considered that
the Meiring Naude fragments closely resemble the specimens illustrated by the
authors listed in the synonymies.
Family Diaperoeciidae Canu, 1918
Diaperoeciidae Canu, 1918: 329.
Diaperoecia Canu, 1918
Diaperoecia Canu, 1918: 329. Harmelin, 1976b: 78.
Diaperoecia sp.
Material
Station SM 163.
Remarks
A single colony, lacking gonozooids, was found encrusting a worn, erect
cheilostome bryozoan.
Family Entalophoridae Reuss, 1869
Entalophoridae Reuss, 1869: 285.
Mecynoecia Canu, 1918
Mecynoecia Canu, 1918: 326. Harmelin, 1976b: 160.
The characters of the genera Pustulopora and Mecynoecia have been
discussed by Brood (1976a, 1976b) and Harmelin (1976b).
Mecynoecia clavaeformis (Busk, 1875)
Fig. 32B
Pustulopora clavaeformis Busk, 1875: 22, pl. 14 (figs 1-4).
Material
Stations SM 131, SM 163/164.
Description
Colonies club-shaped, up to 20 mm high, arising from a small, encrusting
base. Zooids in irregular closely spaced whorls of three to six.
Remarks
Although somewhat worn, the fragments agree exactly with the material
from Algoa Bay (BMNH 1875.5.29.34, 1899.7.1.530) described by Busk (1875).
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 131
Busk’s specimens were also fragmentary and provide little information as to the
later growth form of the colony and the systematic relationships of the species.
Mecynoecia delicatula (Busk, 1875)
Pustulopora delicatula Busk, 1875: 21, pl. 6B (fig. 3). Brood, 1976b: 290, fig. 13E-F.
Mecynoecia delicatula: Harmelin, 1976b: 160, pl. 27 (figs 1-8).
Material
Stations SM 129, SM 163/164, SM 185.
Description
Colonies erect, occasionally branched, with long zooids opening irregu-
larly on all sides. Free peristomes long and curved. Gonozooids often at
bifurcations, simple.
Remarks
Most specimens were slightly worn, and lacked the long peristomes.
Brood (19766) noted that this species was common from 50 to 700 m in east
African waters.
Mecynoecia australis (Busk, 1852)
Pustulopora australis Busk, 1852: 350; 1875: 21, pl. 17A. Brood, 1976b: 291, fig. 13A.
Pustulopora proboscidea: Busk, 1886: 19, pl. 4 (fig. 2).
Material
Stations SM 129, SM 151, SM 163/164, SM 180, SM 185.
Description
Colonies similar to those of M. delicatula but with larger zooids and
coarser calcification.
Remarks
Brood (1976b) reported M. australis as rare in east African waters, with a
bathymetric range of 75 to 700 m.
Distribution
Indo-Pacific.
Family Diastoporidae Busk, 1859
Diastoporidae Busk, 1859: 91, 113. Harmelin, 1976b: 119.
Plagioecia Canu, 1918
Plagioecia Canu, 1918: 327. Harmelin, 1976b: 128.
Plagioecia patina (Lamarck, 1816)
Tubulipora patina Lamarck, 1816: 163.
Plagioecia patina: Harmelin, 1976b: 129, pl. 8 (figs 5-9), pl. 18 (figs 4-9), pl. 19 (figs 1-5).
132 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Station SM 163/164.
Description
Colonies forming flattened discs, often with an extended peripheral lamina
and small subcolonies. Early budding fan-shaped, later zooids in repent,
connate, single, radial rows. Gonozooids peripheral, transversely extended,
ooeciostomes central.
Remarks
Two colonies were found, one of which was alive when collected.
Distribution
Temperate Atlantic, Mediterranean, and eastern Pacific.
Liripora MacGillivray, 1887
Liripora MacGillivray, 1887: 182.
Desmeplagioecia Canu & Bassler, 1920: 718. Brood, 1976b: 284.
MacGillivray (1887) introduced Liripora for two Recent Australian
species, L. lineata (see below) and L. fasciculata, both of which had been
originally assigned to Diastopora in an earlier paper (MacGillivray 1885). L.
fasciculata, together with several fossil species included in the genus by
MacGillivray (1895), is probably generically distinct from L. lineata. However,
as the first species described in 1885 and the first listed in 1887, L. lineata may
be regarded as the type species of Liripora, and Canu & Bassler (1920) seem to
have introduced Desmeplagioecia, for D. lineata, unnecessarily. Canu
(1908: 310) used the name Liripora incorrectly for flabellate species of
Tubulipora.
Liripora is obviously closely related to Plagioecia, being distinguished
principally by its multiple radial rows of connate zooids. The genus is also very
similar to the fossil Actinopora d’Orbigny (see Brood 1976b: 284).
Liripora lineata (MacGillivray, 1885)
Diastopora lineata MacGillivray, 1885: 96, pl. 3.
Liripora lineata: MacGillivray, 1887: 182.
Berenicea lineata: Harmer, 1915: 116, pl. 11 (figs 6-7).
Desmeplagioecia lineata: Canu & Bassler, 1920: 718, fig. 234. Brood, 1976b: 284.
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 185.
Description
Colony encrusting, discoid, with a basal lamina; forming subcolonies by
frontal extension. Primary zooids repent, budding distally and laterally. Later
zooids radially disposed; peristomes connate, raised terminally, becoming
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 133
multizooidal. Areas between zooid rows calcified but not reticulate. Gono-
zooids peripheral and subperipheral, with distal ooeciostomes.
Remarks
Three young colonies, and a single group of four subcolonies were found;
all were alive when collected. One further colony, on the concave side of a
lamellibranch shell, had three gonozooids, and was dead. The subcolonies are
formed by frontal extension of one or more peripheral zooids of the mother
colony, which forms a new basal lamina. Some of the Australian colonies
examined (BMNH 1897.5.1.1377, 1963.2.12.19.) are more robust than those
from South Africa, but others are almost exactly the same in all characters.
A similar species, Diastopora reticulata, described from the Antarctic by
Borg (1944: 68, pl. 4 (figs 3-8)), has reticulate interzooidal areas and a tubular
ooeciostome.
Distribution
Indo-Pacific, including Japan and Australia.
Family Tubuliporidae Johnston, 1838
Tubuliporidae Johnston, 1838: 247. Harmelin, 1976b: 165.
Idmidronea Canu & Bassler, 1920
Idmidronea Canu & Bassler, 1920: 784. Harmelin, 1976b: 181. Buge, 1979: 232.
Harmelin (1976) discussed the character of Idmidronea and related
genera, and noted the difficulties in distinguishing species, due to environmen-
tally induced variation between populations of single species. Six different
kinds of colony belonging to Jdmidronea were distinguished in the Meiring
Naude collections. Although these have been identified with known species, it
should be noted that several of these were originally described from one or two
fragments only, which may have represented parts of a single, variable species.
Idmidronea contorta (Busk, 1875)
Fig. 32A
Idmonea contorta Busk, 1875: 12, pl. 8. O’Donoghue, 1924: 24.
Tennysonia contorta: Canu & Bassler, 1922: 52, pl. 11 (figs 11-14); as Lobosoecia semiclausa,
in error, on p. 145.
Material
Stations SM 129, SM 131, SM 163/164, SM 185.
Description
Branches short, inflated, curved; flat basally. Zooids connate, in
alternating groups of six. Gonozooids occurring at bifurcations.
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
The fragmentary specimens are closely similar to those from Algoa Bay
described by Busk (BMNH _ 1875.5.29.18). The gonozooid has not been
described before, but the specimens are worn and the ooeciostome is not
obvious. J. contorta was recorded by O’Donoghue (1924) from several South
African localities, from depths of 55-169 m. Harmelin (1976b) noted that
Mediterranean records of this species are referable to Tubulipora notomale
Busk (1875), which has much larger zooids.
Idmidronea crassimargo (Canu & Bassler, 1929)
Fig. 32C-D
Idmonea crassimargo Canu & Bassler, 1929: 545, pl. 85 (figs 2-3).
Idmidronea crassimargo: Brood, 1976b: 290, fig. SI-J, M.
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 185.
Description
Colonies with basal side of branches curved, zooids in alternating, connate
groups of three. Gonozooid short, inflated, frequently placed at a bifurcation;
ooeciostome small, rounded with a short tube, central or lateral.
Remarks
Originally described from the Philippine Islands, from 320 m, this species
was also recorded from several east African localities by Brood (1976b)
between 60-150 m. Several of the Meiring Naude specimens were alive when
collected; the gonozooids have not been figured before.
Idmidronea cf. parvula (Canu & Bassler, 1929)
Fig. 33A
Idmonea parvula Canu & Bassler, 1929: 546, pl. 85 (fig. 1).
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 185.
Description
Branches with flat basal side. Zooids in alternating connate groups of two
or three.
Remarks
Several fragments of this small species were found, two of which had
incomplete zigzag gonozooids. The zooids are distinctly smaller than those of J.
crassimargo, and larger than those of J. cf. biporata (below). The gonozooids
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 135
Fig. 33. A. Idmidronea c.f. parvula (Canu & Bassler). x24. B-D. Hornera erugata sp. nov.
B. Frontal view of a branch, including a gonoecium. X 26,7. C. Detail to show ooeciostome. x 50.
D. Basal view of colony and gonoecium. x 17,8.
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are not inflated like those of J. biporata, but it is possible that all of these small
forms, including J. cf. antarctica (below) are either very closely related
systematically, or represent ecologically varying populations of the same
species.
Idmidronea cf. biporata Brood, 1976
Idmidronea biporata Brood, 1976b: 290, fig. SF—-H.
Material
Stations SM 163/164, SM 185.
Description
Zooids very small, in alternating pairs, gonozooids inflated.
Remarks
Only three fragments were found. the zooids are minute, even smaller
than those figured by Brood (1976b).
Idmidronea cf. antarctica Borg, 1944
Idmidronea antarctica Borg, 1944: 84, pl. 6, (fig. 4), pl. 7 (figs 1-2).
Material
Stations SM 129, SM 131, SM 163/164.
Description
Branches flat basally; zooids in closely spaced, alternating, connate groups
of five. Gonozooids forming a zigzag ridge frontally.
Remarks
Only four minute fragments were found. The zooids are smaller than
those figured by Borg (1944), but the gonozooid closely resembles that of J.
antarctica, which also has five zooids in each group.
Idmidronea cf. atlantica (Forbes in Johnston, 1847)
Idmonea atlantica Forbes in Johnston, 1847: 278.
Idmidronea atlantica: Harmelin, 1976b: 182, pl. 32 (figs 1-11). Hayward & Cook, 1979: 116.
Buge, 1979: 232, pl. 7 (fig. 4).
Material
Stations SM 129, SM 163/164.
Remarks
Numerous worn fragments were found, none of which had complete
gonozooids. They are provisionally assigned to this widely distributed and very
variable species.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 37)
Family Crisiidae Johnston, 1847
Cristidae Johnston, 1847: 282.
Crisia Lamouroux, 1812
Crisia Lamouroux, 1812: 183. Ryland, 1967: 272.
Crisia elongata Milne Edwards, 1838
Crisia elongata Milne Edwards, 1838: 203, 235, pl. 7 (fig. 2). Busk, 1875: 5, pl. 4 (figs 5-6).
Harmer, 1915: 103, pl. 8 (figs 13-17). Brood, 1976b: 282, fig. 4F, J, N.
Material
Stations SM 123, SM 163/164.
Description
Colonies with elongated, almost straight internodes, consisting of ten to
twenty alternating zooids. Peristomes curved forward, short. Basis rami short,
wedged in between two zooids, branches usually occurring high in an
internode. Gonozooid dilated distally, ooeciostome slit-like, without a raised
rim. Joints black.
Remarks
The material comprised numerous well-developed living colonies with
extensive kenozooidal rooting systems. The joints are dark yellow early in
ontogeny, rapidly becoming black. No gonozooids were present. The colonies
are slightly less robust than Busk’s colonies from Algoa Bay (BMNH
1875.5.29.5), but are closely similar to Brood’s (1976b) figures of east African
material. C. elongata differs from C. transversata Brood (1976b: 282, fig. 4E,
G-I), which also has black joints, in having shorter zooids, longer and
straighter internodes, less prominent peristomes and a longer gonozooid. C.
holdsworthii Busk, which was reported from the earlier Meiring Naude
collections, has much longer, more delicate zooids, and relatively colourless
joints.
Distribution
Indo-Pacific, including Japan and Australia.
Family Lichenoporidae Smitt, 1866
Lichenoporidae Smitt, 1866: 404, 474.
Lichenopora Defrance, 1823
Lichenopora Defrance, 1823: 257.
Lichenopora novae-zealandiae (Busk, 1875)
Discoporella novae-zealandiae Busk, 1875: 32, pl. 30 (fig. 2).
Lichenopora novae-zealandiae: Harmer, 1915: 155, pl. 12 (figs 6-11). Brood, 1976b: 299,
fig. 17H-I.
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Material
Stations SM 131, SM 163/164, SM 184, SM 185.
Description
Colonies discoidal, raised centrally, with almost vertical sides. Zooids in
radial, connate rows, the ends of the peristomes not free. Gonozooids central,
surrounded by extrazooidal calcification; ooeciostomes large, rounded.
Remarks
Sixteen colonies were found, five of which were alive when collected. L.
novae-zealandiae differs from Disporella buski Harmer, originally described (as
D. ciliata Busk, 1875) from the Cape of Good Hope, in its regularly radial,
connate zooid series, which are not free terminally (see Brood 1976b: 299,
fig. 17D-G; Buge 1979: 242, pl. 9 (fig. 1)).
Distribution
Indo-Pacific, including Japan, Australia and New Zealand.
Family Crisinidae d’Orbigny, 1853
Crisinidae d’Orbigny, 1853: 902. Borg, 1941: 35.
Crisina d’Orbigny, 1850
Crisina d’Orbigny, 1850: 265; 1853: 912. Borg, 1941: 2.
Crisina radians (Lamarck, 1816)
Retepora radians Lamarck, 1816: 183.
Crisina watersi Borg, 1941: 16, pl. 2 (figs 3-4), pls 3-4.
Crisina radians: Brood, 1976b: 297, fig. 1SH-J.
Material
Station SM 131.
Description
Colonies profusely and regularly branched in one plane; basal surface of
branches flat, composed of kenozooids. Zooids in alternating connate groups of
three to four.
Remarks
Two bifurcating fragments were found, one of which bore a gonozooid.
Brood (1976b) considered that the east African material described as C. watersi
by Borg (1941) was within the range of variability displayed by C. radians.
Distribution
Crisina radians is widely distributed in the Indo-West-Pacific region, from
east Africa to Australasia, and also in New Zealand waters.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 139
Family Horneridae Smitt, 1866
Horneridae Smitt, 1866: 404, 465. Gregory, 1899: 360. Borg, 1926: 385.
Hornera Lamouroux, 1821
Hornera Lamouroux, 1821: 41. Harmer, 1915: 147. Borg, 1926: 204, 385.
Hornera erugata sp. nov.
Fig. 33B—D
Hornera sp. Cook, 1968: 238.
Material
Holotype: BMNH 1842.11.30.45, Cape of Good Hope.
Paratypes: SAM—A26456, as above, Cape of Good ves
Other material: station SM 163.
Description
Colony erect, branching; branches curved in more than one plane. Zooids
in laterally contiguous series of three to seven; peristomes long, often bifurcate
in lateral zooids. Secondary branches formed by fascicles of three to four
zooids. Basal extrazooidal calcification smooth, without obvious pores. Gono-
zooid basal, surface smooth; ooeciostome large, slit-like, lateral, closely
opposed to the side of the branch, without a raised rim.
Etymology
Erugatus (L.)—smooth, referring to the basal calcification.
Remarks
Of the numerous worn fragments of Hornera present in the Meiring
Naude bottom samples (p. 142), only three, relatively unworn, had the smooth
basal calcification of H. erugata. The basal calcification of other species of
Hornera is invariably corrugated, with large pores, pits and intervening ridges.
The lack of corrugations on the gonozooid of this species is also unusual, as is
the absence of a rim to the ooeciostome.
A somewhat similar species, which has ridged, porous basal calcification
and a reticulate gonozooid with a raised, lateral ooeciostome, was described
from the Antarctic as H. smitti by Borg (1944: 199, pl. 15 (figs 2-8)).
Pseudidmonea gracilis Androsova (1965: 80, fig. 18), another Antarctic species,
has a gonozooid somewhat like that of H. erugata, but a more delicate colony,
with alternating series of three to five connate zooids.
Measurements (range of 10 values) in mm
Lz Lg lg Loo.st.
0,40,5 2,5—3,0 2,0-2,5 0,4-0,55
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
DISCUSSION
General review of collection
The particular importance of the material described in the preceding
account derives from the fact that it was collected from a range of depths for
the most part far shallower than those from which the first series (1975-6) of
Meiring Naude samples was taken. The bryozoan collections from the first two
cruises originated from stations further to the north and east than those of
subsequent cruises, and could be characterized largely as typical continental
slope assemblages (Hayward & Cook 1979). The present collections are from a
number of stations established off-shore between Durban and East London, the
majority of which were located on the continental shelf of this region. Thus, 9
of the samples reported upon here were collected from depths of less than
200 m, 6 range between 500 m and 700 m, and only 3, 1 of which (SM 103)
represents a residue from the 1976 cruise, were obtained from depths in excess
of 700 m. The greatest depth sampled for bryozoans in the later survey was
station SM 151, at 900 m. By contrast, the greatest depth represented in the
first series of samples (Hayward & Cook 1979) was 1300 m, with the majority
of the material originating from between 600m and 1000m. It is not
surprising, then, that the bryozoan faunas revealed in each case should differ
markedly.
The first report described 51 species, 48 of which were cheilostomata; the
number of anascan species was only a little smaller than the number of
ascophora and included several which were considered to be particularly
adapted to life on the fine, unconsolidated sediments of the continental slope,
such as the small colonies of Setosellina, Heliodoma and Inversiscaphos. There
were also representatives of cellularine genera, for example Columnella,
Notoplites, and Bugulella, frequently associated with slope faunas. The
ascophora, similarly, included a number of highly specialized species in the
genera Anoteropora, Batopora and Lacrimula. The present collection offers an
immediate contrast in both the total number of taxa recorded, 130, and in the
increased proportion of ascophorans. There were almost twice as many
ascophorans (Table 2) as anascans (Table 1), and these were predominantly
encrusting forms, together with a significant proportion with erect, rigid
colonies, most notably the species of Adeonella. The anascans included a range
of encrusting species, and a number of cellularines, such as Menipea, typically
associated with shallow water faunas. A further difference is seen in the
substantial number (sixteen) of Cyclostomata identified in these samples; with
two exceptions (Table 3) live specimens of cyclostome species were recorded
only at stations with depths of less than 100 m.
Only twenty-two of the species described here had been reported in the
first Meiring Naude collections. For the most part these comprised species
which occurred only at stations deeper than 500 m (e.g. Tessaradoma spp.), or
which were represented in the first collections by specimens from the shallowest
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 141
stations only (e.g. Flustramorpha angusta, Reteporella dinotorhynchus), or
which appear to have very broad bathymetric distribution patterns (Setosellina
roulei). Thus, the two collections complement each other most usefully, and
together provide a representative survey of the shelf and slope faunas of
eastern South Africa. The results of the Meiring Naude cruises, together with
the accounts published in the century following the Challenger investigations,
provide a sound base line for future research on the bryozoan fauna of this
region.
Including the new species described here, more than 280 nominal forms of
Bryozoa have been reported from South Africa. Descriptions of these may be
found in Busk (1852, 1854, 1884), Marcus (1922), Harmer (1926, 1934, 1957),
the papers of O’Donoghue and O’Donoghue & De Watteville (q.v.), and a
very few other sources. A precise enumeration is not yet possible, largely
through outstanding problems of synonymy. Many South African forms were
originally assigned the names of European species and, while it has been
possible to review the systematic status of some of these, others will perhaps
never be recognized. O’Donoghue (1924), for example, noted that both
Cellaria fistulosa (Linnaeus) and ‘Lepralia’ foliacea (Ellis & Solander) had been
reported from South Africa, yet in view of the known geographical distribution
of these two species (Ryland & Hayward 1977; Hayward & Ryland 1979) this
seems improbable, and there is no way of ascertaining to which species these
names were applied. Despite such problems, some useful synonymizing has
been achieved by previous authors. Caberea boryi (Audouin), listed by Busk
(1852) from Algoa Bay, may now be recognized as C. darwinii Busk
(O’Donoghue 1924), and all records of Steginoporella magnilabris (Busk) may
be assigned to S. buskii Harmer (O’Donoghue 1957). Several names introduced
for South African bryozoans have proved to be junior synonyms of previously
described species; for example Bicellariella capensis O’Donoghue is B.
chuakensis Waters (O’Donoghue 1957), and Beania paucispinosa O’Donoghue
& De Watteville is B. vanhoffeni Kluge (O’ Donoghue 1957).
Research on the Meiring Naude samples has allowed some opportunity for
revision and reassessment of previously known species. For example, Hasen-
bank’s (1932) record of Beania erecta Waters is here redescribed as B. rediviva
sp. nov. However, although it is clear that much similar revisionary work
remains to be done, only 51 of the species described in this report have been
described before from South African waters; with the exception of B. rediviva,
the rest are either new species or newly reported for the region. For the slope
fauna (Hayward & Cook 1979) 44 out of a total of 51 species belonged to these
latter two categories. Thus, the bryozoan fauna of both the shelf and slope of
eastern South Africa has a far greater diversity than was hitherto suspected and
it is probable, from evidence discussed below, that its complete diversity is as
yet uncharted. The fauna now known has a taxonomic diversity comparable to
those of other, more widely studied, areas of continental shelf seas. For
example, Cook (1983b) has listed 222 species from the shelf waters of west
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Africa, and the cheilostome fauna of the British sea area (Ryland & Hayward
1977; Hayward & Ryland 1979) totals 186 species. The Meiring Naude
investigations revealed a very high proportion of formerly undescribed
cheilostomata which, together with the considerable numbers of apparently
rare species also collected, suggests that the eastern South African fauna
includes a substantial endemic element. It is likely that further surveys, with a
coverage as intense as that accomplished by Millard (1975, 1978) for the
hydroids, encompassing the whole of southern Africa will greatly enhance the
presently known diversity of bryozoan species.
Analysis of bottom deposits
Two immediate impressions are gained from initial examination of the
abundant sediment samples collected from a number of the Meiring Naude
stations. Firstly, there is an almost complete absence of the minute ‘sand fauna’
species discussed in the previous report (Hayward & Cook 1979); secondly, a
high proportion of the sediment at some stations consists of bryozoan skeletai
remains.
The reasons for the virtual absence of such genera as Batopora, Lacrimula
and Heliodoma, which were so abundant in the samples from stations
SM 16-SM 109 (see Hayward & Cook 1979) are not obvious, and do not
appear to be related directly to depth. These specialized forms were found in
the first series of samples from depths of 376 to 1300 m. Samples from similar
depths were included in the present collections, yet H. implicata was frequent
only in the residue of station SM 103, and none of the ascophoran genera, with
the exception of Anoteropora, were found. The range of sediment particle size
seemed essentially very similar in both series of samples, and although, as
stated above, the stations of the 1977-9 surveys were situated further south
than those of the 1975-6 cruises, other environmental parameters, such as
bottom temperature, appear to have the same range with depth in both
collections (Louw 1977, 1980).
An analysis of sediment types for ten stations for which samples were
available is given in Table 4. The data comprise the approximate proportions
of different constituents in a single sample for each station, graded in three
coarse size fractions. The number of bryozoan species identified is given for
each station including the number present as dead material only. There is
considerable variation in sediment size between stations; for example, for
SM 184 40 per cent of the sample was retained by the 5mm sieve, while
nothing passed the 1 mm sieve, whereas for SM 185 48 per cent of the sample
passed the 1 mm sieve and nothing was retained by the 5 mm sieve. Inspection
of the table reveals no apparent correlation between bryozoan diversity and
sediment size.
The proportion of biogenic sediments in each size fraction also varies
widely from station to station and again suggests no correlation with bryozoan
diversity. Shell fragments constituted from 10 to 50 per cent of each sample,
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 143
often in the two smaller size fractions; these were largely finely comminuted
molluscan shell, although remains of echinoderm test were frequent, and the
coarsest fragments often included a significant proportion of decapod shell. The
most interesting feature of this table is the significant contribution to the
sediment made by bryozoan skeletal remains at several stations, viz. SM 129,
SM 131, SM 151, SM 163/164, SM 179. At SM 179, in particular, bryozoan
remains comprised 50 per cent of the sample. Most of the fragments were of
erect genera, such as the cheilostome$ Flustramorpha, Adeonella and Sertella,
and the cyclostomes Mecynoecia, Idmidronea and Hornera. Three subsamples
from station SM 163/164, each of 1 cm? volume when dried, were studied in
greater detail; an average of 400 bryozoan fragments was found per sample, of
which 25 per cent were cyclostomata and 75 per cent cheilostomata. The total
sediment sample for this station was estimated to contain 18000 bryozoan
fragments; 56 species were recorded for this station, including 24 that were
represented by dead fragments only. The high species diversity and abundance
of bryozoans in this region is thus reflected in the constitution of the bottom
deposits; similar results were found by Wass et al. (1970) in a study of the
Southern Australian shelf and slope. However, Table 4 also emphasizes the
problems encountered in attempting to describe patterns of geographical and
bathymetric distribution, and the need to differentiate carefully between living
and dead, or attached and loose, specimens in benthic samples. A number of
the species described above were represented by dead material only, and their
real distribution remains unknown. The proportion of species represented by
dead specimens only increases with depth; the stations in Table 4 with a
high content of bryozoan remains in the sediment range in depth from 80 m
(SM 179) to 850m (SM 129). It is likely that each includes a different
proportion of transported material while none probably represents a true
thanatocoenosis. The proportion of very worn material varied from station to
station; for example, 30 per cent of the skeletal material from SM 163/164
was too abraded to be identified, and 70 per cent of that at SM 179 was
similarly unidentifiable. While some specimens could not even be readily
assigned to a family grouping, others could be recognized as species, or even
genera, which were not otherwise recorded in these collections, but which
could not be reliably characterized. For example, abraded internodes of a
species of Margaretta were frequent in several of the sediment samples. The
last three stations in Table 4 (SM 180, SM 184, SM 185) each had a high
diversity of bryozoan species, including a significant proportion of dead
material, yet bryozoan skeletal remains were negligible in, or absent from,
the sediments from these stations. In these three cases the living material
included several cellularine species and a substantial number of large erect
species (Adeonella, Gigantopora) encrusted with numerous other cheilos-
tomata. Although the removal of large dead fragments from these samples
prior to analysis undoubtedly biases the results, the lack of finer skeletal
remains and the predominance of erect branching species probably reflect
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
local hydrographic conditions which are not conducive to the accumulation
of bryozoan deposits.
Colonies of Dactylostega prima and Chaperia familiaris, particularly from
stations SM 162 and SM 180, were often frequent on the tests of large
specimens of the rhizopod foraminiferan Schizammina pinnata (Pearcey). This
foraminiferan is known only from the south-eastern coast of South Africa
(between 57 and 228m), where it is frequently, although sporadically,
abundant. The family Schizamminidae was introduced by Né@rvang (1961) for
TABLE 4
Analysis of sediment components (%) from ten Meiring Naude stations.
A=<1mm fraction; B=1-5 mm fraction; C=>5 mm fraction; T = terrigenous
material; S=shell; FS =foraminiferans with sand accreted tests; FC = foraminiferans
with calcareous tests; BR = bryozoan fragments.
Bryozoan spp.
Station Depth m r S FS FC BR Total Dead
SM 103 680 A 20 0 50 0 0 7 6
B 5 10 10 0 2
Cc 3 0 0 0 0
SM 123 690 A 10 0 0 10 0 2 0
B 0 10 0 20 0
C 10 10 10 20 0
SM 129 850 A DD 5 2 3 0 7 7
B 5 10 10 0 10
C 10 5 5 0 10
SM 131 780 A 10 20 1 1 5 22 21
B 0 25 1 0 25
Cc D 5 0 0 5
SM 151 900 A 0 5 5 0 ») 8 8
B 0 20 10 0 15)
C 0 10 10 0 20
SM 163/164 90 A 15 0 0 5 0 67 24
B 0 20 0 5 30
‘C 0 10 0 0 115)
SM 179 80 A 5 5 0 0 10 24 4
B 5 5 0 0 10
C 15 IS 0 0 30
SM 180 80 A 25 20 5 0 0 Di, Dh
B 20 20 5) 5 0
Cc 0 0 0 0 0
SM 184 86 A 0 0 0 0 0 23 12
B WS) 30 5 0 0
€ 15 20 5 0 0
SM 185 90 A 20 25 3 0 D 5 iS)
B 20 25 3 0 a,
C 0 0 0 0 0
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 145
two genera of large Foraminifera, Schizammina and Jullienella, some species of
which may grow to 70 mm in height or diameter, and which have dark or
reddish-brown, rigid tests composed of agglutinated sand grains. S. pinnata
(N¢rvang, 1961: 192, pl. 7 (figs 9-17)) is robust, elongated, and has regularly
alternating, short, sympodial branches, which form a zigzag pattern. Another
South African species, Jullienella pearceyi Ngrvang (1961: 198, pl. 9 (figs 1-11,
14)), is smaller, more inflated and almost polygonal in shape. In west African
waters the large fimbriated plates of J. foetida Schlumberger (N@rvang,
1961: 195, pl. 8 (figs 1-13)) form the major substratum in some areas for a
diverse fauna of bryozoan species (Cook 1968, 1983b). The mode of life of the
foraminiferans is not known, but they are frequently covered on both surfaces
by encrusting bryozoan colonies. Worn and fragmented specimens often form a
significant proportion of bottom sediments (Table 4).
Geographical distributions
In Table 5 known geographical ranges are given for seventy-three
previously described species. Fifty-one of these have been reported before from
South Africa. The twenty-two species here recorded for the first time include a
number which appear to have generally broad geographical distribution
patterns, such as Parasmittina tropica, Escharina pesanseris, Trypostega
venusta, Celleporaria tridenticulata and Crisina radians. Several others, such as
Cribrilaria innominata and Cleidochasma porcellanum, are known to be
complex variable entities in which apparently very broad distributions may be
simply artefacts of systematic uncertainty. However, at least half of these
twenty-two species are characterized by less broad distributions suggestive of
more interesting patterns. Hippoporidra senegambiensis has an otherwise rather
limited distribution on the west African shelf; Cupuladria multispinata,
Setosellina roulei, Heliodoma implicata, and perhaps Cribrilaria venusta (p. 43)
appear to show similarly narrow distributions, but in total these species
constitute a minority in the eastern South African fauna. Caberea darwinii and
Brodiella longispinata seem to be more widely distributed, cold-temperate
Southern Hemisphere species, probably at the extreme northern limit of their
range in South African waters. This pattern is seen in another species,
Amphiblestrum inermis, long known from South Africa. However, the
arrangement of Table 5 emphasizes the accepted faunal similarity of eastern
South Africa with the Indo-West-Pacific realm and, like the previously reported
species, these new records are predominantly of species with distributions
extending through part or whole of this realm. Escharina waiparaensis,
formerly known only from New Zealand, and Hippomenella avicularis,
described from a few stations in the western Pacific, represent particularly
significant range extensions; the distribution of Hippoporella spinigera is
established through the inclusion in its synonymy of Mucronella serratilabris
O’Donoghue (1924). Crassimarginatella marginalis seems to have a narrow
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 5
Geographical distributions of previously described species.
Malay
Atlantic West South East Indian Archi- West East New Sub- Antarctic
Africa Africa Africa Ocean pelago Pacific Pacific Zealand antarctic
Carbasea mediocris
Cupuladria multispinata x
Discoporella umbellata x
Setosellina roulei x
Heliodoma implicata x
Amphiblestrum inermis
Crassimarginatella marginalis x
Foveolaria imbricata
Chaperia multifida ?
Chaperia capensis
Chaperia stephensoni
Notocoryne cervicornis
Steginoporella buskii x x
Cellaria tectiformis
Cellaria punctata
Cellaria paradoxa
Caberea darwinii x x x x
Eupaxia quadrata
Menipea crispa
Menipea triseriata
Menipea ornata
Menipea marionensis
Bugulella australis
Beania magellanica x x
Bugula dentata x
Cribrilaria innominata x
Cribrilaria venusta x x
Figularia philomela
Escharoides contorta x
Pachycleithonia mutabilis x x x
Tropidozoum burrowsi x x
Parasmittina tropica x x x x x
Porella capensis x
Arthropoma cecilii x x x x x x x
Arthropoma circinatum x
Escharina pesanseris x x x x x x
Escharina waiparaensis x
Calyptotheca nivea x
Calyptotheca porelliformis x
Stomachetosella balani x
Cleidochasma porcellanum xX x x x x x
Cleidochasma protrusum x x x x x
Cleidochasma cribritheca x
Hippoporidra senegambiensis x
Hippoporella spinigera x x x
Hippomenella avicularis x
Flustramorpha flabellaris
Flustramorpha marginata
Flustramorpha angusta
Trypostega venusta x x x x x x x x
Gigantopora polymorpha
Adeonella majuscula
Adeonella cracens
Tessaradoma bispiramina
Tessaradoma circella
Sertella lata
Schizoretepora tessellata
Reteporella dinotorhynchus
Brodiella longispinata x x |
Turbicellepora conica
Celleporaria tridenticulata x x x x x
Celleporaria capensis
Anoteropora latirostris
Mecynoecia clavaeformis x
Mecynoecia delicatula x
Mecynoecia australis x
Plagioecia patina x x x
Liripora lineata x x
Idmidronea contorta x
Idmidronea crassimargo x
Crisia elongata x x
Lichenopora novae-zealandiae x x x
Crisina radians x
x
x eS % HK OS OK OK OK XK oS OS OK OK OK OK
x
xX xX KK KK XK XK
x
x X XK X
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x X &
x
xX XX XK X XK XK X
x
x X
x
x
x
x
xX X X X
x
x
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 147
distribution within the Indian Ocean and is of interest in being, apparently, the
first Mauritian species to be reported from South Africa.
A notable feature of this essentially shallow shelf fauna is that of the
fifty-one species reported before from this region, twenty-nine have not been
recorded from anywhere else. If at least a similar proportion of the forty-four
new species described prove to be limited to eastern South Africa, then the
endemic component of this fauna will be considerable. Millard (1978) showed
that the endemic component of the South African hydroid fauna achieves its
highest levels in the region between Cape Agulhas and Durban, and that while
the eastern and southern regions of the South African shelf have a hydroid
fauna with a substantial proportion of Indo-West-Pacific species, the character
of the southern fauna, centred on Agulhas Bank seems sufficiently distinctive to
confirm Briggs’s (1974) contention that a separate faunal province may be
recognized in this region. Bryozoan species diversity is frequently related to the
availability of substratum and might be expected to be high on the Agulhas
Bank. The most southerly of the stations represented in the present collections
(SM 184, SM 185) were located at the northern extremity of the Bank; by
analogy with Millard’s (1978) results it seems probable that the South African
bryozoan fauna may prove to be even richer than the present report suggests,
and even more distinctive than the hydroid fauna.
The most exciting aspect of the geographical distribution patterns of the
South African bryozoan fauna is the increasing evidence of strong similarities
with eastern Australian and northern New Zealand faunas, and indications that
this link may be of considerable antiquity. Three examples are given in Table 4:
Bugulella australis and Schizoretepora tessellata have been reported elsewhere
only from South Australia; Escharina waiparaensis was originally described
from Miocene (Brown 1952) and Pliocene (Brown 1954) deposits of New
Zealand, and subsequently live specimens were reported (Powell 1967) from
Three Kings Islands, northern New Zealand. The occurrence of this species in
South African waters is thus of the greatest interest. The new species described
here also include several with equally extraordinary time-space distributions.
For example, Dimorphocella moderna appears to be the only Recent
representative of a genus well known from Australian Tertiary deposits. The
large live colony was collected from the same station that produced the
abundant, also live, material of Aspidostoma livida. Few Recent species of
Aspidostoma are known, and most of these are small encrusting forms with a
habit quite unlike the massive foliose colonies of A. livida. However,
Aspidostoma also seems to be an ancient genus; Brown (1952) described a
number of species with erect colony forms from New Zealand Tertiary
deposits, and other fossil species are known from Australia (Maplestone 1902,
1911). Macropora is another interesting case; the genus is widespread through
the Tertiary deposits of Australia and New Zealand, and one species with a
long fossil history survives today in New Zealand and has also been reported
from the Philippines. Few nominal Recent forms have been described; these
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
require re-examination and it is possible that M. africana may be only the
second Recent form of this ancient genus.
A number of authors have published valuable integrated studies of
Tertiary to Recent bryozoan faunas (for example, Lagaaij & Cook 1973; Cook
& Lagaaij 1976; David & Pouyet 1978) that demonstrate the importance of
such research to bryozoan phylogeny and the contribution it may make to the
broader field of marine zoogeography. Bryozoans are particularly useful
subjects for zoogeographical research; with very short larval lifespans, and
consequent poor dispersal ability, with high species diversity in most shelf seas,
and in many Tertiary deposits, and with perhaps rapid rates of phylogenetic
change through time, they offer great potential for detailed analysis. As Lagaaij
& Cook (1973) reiterate, wide distributions observed in Recent seas are the
legacy of past expansions and contractions. The evident richness of the eastern
South African fauna and its apparently high level of endemism, the numerous
systematic affinities with the fauna of the south-west Pacific (see, for example,
p. 47), and the number of ancient genera and species found in the present
collections demand further investigation. Whether these features of the South
African fauna reflect relict elements, or are truly autochthonous, can only be
decided by further study of Recent populations, in comparison with Tertiary
fossil deposits and Quaternary sediments.
SUMMARY
A total of 130 species of Bryozoa have been identified from samples
collected by the R.V. Meiring Naude between 1977 and 1979. The sampling
stations ranged in depth from 80 m to 900 m, with the majority in depths of less
than 100 m. Bryozoan diversity was highest in the samples from the shallowest
stations; 44 new species are described, including a high proportion of encrusting
cheilostomata. The fauna described is considered to be representative of a
typical shallow shelf-sea assemblage, in marked contrast to the deeper slope
fauna reported upon in the first publication on the Meiring Naude Bryozoa
(Hayward & Cook 1979). Together with the earlier contributions on the South
African Bryozoa, referred to in the text, these two reports now provide a sound
introduction to the bryozoan fauna of this region. Although some taxonomic
problems remain and the question of broader systematic relationships is further
complicated in some cases by these results, the particular character of the
eastern South African fauna is more clearly defined and shown to include a
substantial and distinctive endemic element. Further surveys on the Agulhas
Bank may be expected to yield results that will further enhance this
distinctiveness. Bryozoan skeletal remains were important components of
biogenic carbonate sands in some of the areas sampled, and the presence of
abraded fragments of unrecognized species in these sands shows that the
taxonomic diversity of this fauna is still to be fully recorded.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 149
The discovery of species and genera with extensive time-space distribu-
tions, and in particular the apparent faunal similarity between this region and
Tertiary fossil deposits of Australia and New Zealand, suggest interesting and
fruitful possibilities for further research.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are grateful to Dr N. A. H. Millard and Dr P. A. Hulley (South
African Museum) for the opportunity to work on the Meiring Naude
collections, and to Mr P. J. Chimonides (British Museum, Natural History) for
the Scanning Electron Microscopy. We should also like to thank Drs K. Brood
(Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet, Stockholm) and D. P. Gordon (New Zealand
Oceanographic Institute, Wellington) for their helpful comments and criticisms.
REFERENCES
Anprosova, E. I. 1965. Bryozoans of the orders Cyclostomata and Ctenostomata of the
northern part of the sea of Japan. Issled. Fauna Mar. 3 (11): 72-114.
AupouIN, V. 1826. Explication sommaire des Planches de Polypes de Egypte et de la Syrie.
Description de l Egypte, histoire Naturelle 1: 225-244.
BassLerR, R. S. 1935. Fossilium catalogus 1: Animalia: Part 67, Bryozoa: 1-229.
’s-Gravenhage: Junk.
BASSLER, R. S. 1953. Bryozoa. In: Moore, R. C. ed. Treatise on invertebrate paleontology,
Part G: 1-253. New York: Geological Society of America.
Bore, F. 1926. Studies on Recent cyclostomatous Bryozoa. Zool. Bidr. Upps. 10: 181-507.
Borc, F. 1941. On the structure and relationships of Crisina (Bryozoa, Stenolaemata). Ark.
Zool. 33A (11): 1-44.
Bore, F. 1944. The stenolaematous Bryozoa. Further zool. Results Swed. Antarct. Exped.
1901-1903 3 (5): 1-276.
Briccs, J. C. 1974. Marine zoogeography. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Broop, K. 1976a. Note on the bryozoan Pustulopora (Diaperoecia) intricaria Busk 1875.
Zoologica Scr. 5: 231-233.
Broop, K. 1976b. Cyclostomatous Bryozoa from the coastal waters of east Africa. Zoologica
Ser. 5: 277-300.
Brown, D. A. 1949. On the Polyzoan Genus Hippomenella Canu & Bassler and its Genotype
Lepralia mucronelliformis Waters. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 41: 513-520.
Brown, D. A. 1952. The Tertiary cheilostomatous Polyzoa of New Zealand. London: British
Museum (Natural History).
Brown, D. A. 1954. Polyzoa from a submerged limestone off the Three Kings Islands, New
Zealand. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (12) 7: 415-437.
Brown, D. A. 1958. Fossil cheilostomatous Polyzoa from south-west Victoria. Mem. geol.
Surv. Vict. 20: 1-90.
Buce, E. 1979. Campagne de la Calypso au large des cétes Atlantique de l’Amerique de Sud
(1961-1962), 1, 34 Bryozoaires cyclostomes. Annls Inst. oceanogr. 55 (Suppl.): 207-252.
Busx, G. 1852. Catalogue of marine Polyzoa in the collection of the British Museum, I.
Cheilostomata (part). London: Trustees of the British Museum.
Busk, G. 1854. Catalogue of marine Polyzoa in the collection of the British Museum, U.
Cheilostomata (part). London: Trustees of the British Museum.
Busx, G. 1859. A monograph of the fossil Polyzoa of the Crag. Palaeontogr. Soc. (Monogr.)
1859: v—xiii, 1-136. London: Adlard.
Busk, G. 1860. Zoophytology. Catalogue of the Polyzoa collected at Madeira. Q. JI microsc.
Sci. 8: 280-285.
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Busk, G. 1867. Zoophytology. Q. JI microsc. Sci. (n.s.) 7: 241-243.
Busk, G. 1875. Catalogue of the marine Polyzoa in the collection of the British Museum. III.
Cyclostomata. London: Trustees of the British Museum.
Busk, G. 1879. Polyzoa. Zoological collections made in Kerguelen’s land . . . Phil. Trans. R.
Soc. 168: 193-199.
Busk, G. 1881. Descriptive Catalogue of the species of Cellepora collected on the Challenger
Expedition. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 15: 341-356.
Busk, G. 1884. Report on the Polyzoa. Part 1. The Cheilostomata. Rep. scient. Results Voy.
Challenger. Zool. 10 (30): i-xxiii, 1-216.
Busk, G. 1886. Report on the Polyzoa. Part 2. The Cyclostomata, Ctenostomata and
Pedicellinea. Rep. scient. Results. Voy. Challenger (Zool.) 17 (50): i—viti, 1-47.
CaLveT, L. 1906. Note préliminaire sur les Bryozoaires recueillis par les expéditions du
‘Travailleur’ (1881-1882) et du ‘Talisman’ (1883). Bull. Mus. natn. Hist. nat., Paris 12 (3):
154-166.
CaLvET, L. 1907. Bryozoaires. Expéd. Sci. ‘Travailleur et ‘Talisman’ 1880-1883. 8: 355-495.
Canu, F. 1900. Révision des Bryozoaires du Crétacé figurés par d’Orbigny. Cheilostomata.
Bull. Soc. géol. Fr. (3) 28: 334-463.
Canu, F. 1908. Iconographie des Bryozoaires fossiles de ’ Argentine. An. Mus. nac. B. Aires
17: 245-341.
Canu, F. 1917. Danmark Ekspeditionen til Groenlands nordostkyst 1906-1908, Bryozoa, par
G. R. Levinsen. Revue crit. Paléozool. 21 (1): 35-37. ;
Canu, F. 1918. Les ovicelles des Bryozoaires cyclostomes. Etude sur quelques familles
nouvelles et anciennes. Bull. Soc. géol. Fr. (sér. 4) 16: 324-335.
CaNnu, F. & BASSLER, R. S. 1917. A synopsis of American Early Tertiary cheilostome Bryozoa.
Bull. U. S. natn. Mus. 96: 1-87.
Canu, F. & BAssLER, R. S. 1919. Fossil Bryozoa from the West Indies. Publs Carneg. Instn
291: 75-102.
Canu, F. & BAssLeER, R. S. 1920. North American early Tertiary Bryozoa. Bull. U. S. natn.
Mus. 106: 1-879 (2 vols).
Canu, F. & BASSLER, R. S. 1922. Studies on the cyclostomatous Bryozoa. Proc. U. S. natn.
Mus. 61 (22): 1-160.
Canu, F. & BAssLerR, R. S. 1923. North American later Tertiary and Quaternary Bryozoa.
Bull. U. S. natn. Mus. 125: 1-302.
CaNnu, F. & BaAssLer, R. S. 1925. Les Bryozoaires du Maroc et de. Mauritanie (ler. mémoire).
Mem. Soc. Sc. nat. Maroc. 10: 1-79.
CaNu, F. & Basster, R. S. 1927. Classification of the cheilostomatous Bryozoa. Proc. U. S.
natn. Mus. 69 (14): 1-42.
CaNu, F. & BAssLer, R. S. 1929. Bryozoa of the Philippine Region. Bull. U. S. natn. Mus. 9
(100): ii—xi, 1-685.
Canu, F. & BassLer, R. S. 1930. The Bryozoan fauna of the Galapagos Islands. Proc. U. S.
natn. Mus. 76 (13): 1-78.
Carter, H. J. 1882. Remarkable forms of Cellepora and Palythoa from the Senegambian
coast. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (5) 9: 416-419.
CuHEETHAM, A. H. 1966. Cheilostomatous Polyzoa from the Upper Bracklesham beds (Eocene)
of Sussex. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 13: 1-115.
CHEETHAM, A. H. & SANDBERG, P. A. 1964. Quaternary Bryozoa from Louisiana mudlumps.
J. Paleont. 38 (6): 1013-1046.
Cook, P. L. 1964a. Polyzoa from west Africa. 1. Notes on the Steganoporellidae, Thalamo-
porellidae and Onychocellidae (Anasca, Coilostega). Annls Inst. océanogr. (Calypso 6) 41:
43-78.
Cook, P. L. 1964b. Polyzoa from west Africa. Notes on the genera Hippoporina Neviani,
Hippoporella Canu, Cleidochasma Harmer and Hippoporidra Canu & Bassler. Bull. Br.
Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 12 (1): 1-35.
Cook, P. L. 1965a. Notes on the Cupuladriidae (Polyzoa, Anasca). Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist.
(Zool.) 13 (5): 151-187.
Cook, P. L. 1965b. Polyzoa from west Africa. The Cupuladriidae (Cheilostomata, Anasca).
Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 13 (6): 189-227.
Cook, P. L. 1967. Polyzoa (Bryozoa) from west Africa. The Pseudostega, the Cribrimorpha
and some Ascophora Imperfecta. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist (Zool.) 15 (7): 321-351.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 151
Cook, P. L. 1968. Bryozoa (Polyzoa) from the coasts of tropical west Africa. Atlantide Rep. 10:
115-262.
Cook, P. L. 1973. Preliminary notes on the ontogeny of the frontal body wall in the Adeonidae
and Adeonellidae (Bryozoa, Cheilostomata). Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 25 (6):
243-263.
Cook, P. L. 1975. The genus Tropidozoum Harmer. Docum. Lab. Géol. Fac. Sci. Lyon
(H.S.) 3 (1): 161-168.
Cook, P. L. 1979. Some problems in interpretation of heteromorphy and colony integration in
Bryozoa. In: Larwoop, G. P. & Rosen, B. R. eds. Biology and systematics of colonial
organisms: 193-210. Systematics Association special volume 11. London & New York:
Academic Press.
Cook, P. L. 1983a. Notes on some African Adeonellidae (Bryozoa, Cheilostomata). J. nat.
Hist. (in press).
Cook, P. L. 19836. Bryozoa from Ghana—a preliminary survey. Annis Mus. r. Afr. cent. (in
press).
Cook, P. L. & Cuximonipes, P. J. 1981a. Morphology and systematics of some rooted
cheilostome Bryozoa. J. nat. Hist. 15: 97-134.
Cook, P. L. & Cuimoniwes, P. J. 19816. Morphology and systematics of some interior-walled
cheilostome Bryozoa. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 41 (2): 53-89.
Cook, P. L. & LaGaay, R. 1976. Some Tertiary and Recent Conescharelliniform Bryozoa.
Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 29 (6): 317-376.
Coucn, R. Q. 1844. A Cornish Fauna, Part III. The Zoophytes and calcareous corallines.
Truro: The Royal Institution of Cornwall.
Davip, L. & Pouyet, S. 1978. Le genre Herentia Gray, 1848 (Bryozoa, Cheilostomata).
Systématique et phylogenése, biostratigraphie et biogéographie. Docum. Lab. Géol. Fac.
Sci. Lyon (H.S.) 4: 167-193
Day, J. H., Fietp, J. C. & PENnritH, M. J. 1970. The benthic fauna and fishes of False Bay,
South Africa. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 39: 1-108.
DEFRANCE, J. L. M. 1823. Dictionnaire des sciences naturelle 27. Paris.
Dumont, J. P. C. 1981. A report on the cheilostome Bryozoa of the Sudanese Red Sea. J. nat.
Hist. 15 (4): 623-637.
Duvercier, J. 1924. Deuxiéme note sur les Bryozoaires du Néogéne de l’Aquitaine. Act. Soc.
Linn. Bordeaux 75: 145-190.
Eis, J. & SoLANDER, D. 1786. The natural history of many curious and uncommon
zoophytes. London: Benjamin White & Son.
GauTIER, Y. V. 1962. Recherches écologiques sur les Bryozoaires chilostomes en
Méditerranée occidentale. Recl Trav. Stn. mar. Endoume 38: 1-434.
Gorpon, D. P. 1982. The genera of the Chaperiidae. N. Z. JI Zool. 9: 1-24.
Gray, J. E. 1848. List of the specimens of British animals in the collection of the British
Museum. Part 1. Centroniae & radiated animals. London: Trustees of the British Museum.
Gray, J. E. 1872. On Flustra marginata of Krauss and an allied species, forming a new genus
(Flustramorpha) . . . Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (4) 10: 167-169.
Grecory, J. W. 1893. On the British Palaeogene Bryozoa. Trans. zool. Soc. Lond. 13:
219-279.
Grecory, J. W. 1899. Catalogue of the fossil Bryozoain the Department of Geology, British Museum
(Natural History). The Cretaceous Bryozoa 1. London: Trustees of the British Museum.
HARMELIN, J. G. 1970. Les Cribrilaria (Bryozoaires Chilostomes) de Méditerranée;
systematique et écologie. Cahiers Biol. mar. 11: 77-98.
HARMELIN, J. G. 1976a. Sur quelques Cribrimorphes (Bryozoa, Cheilostomata) de |’ Atlantique
Oriental. Tethys 8 (2): 173-192.
HARMELIN, J. G. 1976b. Le sous-ordre des Tubuliporina (Bryozoaires Cyclostomes) en
Méditerranée, écologie et systematique. Mém. Inst. océanogr. Monaco 10: 1-326.
Harmer, S. F. 1900. A revision of the genus Steganoporella. Q. Jl microsc. Sci. 43: 225-297.
Harmer, S. F. 1915. The Polyzoa of the Siboga Expedition. Part 1. Entoprocta, Ctenostomata,
Cyclostomata. Siboga Exped. 28a: 1-180.
Harmer, S. F. 1923. On Cellularine and other Polyzoa. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 35: 293-361.
Harmer, S. F. 1926. The Polyzoa of the Siboga Expedition. Part 2. Cheilostomata, Anasca.
Siboga Exped. 28b: 181-501.
Harmer, S. F. 1933. The Genera of Reteporidae. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1933: 615-627.
152 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Harmer, S. F. 1934. The Polyzoa of the Siboga Expedition. Part 3. Cheilostomata, Ascophora
1, Family Reteporidae. Siboga Exped. 28c¢: 502-640.
Harmer, S. F. 1957. The Polyzoa of the Siboga Expedition. Part 4. Cheilostomata, Ascophora.
.. . Siboga Exped. 28d: 641-1147.
HASENBANK, W. 1932. Bryozoen der Deutschen Tiefsee Expedition. Dt. Tief. Exped. 21 (2):
319-380.
Hastincs, A. B. 1943. Polyzoa (Bryozoa) 1. Scrupocellariidae, Epistomiidae, Farciminariidae,
Bicellariellidae, Aeteidae, Scrupariidae. Discovery Rep. 22: 301-510.
Hastincs, A. B. 1945. Notes on Polyzoa (Bryozoa). Il. Membranipora crassimarginata auctt.,
with remarks on some genera. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (11) 12: 70-103.
Hayami, T. 1975. Neogene Bryozoa from Northern Japan. Sci. Rep. Tohoku Univ. (ser. 2)
(Geol.) 45 (2): 83-126.
Haywarp, P. J. 1974. Studies on the cheilostome bryozoan fauna of the Aegean island of
Chios. J. nat. Hist. 8: 369-402.
Haywarp, P. J. 1980. Cheilostomata (Bryozoa) from the South Atlantic. J. nat. Hist. 14:
701-722.
Haywarp, P. J. 1981. The Cheilostomata (Bryozoa) of the deep sea. Galathea Rep. 15: 21-68.
Haywarp, P. J. & Cook P. L. 1979. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude cruises. Part
9. Bryozoa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 79 (4): 43-130.
HaywarbD, P. J. & RYLAND, J. S. 1979. British Ascophoran Bryozoans. Synopses of the British
Fauna (n.s.) 14. London: Academic Press, for the Linnean Society.
Hincxs, T. 1877. On British Polyzoa. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (4) 20: 212-218, 520-532.
Hincks, T. 1878. Notes on the genus Retepora, with descriptions of new species. Ann. Mag.
nat. Hist (5) 1: 353-365.
Hincks, T. 1879. On the Classification of the British Polyzoa. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (5) 3:
153-164.
Hincxks, T. 1880. A history of the British marine Polyzoa. 2 vols. London: Van Voorst.
Hincks, T. 1881. Contributions towards a general history of the marine Polyzoa, IV. Foreign
Membraniporina. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (5) 7: 147-161.
Hincxks, T. 1884. Contributions towards a general history of the marine Polyzoa, XII. Polyzoa
from India (coast of Burmah). Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (5) 13: 356-369.
Hincxs, T. 1895. Index [to ‘Marine Polyzoa: contributions towards a general history’] pp. I-VI.
Issued privately.
JOHNSTON, G. 1838. A history of British zoophytes. Edinburgh, London & Dublin.
JOHNSTON, G. 1840. Miscellanea Zoologica. Description of a new genus of British zoophyte.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. 5: 272-274.
JOHNSTON, G. 1847. A history of British zoophytes, 2nd ed. 2 vols. London: Van Voorst.
JULLIEN, J. 1881. Remarques sur quelques espéces de Bryozoaires cheilostomiens. Bull. Soc.
zool. Fr. 6: 163-168.
JULLIEN, J. 1883. Dragages du ‘“Travailleur’, Bryozoaires. Espéces draguées dans l’Océan
Atlantique en 1881. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 7: 497-529.
JULLIEN, J. 1886. Les Costulidées, nouvelle famille de Bryozoaires. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 11:
601-620.
JULLIEN, J. 1888. Bryozoaires. Mission scient. Cap Horn 1882-1883 6 (1): 1-92.
JULLIEN, J. & Catvet, L. 1903. Bryozoaires provenant des campagnes de lHirondelle
(1886-1888). Résult. Camp. scient. Prince Albert I 23: 1-188.
KIRKPATRICK, R. 1888. Polyzoa of Mauritius. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (6) 1: 72-85.
KiuGce, G. A. 1914. Die Bryozoen der Deutschen Stidpolar-Expedition 1901-1903, I. Dt.
Stidpol.-Exped. 15 Zoologie 7: 601-678.
Krauss, C. F. F. 1837. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Corallineen und Zoophyten der Stidsee nebst
Abbildungen der neuen Arten. Stuttgart.
LAGAAI, R. 1952. The Pliocene Bryozoa of the Low Countries. Meded. geol. Sticht. (C) 5 (5):
1-233.
LAGAAI, R. & Cook, P. L. 1973. Some Tertiary to Recent Bryozoa. In: Hatiam, A. ed. Atlas
of Palaeobiogeography. Amsterdam, London & New York: Elsevier.
LAMARCK, J. B. P. A. DE 1801. Systéme des animaux sans vertébres . . . Les Polypes: 357-386.
Paris.
LAMARCK, J. B. P. A. DE 1816. Histoire naturelle des animaux sans vertébres 2: 1-568. Paris.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 5S)
Lamouroux, J. V. F. 1812. Extrait d’un mémoire sur la classification des Polypiers coralligénes
non entiérement pierreux. Nouv. Bull. Scient. Soc. Phil. 3: 181-188.
LamouRoux, J. V. F. 1816. Histoire des polypiers coralligénes flexibles, vulgairement nommés
zoophytes. Caen: Poisson.
Lamouroux, J. V. F. 1821. Exposition méthodique des genres de lordre des polypiers. Paris:
Agasse.
Lamourovux, J. V. F. 1825. In: Quoy, J. R. C. & Gammarp, J. P. Zoologie du Voyage . . . sur
. .. ?Uranie et la Physicienne . . . 1817-1820. Paris.
LEVINSEN, G. M. R. 1902. Studies on Bryozoa. Vidensk. Meddr dansk naturh. Foren. 1902:
1-32.
LEVINSEN, G. M. R. 1909. Morphological and systematic studies on the cheilostomatous
Bryozoa. Copenhagen: Nationale Forfatterers Forlag.
LIVINGSTONE, A. A. 1926. Studies on Australian Bryozoa, III Rec. Aust. Mus. 15: 79-99.
Louw, E. 1977. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 1. Station data
1975, 1976. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 147-159.
Louw, E. 1980. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 10. Station data
1977, 1978, 1979. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 187-205.
MacGit.ivray, P. H. 1869. Descriptions of some new genera and species of Australian
Polyzoa; to which is added a list of species found in Victoria. Trans.. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 9:
126-148.
MacGI.ivray, P. H. 1885. Descriptions of new, or little-known, Polyzoa, Part 7. Trans. Proc.
R. Soc. Vict. 21: 92-99.
MacGILLivray, P. H. 1887. Descriptions of new, or little-known, Polyzoa, Part 12. Trans.
Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 23: 179-186.
MacGI.ivreay, P. H. 1891. Descriptions of new, or little-known, Polyzoa, Part 14. Proc. R.
Soc. Vict. (n.s.) 3: 77-83.
MacGIiivray, P. H. 1895. A monograph of the Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria. Trans. R. Soc.
Vict. (n.s.) 4: 1-166.
MAap_esTon_E, C. M. 1902. Further descriptions of the Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria, 7. Proc. R.
Soc. Vict. (n.s.) 14 (2): 65-74.
MapPLEsTON_E, C. M. 1903. Further descriptions of the Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria, 9. Proc. R.
Soc. Vict. (n.s.) 16 (1): 140-147.
Map .estone, C. M. 1911. Further descriptions of the Tertiary Polyzoa of Victoria, 11. Proc.
R. Soc. Vict. (n.s.) 23 (2): 266-284.
MaptesTonE, C. M. 1913. New or little-known Polyzoa. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. (n.s.) 25 (2):
357-362.
Marcus, E. 1922. Stidafrikanische Bryozoen aus der Sammlung des Gothenburger Museums.
. . . Géteborgs K. Vetensk.-o. vitterhSamh. Handl. 25 (3): 1-45.
Maturo, F. J. & Scuorr, T. J. M. 1968. Ectoproct and Entoproct type material. Postilla 120:
2-95.
MIcHELIN, H. 1842. Zoophytes. Magasin Zool. Paris. (2, 4e Ann. Zooph.) (Guérin-
Méneville): 1, pl. 3.
MiLiarp, N. A. 1975. Monograph on the Hydroida of southern Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 68:
1-513.
Mitiarp, N. A. 1978. The geographical distribution of southern African hydroids. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 74: 159-200.
Mittarp, N. A. 1980. The South African Museum’s Meiring Naude Cruises. Part 11.
Hydroida. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82: 129-153.
MILNE Epwarps, H. 1836. Histoire des Polypes. In: Lamarck, J. B. P. A. DE. Histoire naturelle
des animaux sans vertébres. 2nd ed. 2. Paris.
MILNE Epwarps, H. 1838. Mémoire sur les Crisies, les Hornéres et plusieurs autre Polypes.
». Ann Se. nat. (2))9: 193-238:
Moyano, H. 1970. Bryozoa colectados por la expedicion Antarctica Chilena 1964-1965. IV.
Familia Arachnopusiidae Jullien, 1888. Bol. Soc. Biol. Concepcion 42: 257-285.
Norman, A. M. 1864. On undescribed British Hydrozoa, Actinozoa and Polyzoa. Ann. Mag.
nat. Hist. (3) 13: 82-90.
Norman, A. M. 1869. Last report on dredging among the Shetland Islands. Polyzoa. Rep. Br.
Ass. Advmt Sci. 1868: 303-312.
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Norman, A. M. 1903. Notes on the natural history of East Finmark. Polyzoa. Ann. Mag. nat.
Hist, (7) 11: 567-598. |
N@rvanc, A. 1961. Schizamminidae, a new family of Foraminifera. Atlantide Rep. 6: 169-201.
O’DonocuuE, C. H. 1924. The Bryozoa (Polyzoa) collected by the S.A. ‘Pickle’. Rep. Fish.
mar. biol. Surv. Un. S. Afr. 3 Spec. Rep. 10: 1-63.
O’DonoGHUuE, C. H. 1957. Some South African Bryozoa. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 35: 71-95.
O’DonoGHuE, C. H. & DE WartreEvILLE, D 1935. A collection of Bryozoa from South Africa.
J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 39: 203-218.
O’DonoGHUE, C. H. & DE WarTTEVILLE, D 1937. Notes on South African Bryozoa. Zool. Anz.
117: 12-22.
O’DonoGHuE, C. H. & DE WarTTeEvILLE, D 1944. Additional notes on Bryozoa from South
Africa. Ann. Natal Mus. 10 (3): 407-432.
OKEN, L. 1815. Lehrbuch der Naturgeschichte, II, Zoologie, Abt. 1. Fleischlose Thiere.
Leipzig.
OrpicNy, A. D’. 1850. Prodrome de paléontologie stratigraphique universelle des animaux
Mollusques et Rayonées . . . 2: 1-427. Paris.
OrBIGNY, A. D’. 1852. Paléontologie Francaises, Terrains Crétacés, V, Bryozoaires, livr.
177-194: 185-472. Paris: Masson.
OrsBiGNy, A. D’. 1853. Paléontologie Francaises, Terrains Crétacés, V, Bryozoaires, l\ivr.
195-214: 473-984. Paris: Masson.
Ossurn, R. C. 1950. Bryozoa of the Pacific Coast of America, 1. Cheilostomata Anasca. Allan
Hancock Pacif. Exped. 14 (1): 1-269.
Ossurn, R. C. 1952. Bryozoa of the Pacific Coast of America, 2. Cheilostomata Ascophora.
Allan Hancock Pacif. Exped. 14 (2): 271-611.
PALLAS, P. S. 1766. Elenchus Zoophytorum. Hagae-Comitum: Petrum van Cleef.
PuiLipes, E. G. 1899. Report on the Polyzoa collected by Dr Willey from the Loyalty Isles,
New Guinea and New Britain. A. Willey’s Zool. Results 4: 439-450.
PowELL, N. A. 1967. Polyzoa (Bryozoa)—Ascophora—from north New Zealand. Discovery
Rep. 34: 199-394.
PouyeET, S. & Davip, L. 1979. Révision systématique du genre Steginoporella Smitt, 1873
(Bryozoa, Cheilostomata). Géobios 12 (6): 763-817.
Reuss, A. E. 1869. Palaontologische Studien tiber die alteren Tertiarschichten der Alpen, II.
Die fossilen Anthozoen und Bryozoen der Schichtengruppe von Crosara. Denkschr. K.
Akad. Wiss. Math.-Nat. Cl. Wien 29: 215-298.
RIDLEY, S. O. 1881. Account of the Zoological Collections . . . of H.M.S. ‘Alert’... Part V.
Polyzoa. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1881: 44-61.
RYLAND, J. S. 1963. Systematic and biological studies on Polyzoa (Bryozoa) from western
Norway. Sarsia 14: 1-59.
RYLAND, J. S. 1967. Crisiidae from western Norway. Sarsia 29: 269-282.
RYLAND, J. S. 1974. Bryozoa in the Great Barrier Reef Province. Proc. 2nd. Int. Congr. Coral
Reefs 1: 341-348.
RYLAND, J. S. & Haywarp, P. J. 1977. British Anascan Bryozoans. Synopses of the British
Fauna (n.s.) 10. London: Academic Press for the Linnean Society.
Sit—n, L. 1947. Conescharellinidae (Bryozoa Gymnolaemata) collected by Prof. Dr Sixten
Bock’s Expedition to Japan and the Bonin Islands, 1914. Ark. Zool. 39A (9): 1-61.
Smit, F. A. 1866. Kritisk férteckning 6fver Skandinaviens Hafs-Bryozoer. Ofvers. K
VetenskAkad. Forh. 23: 395-534. ,
Smiit, F. A. 1868. Kritisk forteckning 6fver Skandinaviens Hafs-Bryozoer, III. Ofvers. K
VetenskAkad. Forh. 24: 279-429.
SmitT, F. A. 1873. Floridan Bryozoa, collected by Count L. F. de Pourtales, Part II. _
svenska VetenskAkad. Hanadl. 11: 1-83.
SouLE, D. F. & Soue, J. D. 1973. Morphology and speciation of Hawaiian and eastern Pacific
Smittinidae (Bryozoa, Ectoprocta). Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 152 (6): 365-440.
STACH, L. W. 1936. Studies on Recent Petraliidae (Bryozoa). Rec. Aust. Mus. 19 (6): 355-379.
TayLor, P. D. & Cook, P. L. 1981. Hippoporidra edax (Busk 1859) and a revision of some
fossil and living Hippoporidra (Bryozoa). Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 35: 243-251.
THORNELY, L. R. 1905. Report on the Polyzoa. In: HERDMAN, W. A. ed. Rep. Pearl Oyster
Fisheries, Gulf of Manaar (4) Suppl. Rep. 26: 107-130.
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 155)
UrtLey, G. H. 1949. The Recent and Tertiary Polyzoa (Bryozoa) in the collection of the
Canterbury Museum, Christchurch. Part 1. Rec. Canterbury Mus. 5 (4): 167-192.
UrtLey, G. H. & BULLIVANT, J. S. 1972: Biological Results of the Chatham Islands 1954
Expedition. Bull. N. Z. Dep. scient. ind. Res. 139 (7): 1-59.
VERRILL, A. E. 1879. Brief contributions to zoology from the museum of Yale College, No. 42.
Notice of recent additions to the marine fauna of the eastern coast of North America, No.
5, Polyzoa. Am. J. Sci. (3) 17: 472-474.
VIGNEAUX, M. 1949. Révision des Bryozoaires Néogénes du bassin d’Aquitaine et essai de
classification. Mém. Soc. géol. Fr. (n.s.) 60: 1-153.
Wass, R. E., Conoiy, J. R. & Macintyre, R. J. 1970. Bryozoan carbonate sand continuous
along southern Australia. Mar. Geol. 9: 63-73.
Wass, R. E. & Yoo, J. J. 1975. Distribution and taxonomy of some Recent catenicelliform
Bryozoa from Australia. Docum. Lab. Géol. Fac. Sci. Lyon (H.S.) 3 (2): 281-297.
Waters, A. W. 1881. On fossil cheilostomatous Bryozoa from south-west Victoria, Australia.
Q. JI geol. Soc. Lond. 37: 309-347.
Waters, A. W. 1905. Bryozoa from near Cape Horn, J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 29: 230-251.
Waters, A. W. 1909. Reports on the marine biology of the Sudanese Red Sea, XII. The
Bryozoa. Part 1. Cheilostomata. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 31: 123-181.
Waters, A. W. 1913. The Marine Fauna of British East Africa and Zanzibar . . . Bryozoa—
Cheilostomata. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1913: 458-537.
Waters, A. W. 1918. Some collections of the littoral marine fauna of the Cape Verde Islands
. . . Bryozoa. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) 34: 1-45.
ABBREVIATIONS
Lz length of zooid Iz width of zooid
Lop length of opesia lop width of opesia
Lor length of orifice lor width of orifice
Lov length of ovicell lov width of ovicell
Lg length of gonozooid lg width of gonozooid
Loo.st. length of ooeciostome eho} taza width of brooding zooid
Ie ibieZ: length of brooding zooid ] br.or. width of brooding orifice
Lbr.or. length of brooding orifice Im. width of mandible
Lav length of avicularium
Lad.av. length of adventitious avicularium
Lint.av. length of interzooidal avicularium
Lm length of mandible
BMNH British Museum (Natural History)
SAM — South African Museum
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
APPENDIX 1
MEIRING NAUDE STATIONS THAT PRODUCED BRYOZOA
Station Co-ordinates
Ss Ss)
SM 103 Dirge 3244
SM 123 30°33 ,4’ 30°48,6’
SM 129 S05845 S0eoileve
SM 131 30°43 2’ 30°40,8’
SM 151 30°14’ S27 207
SM 162 3255 28 ile
SM 163 33°04,6’ 28°06,6’
SM 164 33°04,6’ 28°06,6’
SM 179 SES.) 3 Di A
SM 180 33°29 ,4’ DE De
SM 184 33°39 4’ rahe 4
SM 185 33°39 ,3’ Dg AEG:
SM 232 32°14,9’ 29°10,4’
SM 233 SRS JH 29°09 ,8’
SM 234 SAIS 29°09,1’
SM 239 SP aIARSe 29°00,8’
SM 250 BP S)3)" 29 DIS
APPENDIX 2
Depth, m Date
680 24.5.76
690 105972
850 bMS) 57/7/
780 OMS) 7/7/
900 17-3
630 2d
90 26.5.78
90 26.5.78
80 29°5218
80 295518
86 BIBS Vis:
90 3578
560-620 25.6.79
540-580 25.6.79
500-520 29:69
90 25.6.79
150-200 2 O9
INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES
Correct names are given in italic; synonyms in roman.
abdita 93,97, 99, 100
alia 100
confusanea 92
conspicua 93
coralliformis 88, 92
cracens 88, 90,95
cultrata 88
decipiens 90
distincta 95
expansa 88, 97
falcicula 88
gibba 88, 97, 99, 100
infirmata 95
jellyae 88
ligulata 88
majuscula 88, 90
meandrina 88
pectinata 88, 99
ponticula 86, 88
Pygmaea 88
regularis 87
triton 47
abdita, Adeonella 93,97, 99, 100
Acamarchis dentata 42
acanthina, Chaperia 19
Actinopora 132
Adeona 47,51
Adeonella 51, 87, 140, 143
Adeonellopsis 47
meandrina 88
africana, Cribrilaria 45
africana, Macropora 33, 148
africana, Pachycleithonia 53, 55
alia, Adeonella 100
ambigua, Emballotheca 73
Amphiblestrum 11,16
capense 22
imbricatum 16
inermis 12, 145
pontifex 13
triangulare 12
angusta, Flustramorpha_ 84, 85, 141
Anoteropora 127, 140, 142
latirostris 127
antarctica, Idmidronea 136
Arachnopusia 27, 29
corniculata 29
arcuata, Watersipora 55
armata, Brodiella 103, 123
Arthropoma_ 69
cecilii 69
circinatum 69
Aspidostoma 36, 147
giganteum 38
livida 36,51, 147
asymmetrica, Mucropetraliella 67
(atlantica, Idmidronea overleaf)
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES eyf/
atlantica, Idmidronea 136
australis, Bugulella 40, 147
australis, Chaperia 19
australis, Mecynoecia 131
avicularis, Hippomenella_ 81, 145
balani, Stomachetosella 74
Batopora 140, 142
Beania 41
erecta 42, 141
magellanica 42
paucispinosa 141
rediviva 42, 141
vanhoffeni 141
beatulum, Rhynchozoon 113
Berenicea lineata 132
Bicellariella
capensis 141
chuakensis 141
bicornis, Osthimosia 125
bifaciata, Cellaria 36
biporata, Idmidronea 134, 136
bispiramina, Tessaradoma 102
boryi, Caberea 141
Brodiella 103, 104, 120, 123
armata 103, 123
ignota 103, 122
longispinata 103, 120, 145
Buffonellaria armata 123
Bugula 42
dentata 42
Bugulella 40, 140
australis 40, 147
problematica 40
burrowsi, Tropidozoum 55
buski, Disporella 138
buskii, Steginoporella 32, 141
Caberea 38
boryi 141
darwinii 38, 141, 145
calcarata, Smittoidea 60
Callopora 11
Calyptotheca 72,74
nivea 72
porelliformis 73
capensis, Bicellariella 141
capensis, Celleporaria 126
capensis, Chaperia 19, 22, 23
capensis, Porella 64
Carbasea 6
mediocris 6
cecilii, Arthropoma 69
Cellaria 34
bifaciata 36
fistulosa 141
gracilis 34
Johnsoni 35
paradoxa 35
Ppunctata 34
tectiformis 34
cellariiforme, Tropidozoum 55
Cellepora conica 123
senegambiensis 78
tridenticulata 125, 145
Celleporaria 125
capensis 126
tridenticulata 125
Cellularia crispa 39
infantae 39
ornata 39
quadrata 38
centralis, Macropora 33
cervicornis, Notocoryne 26
Chaperia 19, 25
acanthina 19
acanthina var. australis 22
acanthina var. polygonia 23
australis 19
capensism 19522773
familiaris 23, 144
multifida 20
stephensoni 23
chuakensis, Bicellariella 141
ciliata, Microporella 82
circella, Tessaradoma 102
circinatum, Arthropoma 69
circumspecta, Smittoidea 59
clavaeformis, Mecynoecia 130
Cleidochasma_ 75, 104
contractum 104
cribritheca 76
perspicua 76, 104
porcellanum 75, 78, 145
protrusum 75
Columnella 140
confusanea, Adeonella 92
conica, Turbicellepora 123
conspicua, Adeonella 93
contorta, Escharoides 46
contorta, Idmidronea 133
contractum, Cleidochasma 104
Copidozoum 13
transversum 14
coralliformis, Adeonella 88, 92
corniculata, Arachnopusia 29
cracens, Adeonella 88, 90, 95
crassicollis, Stomachetosella 74
Crassimarginatella 14
marginalis 14, 145
crassimargo, Idmidronea_ 134
cribraria, Porina 87
Cribrilaria 43
africana 45
innominata 43, 145
venusta 43, 145
Cribrilina philomela 46
cribritheca, Cleidochasma 76
Crisia 137
elongata 137
holdsworthii 128, 137
transversata 137
(Crisina overleaf)
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Crisina 138
radians 138, 145
watersi 138
crispa, Menipea 39
cultrata, Adeonella 88
Cupuladria 6
multispinata 6, 145
owen 8
Cupularia multispinata 6
cyclops var. tessellata, Odontionella 29
Dactylostega 26, 144
nigrans 29
prima 27
spissimuralis 29
tubigera 29
darwinii, Caberea 38, 141, 145
decipiens, Adeonella 90
delicatula, Mecynoecia 131
dentata, Bugula 42
Desmeplagioecia lineata 132
Diachoris magellanica 42
Diaperoecia 130
Diastopora
lineata 132
reticulata 133
Dimorphocella 13, 47, 62
moderna 48, 147
portmarina 47
pyriformis 47, 48
triton 47,51
dinotorhynchus, Reteporella 108, 141
Discoporella 8
novae zealandiae 137
umbellata 8
discors, Escharella 66
Disporella
buski 138
ciliata 138
distincta, Adeonella 95
documentum, Rhynchozoon 110
elongata, Crisia 137
Emballotheca 73
ambigua 73
nivea 72
errata, Smittoidea 59
erugata, Hornera 139
Eschara contorta 46
flabellaris 84
Escharella 66
discors 66
Escharina 71
pesanseris 71, 145
waiparaensis 71, 145, 147
Escharoides 46
contorta 46
spinigera 76
Eupaxia 38
incarnata 38
quadrata 38
Exechonella 52
expansa, Adeonella 88, 97
falcicula, Adeonella 88
familiaris, Chaperia 23, 144
fasciculata, Liripora 132
Fenestrulina 85
indigena 85
ferruginea, Smittina 58
Figularia 45
philomela 46
fistulosa, Cellaria 141
flabellaris, Flustramorpha 84
flosculum, Iodictyum 109
Flustra acanthina 19
cecilii 69
marginata 84
spinosa 20
Flustramorpha_ 84, 143
angusta 84, 85, 141
flabellaris 84
marginata 84
foraminosa, Gigantopora 86
Foveolaria 13, 16, 29
imbricata 16
Galeopsis mutabilis 53
Gemellipora cribritheca 76
protrusa 75
Gephyrophora polymorpha 86
gibba, Adeonella 88, 97, 99, 100
giganteum, Aspidostoma 38
Gigantopora 86, 143
foraminosa 86
mutabilis 53
polymorpha _ 86, 87, 88
gracilis, Pseudidmonea_ 139
grandis, Macropora 33
Heliodoma 10, 140, 142, 145
implicata 11, 142
Hincksina nigrans 29
Hippaliosina 123
Hippomenella 81
avicularis 81, 145
spatulata 81
Hippoporella 79, 104
hippopus 104
labiata 80, 104
multidentata 80
spinigera 79, 145
Hippoporidra 78
picardi 79
senegambiensis 78, 145
hippopus, Hippoporella 104
Hippothoa pes anseris 71
holdsworthii, Crisia 128, 137
(Holoporella capensis overleaf)
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 159.
Holoporella capensis 126
Hornera 128, 139, 143
erugata 139
smitti 139
Idmidronea_ 133, 143
antarctica 136
atlantica 136
biporata 134, 136
contorta 133
crassimargo 134
parvula 134
Idmonea atlantica 136
contorta 133
crassimargo 134
parvula 134
ignota, Brodiella 103, 120
imbricata, Foveolaria 16
implicata, Heliodoma 11, 142, 145
incallidum, Rhynchozoon 103, 114
indigena, Fenestrulina 85
inermis, Amphiblestrum 12, 145
infirmata, Adeonella 95
innominata, Cribrilaria 43, 145
Inversiscaphos 140
Iodictyum 109
flosculum 109
jellyae, Laminopora 88
Jullienella 145
foetida 145
pearceyi 145
labiata, Hippoporella 80, 104
Lacrimula 140, 142
Laminopora 51
jellyae 88
lata, Sertella 105
latirostris, Anoteropora 127
Lepralia armata 103, 123
circinata 69
foliacea 141
innominata 43
porcellana 75
triangularis 12
tuberculata var. avicularis 81
venusta 86
Lichenopora 137
novae-zealandiae 137
ligulata, Adeonella 88
lineata, Liripora 132
Liripora 132
lineata 132
fasciculata 132
livida, Aspidostoma 36, 51, 147
Lobosoecia semiclausa 133
longispinata, Brodiella 103, 120, 123, 145
Lunulites umbellata 8
Macropora 33, 147, 148
africana 33
centralis 33
grandis 33
magellanica, Beania 42
magnilabris, Steginoporella 33, 141
majuscula, Adeonella 88, 90
Margaretta 143
marginalis, Crassimarginatella 14, 145
marginata, Flustramorpha 84
marionensis, Menipea 40
meandrina, Adeonellopsis 88
Mecynoecia 130, 143
australis 131
clavaeformis 130
delicatula 131
mediocris, Carbasea 6
Membranipora galeata var. inermis 22
galeata var. multifida 20
imbricata 16
inermis 12
marginalis 14
spinosa 19
tubigera 29
Membraniporidra spissimuralis 29
Menipea 39, 140
flabellum 39
crispa 39
marionensis 40
ornata 39
triseriata 39
Micropora 31
normani 32
similis 31, 69
Microporella 82
ciliata 82
flabellaris 84
moderna, Dimorphocella 48, 147
mooraboolensis, Mucronella 80
Mucronella contorta 46
mooraboolensis 80
serratilabris 79, 145
Mucropetraliella 67
asymmetrica 67
watersi 67, 69
multidentata, Hippoporella 80
multifida, Chaperia 20
multispinata, Cupuladria 6, 145
mutabilis, Pachycleithonia 53
nigra, Pachycleithonia 53
nigrans, Dactylostega 29
nivea, Calyptotheca 72
normani, Micropora 32
Notocoryne 26
cervicornis 26
Notoplites 140
novae-zealandiae, Lichenopora 137
novella, Parasmittina 63
(Odontionella cyclops overleaf)
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Odontionella cyclops var. tessellata 29
ornata, Menipea 39
oscitans, Rhynchozoon 103, 116
Osthimosia bicornis 125
owenii, Cupuladria 8
Pachycleithonia 52
africana 53,55
mutabilis 53
nigra 53
paradoxa, Cellaria 35
Parasmittina 62
novella 63
serrula 63, 64
tropica 62, 145
parvula, Idmidronea 134
patina, Plagioecia 131
perforata, Schizoporella 74
perspicua, Cleidochasma 76, 104
pesanseris, Escharina 71, 145
Petralia vultur var. armata 67
peyroti, Discoporella umbellata 10
Dhilomela, Figularia 46
picardi, Hippoporidra 79
Plagioecia 131, 132
patina 131
polymorpha, Gigantopora 86, 87, 88
pontifex, Amphiblestrum 13
porcellanum, Cleidochasma_ 75, 78, 145
Porella 64
capensis 64
porelliformis, Calyptotheca 73
Porina cribraria 87
portmarina, Dimorphocella 47
praetenuis, Vittaticella 127
prima, Dactylostega 27, 144
problematica, Bugulella 40
protrusum, Cleidochasma 75
Pseudidmonea gracilis 139
ptarmicum, Rhynchozoon 103, 118
Puellina venusta 43
pulchra, Schizoporella 104
punctata, Cellaria 34
pustulata, Turbicellepora 124, 125
Pustulopora
australis 13
clavaeformis 130
delicatula 131
proboscidea 131
pygmaea, Adeonella 88
pyriformis, Dimorphocella 47, 48
quadrata, Eupaxia 38
radians, Crisina 138, 145
rediviva, Beania 42,141
regularis, Adeonella 87
Retepora lata 105
radians 138
tessellata 106
Reteporella 103, 108
dinotorhynchus 108, 141
Rhynchopora spinifera 80
Rhynchozoon 102, 103, 104, 110
beatulum 113
documentum 110
incallidum 103, 114
oscitans 103, 116
ptarmicum 103, 118
stomachosum 103, 116
roulei, Setosellina 10, 141, 145
Salicornaria punctata 34
Schizammina 145
pinnata 25, 144
Schizomavella 70
Schizoporella balani 74
cecilit 69
longispinata 103, 120
nivea 72
perforata 74
porelliformis 73
pulchra 104
submersa 48
tenuis 72
Schizoretepora 106
tessellata 103, 106, 147
Schizotheca 102, 103
senegambiensis, Hippoporidra 78, 145
serrula, Parasmittina 63, 64
Sertella 103, 105, 143
lata 105
verecunda 105
Setosellina 10, 140, 145
roulei 10, 141
similis, Micropora 31, 69
sitella, Smittina 56
smitti, Hornera 139
Smittia tropica 62
Smittina 56
ferruginea 58
sitella 56
tropica 62
Smittoidea 58
circumspecta 59
calcarata 60
errata 59
hexagonalis 59
spinifera, Rhynchopora 80
spinigera, Hippoporella 79, 145
spissimuralis, Dactylostega 29
Steginoporella 32
buskii 32, 141
magnilabris 33, 141
stellata, Tennysonia 128
stephensoni, Chaperia 23
Stomachetosella 74
balani 74
crassicollis 74
(stomachosum, Rhynchozoon overleaf)
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES 161
stomachosum, Rhynchozoon 103, 116
Strophiella tuberigera 120
submersa, Schizoporella 48
tectiformis, Cellaria 34
tenella, Vittaticella 127
Tennysonia contorta 133
stellata 128
Tervia 128
Tessaradoma 102, 140
bispiramina 102
circella 102
tessellata, Schizoretepora 103, 106, 147
transversata, Crisia 137
transversum, Copidozoum 14
tridenticulata, Celleporaria 125, 145
Triphyllozoon 103
triseriata, Menipea 39
triton, Dimorphocella 47,51
Tropidozoum 55
burrowsi 55
cellariiforme 55
tropica, Parasmittina 62, 145
Trypostega 86
venusta 86, 145
tuberigera, Strophiella 120
tubigera, Dactylostega 29
Tubulipora 128
notomale 134
patina 131
Turbicellepora conica 123
pustulata 125
valligera 124
umbellata, Discoporella 8
valligera, Turbicellepora 124
vanhoffeni, Beania 141
venusta, Cribrilaria 43, 145
venusta, Trypostega 86, 145
venusta, Vittaticella 127
verecunda, Sertella 105
Vittaticella 127
praetenius 127
tenella 127
venusta 127
waiparaensis, Escharina 71, 145, 147
watersi, Mucropetraliella 67, 69
Watersipora arcuata 55
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15SA
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
' (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
P. J. HAYWARD
&
P. L. COGK
THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM’S
MEIRING NAUDE CRUISES
PART 13
BRYOZOA II
QH
a :
S67X T 2 JANUARY 1983 ISSN 0303-2515
‘i AMT NAS \
( MAR 22.963
NH .
S_LIBR ARIES. oe
ANNALS
| F THE OUTH AFRICAN
° : MUSEUM
CAPE ‘TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes... .’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. \
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 91 Band
January 1983 Januarie
Part 2 #£Deel
THE OUTLINE OF AN
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM
IN SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
By
MARTIN HALL
&
KATHLEEN MACK
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
GES 53), 0D, 2-5. Bes) SS, 5, 7-9),
Ail io), RD), 8, U2, 7), CES).
1102255, 7) top), 154-5), 24) 27), 3d= 3) 326), Sane)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 042 7
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE OUTLINE OF AN EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC
SYSTEM IN SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
By
MaArtTIN HALi
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
KATHLEEN MACK
Natal Museum, Pietermaritzburg
(With 11 figures and 8 tables)
[MS accepted 7 October 1982]
ABSTRACT
In this paper different sorts of evidence are brought together in order to outline the
economic system of a set of chiefdoms in south-eastern Africa in the late eighteenth century.
Locations of capitals, given in recorded oral traditions, allow boundaries of chiefdoms to be
modelled with a standard analytical technique. Faunal collections from archaeological sites
indicate the economic role of livestock, and the carrying capacities of the chiefdoms are
estimated from ecological data. Comparison of ceramic assemblages and architectural styles
allows an evaluation to be made of the different roles of men and women in the larger
economic structure.
CONTENTS
PAGE
TONGUE LM OME epee eases Ses e ins One sted, Ole Backes Shas ISS! NOS parse je aw 08 anol bom 163
KwaButhelezi and neighbouring chiefdoms: establishing boundaries ....... 165
ATehacoloeicaluexcavations at. clangemi .-. 072: «ee. soe tee ees 174
MEIECOMOMICSYVStEMIO£ MWaIUENElEZI 2. 5. cj) so eee ee ee eens oe 181
PNGKMONW eG CCI ell l Sm mrs 2 carcntys hemes icv A A aca ee Pee wins gear 193
ENG GIT S Site aR Bery ate ot ee csr a ai epicuets Glee ates ahs ats, wrgpeuell 195
INTRODUCTION
For the people of south-eastern Africa the early years of the nineteenth
century were a period of rapid change. During the preceding half-century many
of the small chiefdoms between the Thukela and Phongolo rivers had come to
owe allegiance to particular rulers either in a loosely structured confederacy,
such as the Mthethwa under Dingiswayo, or in a more rigidly controlled
system, such as the Ndwandwe state under Zwide (Marks 1967). In 1816, Shaka
kaSenzangakhona succeeded to the Zulu chiefship and then came to control the
Mthethwa confederacy. Defeating the Ndwandwe, he built a powerful military
kingdom, which dominated south-eastern Africa for a further 60 years (Guy
1979).
163
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 91 (2), 1983: 163-194, 11 figs, 8 tables.
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Although it has been argued that the Zulu kingdom was in structure
similar to the chiefdoms that it replaced (Hedges 1978), the formation of the
kingdom involved a fundamental change in scale. For example, the regiments,
or amabutho, were adapted from loose age-sets into highly organized military
units incorporating the majority of the male population of fighting age (Wright
1978). This strengthening of the regiments involved a change in settlement
pattern as large military towns were built at appropriate points around the
kingdom. Similarly, the domestic economy, which was formerly centred on the
homestead, had to be adjusted substantially to provide for the concentrated
centres of population around the barracks. On a national scale Shaka was able
to control a far wider political field than his predecessors, trading extensively
and using his military power over a substantial sphere of influence (Guy 1979).
It is difficult to understand the way in which these various components of
the Zulu kingdom were brought together as a cohesive political and economic
system without understanding the crucial role of cattle—a point made elo-
quently and forcibly by Guy (1970, 1977). It was not just that cattle were
important for their milk, their meat, and for secondary products such as hide.
Cattle were also the medium through which women, important for their own
labour power and for the labour power of the children that they would
produce, were distributed among households. Thus the lobolo system of
bridewealth, functioning within the patrilineal and patrilocal marriage system,
allowed the head of an umuzi (homestead, pl. imizi) to acquire wives for his
sons with payments from his herd. This herd could be replenished by lobolo
received on the marriage of daughters, but also by patronage received from
higher levels in the political hierarchy: local lineage heads, chiefs, and ulti-
mately, the King (Bryant 1949, Guy 1979). Thus one of the more important
functions of the Zulu military institution was to obtain cattle from areas beyond
the kingdom by raiding, providing the King with a means of economic control.
Although agriculture was an important element in the economy, the
welfare and reproductive potential of the Zulu cattle herds were of central
importance. It is fair to deduce that access to suitable grazing areas was a factor
in the struggle between the minor chiefdoms, and then between the Mthethwa
and the Ndwandwe, in the years before Shaka’s consolidation of the kingdom.
This point was made perceptively by Daniel (1973), when he pointed out that
those chiefdoms to emerge with power at the end of the eighteenth century
appeared to control the most productive combinations of grazing types. With-
out falling prey to environmental determinism, it is fair to argue that any full
understanding of the origin of the Zulu kingdom must be preceded by an
appreciation of the economic geography of the area between the Thukela and
Phongolo rivers.
In this paper a study is made of the cattle-based economy of kwaButhelezi
and its immediate neighbours—one small group of chiefdoms in the years
immediately before the formation of the Zulu kingdom. The aim is to try to
discover more about the nature of cattle husbandry and the redistribution of
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 165
livestock by looking at faunal collections from archaeological sites, at ceramic
typologies, and at the distribution of grazing resources within the boundaries of
this particular group of chiefdoms. The results have only the status of tentative
hypotheses, but they demonstrate that some pattern can be obtained from the
diverse and fragmentary data available.
KWABUTHELEZI AND NEIGHBOURING CHIEFDOMS:
ESTABLISHING BOUNDARIES
As a prelude to examining the pre-Shakan economy of kwaButhelezi, it is
necessary to establish the extent of the landscape controlled by this chiefdom
and by its immediate neighbours. The approach was to find the location of the
principal seat of each chief in the closing years of the nineteenth century—the
most important umuzi in each chiefdom, which for convenience has been
termed the capital. Using these capitals as nodal points, the landscape has been
divided through the use of Thiessen Polygons. This simple technique establishes
the most rational use of an area (Haggett 1965) and has been used with some
success in archaeological situations as diverse as Mesoamerica (Hammond
1972) and Iron Age hill-forts in southern Britain (Cunliffe 1971), as well as in
an earlier study in a region immediately adjacent to kwaButhelezi (Hall 1981).
It must be emphasized that the lines of the polygons that result from this
technique need not be taken as definite territorial boundaries. There is
evidence to suggest that chiefdoms in southern Africa were not normally
defined in such a way, but were rather core areas of influence separated by
ill-defined zones that were either not utilized or served as commonage (Ford
1971). Thus, although the Thiessen Polygons are here presented as firm lines,
they can be taken as marking the positions of broad zones separating areas of
political and economic control.
Although the imizi of south-east African chiefs were places of considerable
importance, there is today often little physical evidence of their locations.
Construction materials were usually wood, thatch, and clay and little has
survived even of the larger centres such as Dingane’s Mgungundlovu or
Cetshwayo’s Ondini. Archaeological traces, and in particular midden deposits,
are found frequently, but at this level of physical decay it is difficult to tell royal
settlements from ordinary Late Iron Age sites. In this situation the most
profitable approach is to search for pointers in oral traditions. Unfortunately,
many such traditions were lost during the formative years of the Zulu kingdom,
when a large proportion of the smaller chiefdoms were destroyed and their
populations relocated, thus breaking the lines by which histories had been
passed through the generations. Despite this, enough information survives to
piece together the outlines of the political geography of the pre-Shakan period.
A primary source is A. T. Bryant’s Olden times in Zululand and Natal
(1929). Although this author’s florid style, with its classical allusions, ornate
analogies and quotations from English poetry, serves as a heavy disguise,
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Bryant’s text does include a mass of invaluable historical information, which
has been the subject of close study. The technique in extracting locational
information from this text was first to study Bryant’s map of ‘Native clans as
located in pre-Shakan times’, which is reproduced at the end of his text, and to
note the positions of chiefdoms in the area of concern. Textual references have
been traced to areas controlled by the chiefs and to their residences in the late
eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries. In most cases the location of the
principal umuzi is given by reference to prominent hills or to rivers and it has
often been possible to locate these places on standard 1 : 50000 scale maps.
A further important source of information has been the corpus of oral
tradition collected by J. B. Wright of the University of Natal, Pietermaritzburg,
on two visits to the Babanango area in 1975 and 1976. These data were
collected systematically using the methods now standard among historians of
African societies. Transcripts of these interviews are stored with the Depart-
ment of Ethnoarchaeology, Natal Museum, Pietermaritzburg.
The locations of kwaButhelezi and neighbouring ‘clans’, as given by Bryant
in his map, are shown in Figure 1. It is apparent from the text of Bryant’s work,
however, that not all clans had the same political status. Some were indepen-
dent chiefdoms, governed by a single chief and exercising claim to a particular
area. Others were subject to more powerful chiefs, exercising local control but
with no ultimate sovereignty.
Although it is sometimes not possible to be conclusive, Bryant’s references
to the fortunes of the different chiefs and their houses provide a good
indication of political status. Of the ‘clans’ shown in Figure 1, it would seem
that kwaKhumalo, kwaZungu, and kwaMpungose were independent chiefdoms
allied with no other houses. It is also clear that the Ncubeni were subject to the
Buthelezi chief (Bryant 1929: 114) and that the Dludla formed part of kwaXulu
(Bryant 1929: 229). Bryant (1929: 28) states that the Dlamini became subject to
the Mbatheni chief late in the eighteenth century and that the Magwaza were a
sub-clan of the Langeni house, which was formed early in the nineteenth
century, after the period presently under consideration (Bryant 1929: 127). The
Mazuku are given as an offshoot of the Qungebeni and, as their chief does not
seem to have had independent political power, they have been considered a
part of emaQungebeni (Bryant 1929: 687). Within kwaZulu have been included
the Ntombela, a sub-clan of the royal house (Bryant 1929: 32), and the Sibiya,
who had interacted politically and economically with the Zulu chiefs for many
generations (Bryant 1929: 27). (It is difficult to find a neutral term for the lands
of the Zulu chiefdom. The general ‘Zululand’, preferred by Guy (1979), is too
imprecise in the present context, and so the locative has been used, as with
other chiefdoms. This usage does not imply a connection with the present-day
‘homeland’ of the same name.) Finally, although the Magubane ‘clan’ is shown
on Bryant’s map, no mention is made of this group in the text. As it would thus
seem unlikely that the Magubane were an independent chiefdom, they were
probably subject to either the Khumalo or to the Buthelezi. For the purposes of
167
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA
‘poulejo1
useq sey Surjods yeursio sjuedig “(6Z6]) JUeAIGg Aq poddeur se ‘eoie Apmis oy} Jo sue[D ueyeYys-cig, ‘[ “SI
SIBAI 1ZOJOII\
SIUM B 9e|g
ezembew;
iusHue]
BIPniq
ej;squoin asobuody
Izajauing oyewnuy
aueqnbe|/|
1uaqnon
“Yd IZO/OFIA) BLIUM
nynsey
julWwe|q
oseqe|\
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
168
‘gore Apnjs oy} Ul sulopyatyo Ainjudd-YyUSa}YS3IO a3e7T] *Z “SIA
\
\
\
Ly
juabuey
oe
njnXx
nBunzZ
uayieq
asobundj
njAZ
Izajaying
oie ee
1uaqebuno
W07
ojeunyy
Z
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 169
the following analysis they have been disregarded. A revised version of
Bryant’s map, showing the approximate locations of these chiefdoms and with
the orthography corrected in accordance with modern practice, is shown as
Figure 2.
According to Bryant (1929: 28), the founders of the Buthelezi royal house
settled ‘along the emCakweni ridge above the sources of the amaPopoma river
and on to the Zulu borders’. At the end of the eighteenth century they were
bounded by kwaZulu, emaQungebeni, and Babanango Mountain, although the
chiefdom was still centred on the emCakweni Ridge (Bryant 1929: 131). The
Buthelezi chief in the closing years of the eighteenth century was Phungashe,
but Bryant provides no precise indication of the location of his capital. Oral
traditions collected by Wright (1975), however, indicated four imizi succes-
sively occupied by Phungashe and a tentative sequence in which they served as
capital of kwaButhelezi: eLangeni, the first of Phungashe’s capitals (not to be
confused with the chiefdom of the same name), oDwini, eMbamba, and, as
Phungashe’s last seat, emaGundaneni. Each of these sites was examined and all
showed signs of occupation—a few potsherds and some broken grindstones. All
the sites are within an area of a few square kilometres and, for the purposes of
this analysis, eLangeni has been taken as the political and economic centre of
late eighteenth-century kwaButhelezi.
Bordering kwaButhelezi to the south-east was the chiefdom of kwaZulu,
ruled by Senzangakhona, father of Shaka. Surprisingly, but perhaps because
the emphasis has been on describing the lands of the kingdom that was to come
a few decades later, there is comparatively little information about the area
under Senzangakhona’s control. KwaZulu in the closing years of the eighteenth
century was certainly centred on the valley of the Mkhumbane River, above its
confluence with the White Mfolozi River but beneath the high lands of the
Babanango Plateau. Bryant (1929: 20) describes the Zulu chiefdom as lying
‘within a shallow hill-flanked valley, eight miles across’. The location of
Senzangakhona’s capital is, however, more definite. Bryant (1929: 46) attri-
butes at least three imizi to Senzangakhona, although he states that the chief’s
principal wife was resident at only one of these, esiKlebheni. James Stuart’s
informant Baleni, however, referred only to esiKlebheni (Webb & Wright
1976: 41), as does Lugg (1949: 112), who states that this wmuzi was built by
Senzangakhona ‘on attaining manhood’ and that ‘here he lived and died’.
Bryant (1929: 46) records that esiKlebheni was located ‘on the summit of a high
rounded ridge . . . overlooking the right bank of the middle Mkumbane .. .’
Senzangakhona’s grave, marked by a cairn, is on the site of his capital of which
extensive midden deposits survive.
Further to the south-east were the chiefdoms of kwaXulu and eLangeni.
Bryant (1929: 228) records that, in the decades before Shaka’s rise to pre-
eminence, the Xulu ‘occupied the country between the Mfule and White
Mfolozi rivers, on the seaward side of the Mtonjaneni heights’. Their chief was
Xabashe and his capital, which is not named, was ‘by the eLumbi hill, on the
170 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
left bank of the upper Mfule River’ (Bryant 1929: 101). Xabashe’s Langeni
contemporary was Mbenge, who was a close relative of Nandi, mother of
Shaka. Mbenge’s capital was iNguga, which Bryant (1929: 48) locates ‘by the
isiZiba stream below emTinemide (near modern Melmoth)’ and which Lugg
(1949: 126) places on the farm Bull Run. According to Bryant (1929: 125),
eLangeni incorporated ‘the hill-country about emTinemide, overlooking the
middle Mhlatuze river, on its northern side’.
To the north and north-east of kwaButhelezi, in and about the immediate
valley of the White Mfolozi River, were emaMbatheni, emaQungebeni, and
kwaZungu. The first of these chiefdoms was mostly to the north of the White
Mfolozi, ‘from the Sihlalo-Mabedlane line to that of the Ntlazatshe—Mfolozy’,
although by the end of the eighteenth century the Mbatheni had also settled on
the southern banks of the Mfolozi (Bryant 1929: 223). The Mbatheni chief at
the time of Phungashe was Khali, and his capital was beneath the Nhlazatshe
Mountain to which the population would retreat when threatened (Bryant
1929: 225). EmaQungebeni was further down the White Mfolozi River, in the
area of its confluence with the Mpembeni River. The Qungebeni chief in the
closing years of the eighteenth century and in the early years of the nineteenth
was Ntusi, and his capital was at the Ntuzuma Hill (Bryant 1929: 26, 130).
Further down-river was kwaZungu, which extended towards the Ondini Plain
and was centred on Chief Manzini’s capial kwaMpungabi, close the kwaHlo-
phekhulu Hill (Bryant 1929: 176-177).
South-west of kwaButhelezi was kwaMpungose. Bryant tells little of this
chiefdom, except that it was ‘towards the eTaleni hill’ (Bryant 1929: 29). The
names and location of the Mpungose chief and capital at the end of the
eighteenth century are not known, but for the purposes of this analysis it has
been assumed that the chiefdom was ruled from an umuzi close to eThaleni.
Finally, the chiefdom to the west of kwaButhelezi was kwaKhumalo. The
Khumalo house split in the late eighteenth century, with the senior section
remaining ‘inland of the Babanango Hill, and thence away over the Nondweni
River’, and the junior branch moving away to the north (Bryant 1929: 419).
The chief of the senior Khumalo house, which is of concern here, was, in the
late eighteenth century, Magugu, whom Bryant (1929: 420) states was suc-
ceeded by Nkonyeni, Mtezuka, and Mzungeni. James Stuart’s informant Ma-
bhonsa stated that ‘the amaKumalo of Mtezuka and Mzungeni lived about
Zungeni mountain and on further east. They also lived on the land subse-
quently built on by Sirayo ka Xongo’. Sihayo kaXongo lived in the Nquthu area ©
(Webb & Wright 1979: 24, 39). Additional information on the Khumalo
distribution comes from oral traditions collected during fieldwork at the site of
Ngabeni (Hall & Maggs 1979), when it was stated that the upper catchment of
the Ntinini River fell within the area occupied by the Khumalo under Mzun-
geni.
The literature does not contain information on the location of the capital
of this southern branch of the Khumalo during Phungashe’s time. During
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 171
fieldwork at Nqabeni, however, the present authors were told that a site in the
upper valley of the Ntinini River had once been occupied by the chief
Mzilikazi. This information is unlikely to be accurate, as Mzilikazi was a chief
in the junior Khumalo house and lived to the north. Nevertheless, it is possible
that the Ntinini Valley site was once the seat of a Khumalo chief, but of
different name; an interpretation that is supported by the nature of the site in
question, which is marked by extensive stone ruins and is a particularly large
example of a Type B settlement as defined by Hall & Maggs (1979). For the
purposes of this locational study, the Ntinini site has been taken as the capital
of kwaKhumalo.
The locations of the capitals of this group of chiefdoms provide the basis
for the set of Thiessen Polygons shown in Figure 3. This map reveals a
coincidence between the courses of the two principal rivers that run through the
area, the White Mfolozi and the Mhlathuze, and the boundaries of the
chiefdoms, a correspondence between projected territories and features of the
landscape that has emerged in other studies in which the Thiessen Polygon
technique has been applied (e.g. Cunliffe 1971), and one that suggests that the
locations of the capitals are essentially correct and the method of analysis
sound.
It is possible to test further the distributional model shown in Figure 3 by
seeing to what extent the boundaries deduced through the use of Thiessen
Polygons fall close to the natural features given as border markers in the oral
traditions. The place names mentioned earlier that have proved possible to
trace are shown in Figure 4, from which it can be seen that the coincidence with
the pattern of Thiessen Polygons is generally good. Thus the emCakweni Ridge
falls within kwaButhelezi and close to Phungashe’s capital. Other border
markers are the Mhlathuze River, Babanango Mountain, and Mpunga and
Ntuzuma hills, and it can be seen from Figure 4 that these do, indeed, fall on,
or a little beyond, the suggested perimeters of the chiefdom.
As mentioned earlier, few references to the borders of kwaZulu at the end
of the eighteenth century have been found. Figure 4 does show, however, that
the lower reaches of the Mkhumbane River fall within the territory demarcated
with the help of Thiessen Polygons. Similarly, the boundaries of both kwaXulu
and eLangeni, as given by Bryant, are in accord with the distribution of
chiefdoms suggested by the locations of the capitals.
In the cases of emaQungebeni, kwaZungu, and kwaMpungose there is too
little information preserved in the oral traditions to test the distribution
patterns, and the boundaries shown in Figure 3 must, for the time being, be
accepted uncritically. In the case of emaMbatheni, however, there is some
conflict between Bryant’s description of Chief Khali’s realm and the boundaries
projected with Thiessen Polygons. As Figure 4 shows, the territory demarcated
by the White Mfolozi River and by the Sihlalo, Mabedlana, and Nhlazatshe
mountains covers only the eastern part of the area predicted by the Thiessen
Polygon method, and overlaps into emaQungebeni. Nevertheless, there is some
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
172
‘poyloul UOSATOY UdSSOIY., OY} YIM poyoofoid sorepunog pue swOpyoryo Jo sjeyideD ‘¢ “B14
ebnbu; @
WU} 02
jua6ue 9a
oe) were asobuodyjemy
ninxemy
©
o njnzem>y
\
SS yy
— i @iuauqeyyse 5
nBunzem> ae a
2 ae 3 ——— IzayayIngemy
© iqebundyem 2 @ ie OJPWUNYeM>
q 1iuabue|z@®
ony
ee
i1uaujeqw~jewe ae f
+) Vy A
sjelidej @
Zz
Ws
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA
“SUOMNIPRI} [BIO WOIJ SsIoyIeU ATepunog pue ‘Soliwpunog uosAjog uassaryy, ‘sjeytdes “4 ‘SI
"Yy eznie|UW
+)
SSS x <_ |
UU) 0Z
sjeridejg
N
ilicius ener
ene
obueueqeg
zy ©
=
S
3 =
- Ae eee z :
4) IH eS
juaHUNZ ®
BS
ule|d !puni/)
“YIZO|OJY OLIN nuinby@
IIHH oVe|yIS UIEJUNOW @USIeZe|UN + E
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
reason for preferring the area demarcated by the Thiessen Polygons. Bryant
gives the location of Chief Khali’s capital as Nhlazatshe and it would seem
unlikely that the centre of the chief's power would lie on the very edge of the
chiefdom. In addition, the border shown in Figure 3 coincides with the course
of the White Mfolozi River, which would have formed a natural boundary
line.
For kwaKhumalo, the fit between the oral evidence and the boundaries
shown in Figure 3 is good. Bryant’s description of the Khumalo as inland of
Babanango Mountain is consistent with the opinion of James Stuart’s inform-
ant, because Nquthu is to the north-west of the Nondweni River and Zungeni
Hill lies on a line between this town and Babanango Mountain (Figure 4). In
addition, the Ntinini River runs through the area encompassed by the Thiessen
Polygon.
The method is thus shown to have produced a reasonable map of the
chiefdoms in the White Mfolozi-upper Mhlathuze area during the decades that
preceded the formation of the Zulu kingdom. Before using this map to examine
the use of natural resources by the different chiefdoms, however, the evidence
from archaeological excavation must be examined.
ARCHAEOLOGICAL EXCAVATIONS AT ELANGENI
As already mentioned, the site of eLangeni was pointed out by two
informants, Hluphuyise Buthelezi, who is closely related to the Buthelezi ruling
house and who was born late in the nineteenth century, and Mahlungwana
Gabela, a younger man who is related indirectly to the Buthelezi chief Phunga-
she (Wright 1975). It was suggested that eLangeni was the first in a series of
four imizi, all close to one another, that were used by Phungashe (Fig. 5), and
it must be presumed from the approximately known dates of Phungashe’s
chiefship that eLangeni was occupied in the closing years of the eighteenth
century. All four sites showed evidence of habitation, but eLangeni was chosen
for excavation because it had apparently the best preserved midden deposits,
thus promising information on the economy of Phungashe’s capital, and
because the site did not appear to have been much disturbed by ploughing.
The site is located on the gently sloping crest of a north-east facing spur,
beneath a spring that, according to the informants, had produced water for the
exclusive use of the Buthelezi chief. They were not able to identify any
surviving remnant of the actual umuzi, but inspection showed isolated patches
of ashy deposit and occasional potsherds in the shallow erosion cutting of a
farm road and at one other point on the upper, south-westerly part of the site.
Although farmers in the area told of shallow depressions that were visible after
the grass on the site had been burnt and could have been the positions of
dwellings within the umuzi, it was not possible to find any regular features of
this nature on the site. Consequently, when it came to laying out the area for
excavation, it was decided to concentrate on the patch of midden deposit at the
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 175
eLangeni
ye
Fig. 5. Locations of Phungashe’s four capitals.
upper end of the site. This decision was made for two principal reasons. Firstly,
this midden area seemed to be better preserved than the exposures in the side
of the farm road. Secondly, experience at Mgungundlovu, capital of the Zulu
king Dingane several decades after Phungashe’s chiefship located some twenty
kilometres to the south-east, had taught that middens at the upper end of a
royal umuzi, where the chief and his entourage would most likely have lived,
tend to be archaeologically richer.
For excavation the midden deposits were gridded and the turf removed
from one 10 x 8 m quadrant. It was apparent from the condition of the exposed
deposit that there had been some disturbance by ant-bear (Orycteropus afer),
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
leading to the conclusion that the stratigraphy of the midden would prove to be
disturbed considerably. In consequence it was decided to excavate in blocks of
8 m? and in 15cm spits; a strategy further justified by the probability that
eLangeni represents a single occupation.
As the aim was to recover a large sample of fauna and artefacts within the
comparatively short time available for excavation, it was necessary to employ a
recovery technique that would enable the midden deposits to be processed at a
rapid rate but without an unacceptable loss of information. The solution was to
use two mesh sizes: a coarse sieve of 25 mm/? and a finer mesh of 6,5 mm. The
use of the wider mesh allowed rapid processing of deposit, while the results of
sieving with the finer mesh allowed biases to be identified and corrected when
the results of the excavation were analysed. During the course of the excava-
tion a tally was kept of the number of buckets of deposit that were removed
from the excavation and processed through the coarse and fine sieve units
respectively. The average volume and weight of the bucket-loads were calcu-
lated and these figures used to convert the bucket tallies into approximations of
the volume and weight of deposits analysed.
The north and west sections through the eLangeni midden deposits are
shown in Figure 6. Most of the midden consisted of a brown soil high in clay
content but incorporating concentrations of ash and charcoal. This composition
is reflected clearly in the stratigraphy, although the sections also demonstrate a
degree of disturbance by animals. The topography at the base of the midden
was investigated carefully, but there was no evidence of the type of structure
found by Maggs (1982) at Mgoduyanuka.
Although the midden was excavated in regular units, it was decided to
treat the faunal and artefactual collections from eLangeni as a single com-
ponent. As has been noted, the evidence suggests that the site was occupied by
a single group of people and for a period considerably less than the span of a
single generation. It is therefore likely that the different lenses and slight
= — Brownsoill - =
Se ae Be hocaies Brown ¢ soil— ——
= S> So deaeat i ea
E—!
WEST SECTION
Fig. 6. Sections through the eLangeni midden.
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA wal
changes in deposit colour that were apparent in the course of excavation were
the result of different domestic activities, such as the cleaning out of fireplaces
or damaged dwellings, rather than the product of different and separate
occupations of the site. A further practical consideration was the degree of
disturbance within the midden, which would have made a fine level of stratigra-
phic division superficial. No attempt was made to test assumptions regarding
the date and span of occupation with radiocarbon determinations. Although
carbon samples were collected in the course of excavation, the problems of
calibration in the later phases of the Iron Age make the derivation of an
independent radiocarbon chronology for sites such as eLangeni extremely
difficult.
Approximately, 55,5 m°* of deposit were removed from the eLangeni
midden and passed through the sieve units. Of this total, 49 per cent was passed
through the finer mesh and 51 per cent through the coarser sieve. As no classes
of small artefacts, such as trade beads, were recovered from the midden, and as
almost all the potsherds were sufficiently large to be retained by the larger
mesh size, tests were carried out for systematic sample bias by examining the
recovery record of the two sieve units for different size classes of animal bone.
Table 1 shows the different proportions that nine classes of faunal specimens
contributed to the assemblages from the coarse and fine sieve units and from
both units combined. If the use of the larger, 25 mm’ mesh for 51 per cent of
the total sample had introduced a consistent loss of information, similar
percentages should be expected of the categories of larger bone, such as bovid
tooth rows and the identifiable bovid skeletal parts, and a smaller percentage
figure for the coarse sieve unit for smaller categories of bone, such as bone
flakes and miscellaneous skeletal parts. Table 1 shows that such a bias is not
apparent in the eLangeni assemblage, where there are only slight differences
between the percentages that make up the collections from the two sieve units.
TABLE 1
eLangeni: comparison of faunal recovery from coarse and fine sieve meshes.
25 mm? 6,5 mm?
Skeletal part mesh % mesh % Total %
Isolated bovid teeth 79 2,6 50 1e6 129 2-4
Bovid tooth rows 5) 0,2 4 Onl 9 0,1
Bovid skeletal parts 183 6,1 162 | 345 5,6
Enamel fragments 23 0,8 38 i 61 1,0
Skull fragments 83 2,8 83 2,6 166 eT |
Vertebral fragments 91 3,0 69 D1 160 2,6
Rib fragments 135 44 147 4,6 282 4,6
Bone flakes 634 ZAG 584 13-3 1 218 19,7
Misc. skeletal parts ge 59,0 2 049 64,3 3 820 61,6
Total 3 004 100 3 186 100 6 190 100
Note. Specimens removed directly from excavations not included.
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The test for sample bias included only the fauna recovered from the sieve
units; other, generally larger and fragile, faunal remains were also collected
directly from the excavation area. Table 2 shows the full faunal assemblage
broken down into different categories. This analysis, as well as the identifica-
tion of species and the estimates of age, was carried out by A. J. V. Brown with
the facilities of the Department of Archaeozoology at the Transvaal Museum,
Pretoria.
TABLE 2
eLangeni: total faunal sample.
Skeletal part Number % of total sample
Isolated bovid teeth 136 DD)
Bovid tooth rows 12 Om
Bovid skeletal parts 437 6,9
Other identified remains 1 0,0
Enamel fragments 61 1,0
Skull fragments 166 2,6
Vertebral fragments 160 jp5)
Rib fragments 282 45
Bone flakes AE.) 19,4
Misc. skeletal parts 3) IY) 60,7
Total 6 292 100
Minimum numbers of the different species that could be identified from
the assemblage are shown in Table 3. It is clear that, with the exceptions of the
lagomorph and the buffalo, which may have been hunted, the eLangeni
assemblage consists of domesticated species of which 25 per cent are either
sheep or goats and 68 per cent are cattle.
The tests for sample bias in the recovery technique employed for the
eLangeni midden can also be taken as confirmation that the ceramic assem-
TABLE 3
eLangeni: minimum numbers of individuals identified from faunal sample.
Species Subtotal Total % of sample
Ovis aries 2
Capra hircus 1 Total Ovis/Capra 10 5)
Ovis/Capra 7
Bos taurus 28 68
Syncerus caffer 2 Total
non-domesticates 3) 7
Indet. lagomorph 1
Total 41 100
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 179
blage is representative of the pottery used on the site. The composition of this
assemblage is given in Table 4, from which it can be seen that more than 95 per
cent consisted of undecorated and unburnished sherds, mostly from the bodies
of vessels. The remaining small proportion of sherds do, however, have
distinctive characteristics that allow an impression of the pottery industry from
this site. The vessels that have been partially reconstructed are shown in
Figure 7.
The vessels from eLangeni are simple in shape and comprise open-
mouthed bowls (Fig. 7F—G), U-shaped or incurved bowls (Fig. 7A—D, K) and
pots either without necks or with necks poorly defined (Fig. 7H—-L). It has been
possible to reconstruct thirteen vessels sufficiently to allow measurement.
TABLE 4
eLangeni: composition of the ceramic assemblage.
Decorated sherds Undecorated sherds Totals
matt burnish ochre black matt burnish ochre black
Rim sherds
rounded 1 0 1 0 240 1 10 2 255
flattened 0 0 1 1 74 0 16 2 94
pointed 0 0 0 0 35 1 1 1 38
Body sherds 13 4 il 2 7 534 7h 197 29 795i
Total sherds 14 4 3 3 7 883 173 224 34 8 338
Of this small sample, two are open-mouthed bowls, with a mean maximum
diameter, which is at the rim, of 12,8 cm. Nine U-shaped and incurved
bowls, which are categories grading into one another, were measurable, and
have a mean rim diameter of 13,1 cm and a mean maximum vessel diameter of
iSFem
Only two pots could be reconstructed sufficiently for measurement. One of
these (Fig. 7K) is a U-shaped vessel with a rim diameter of 10cm and a
maximum diameter of 12 cm. The other is a spherical pot with a rim diameter
of 12 cm and a body curving out to a maximum diameter of 20 cm. An attempt
had been made to drill a hole through this vessel, presumably to effect a repair.
Although the other vessels in this category are too badly fragmented for
measurement, it is clear that most of the pots from eLangeni are bag-shaped to
spherical.
As mentioned, the majority of the vessels were undecorated and unbur-
nished. It was noticeable, however, that when decoration and burnish did occur
they occurred together. Decoration is simple, consisting either of impressions
(as shown in Fig. 7P), or applied bosses, which are generally slightly elongated
(Fig. 7M-O).
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 7. The ceramic assemblage from eLangeni.
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 181
THE ECONOMIC SYSTEM OF KWABUTHELEZI
From the evidence for the boundaries of kwaButhelezi and neighbouring
chiefdoms and the faunal and ceramic assemblages from the eLangeni excava-
tions it is possible to outline the economic system of this region in the closing
years of the eighteenth century and the first decades of the nineteenth century.
In the first place, additional information about the use of domestic cattle,
which dominate the faunal assemblage from eLangeni, may be gained by
establishing the ages at which the animals died. The results of this analysis,
based on the study of dental eruption patterns, are shown in Table 5. It is clear
from these data that cattle were kept until they were fully adult, as the majority
of individuals died when they were older than 32 years. This age profile of the
eLangeni herd suggests that the emphasis was on rapid increase in herd size
rather than on meat yield, for it is generally accepted that the ratio of carcass
weight to fodder input is most favourable in sub-adult animals.
TABLE 5
eLangeni and Nqabeni: age of Bos taurus specimens on
basis of tooth eruption.
eLangeni Nqabeni
Age class no. % no. %
1. Less than 6 months 0 — 0 —
2. 6-15 months 1 4 Z, 6
3. 15-18 months 1 4 73 6
4. 18-24 months 3 11 2 6
5. 24-30 months 3 11 3 9
6. 30-42 months 3 iil + 12
7. Over 42 months 9 Sit 7 20
8. Breeding animals 6 Dal 8 23
9. Aged animals zy 7 6 18
Totals 28 100 34 100
In order to check that the eLangeni herd profile is a true reflection of
general economic practice, A. J. V. Brown was requested to re-analyse the
fauna from the contemporary site of Nqabeni, located in the neighbouring
chiefdom of kwaKhumalo and originally described by Hall & Maggs (1979).
The age structure of the Nqabeni herd is also given in Table 5 and the
assemblages from the two sites are compared in Figure 8. It is immediately
apparent that the herds kept in these two adjacent chiefdoms were very similar,
and it seems justified to assume that this strategy of herd management was
prevalent in this region during the period under discussion.
The observation that the eLangeni and Nqabeni herds were managed for
maximum increment is consistent with the historical hypothesis, summarized
earlier in this paper, that cattle were of key importance in the pre-Shakan
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
30
20
Age class
Fig. 8. Comparison of age profiles of cattle herds
from eLangeni and Nqabeni.
economic system in this part of southern Africa. It is also logical to expect that
access to suitable grazing and the quality of the sward were factors of concern
to chiefs attempting to increase the size of their herds.
How can the characteristics of the different types of grazing available
within the chiefdoms be assessed? A standard practice, reflected in, for
example, the work of both Daniel (1973) and Guy (1979), has been to take the
vegetation map published by Acocks (1953) as a model to distinguish between
probable winter, summer, and intermediate grazing areas and to examine the
dispersal of these economic resources in relation to the location of important
chiefdoms and their capitals. Such a model has been useful at a general scale
and has highlighted important correlations, but there are inadequacies in
Acocks’s map that make it less suitable for detailed analyses. The scale is such
that important local variations are lost, while the map itself is based on the
twentieth-century vegetation and does not take adequate account of the
dramatic changes in flora that have been effected by 13 millennia of farming
settlement (for a discussion of such changes see Hall 1981).
An alternative base for modelling pre-Shakan environments is Phillips’s
(1972) study of the ecology of the Thukela Basin and adjacent areas. Instead of
working within a structure of vegetation types, which may vary with specific
land-use practices, Phillips has combined information on landscape, soils,
precipitation, and temperature and has delimited a number of ‘bioclimatic
regions’. This approach has the advantage of allowing the researcher to
consider the possible states of different ecosystems under varying land-use
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 183
practices, rather than being bound by a classification drawn up from conditions
at a specific time.
The major influence on the distribution of Phillips’s bioclimatic regions is
topography. The deeply incised river valleys, such as those of the White
Mfolozi and the Mhlathuze, have produced bottomlands with low rainfall and
rich soils. The interfluvial uplands, in contrast, have far more precipitation and
soils which are often badly leached as a result of the percolation of nutrients
following heavy summer storms. Because of these marked contrasts in struc-
ture, bioclimatic regions can be divided into three categories. Bioclimatic
Region 4 (Phillips 1972: 107-119, 180-183), described as ‘highland to submon-
tane forest, short forest, thicket and short woodland/open woodland, humid to
subhumid’, forms a category by itself. These areas are now mostly an open,
short grassland, although in the past there would have been more extensive
forests and thickets. Thick sills of dolerite forming the interfluves between river
systems often provide deep soils which, however, have often been leached by
the heavy summer rains. As a result of this interplay between soil type and
climate, grasses tend to shoot early in the summer growing season when they
provide excellent grazing. Quality deteriorates during the summer months,
however, and pasturage in the winter is very poor, necessitating very low
densities of livestock.
In marked contrast is the environment of Bioclimatic Region 10 (Phillips
1972: 151-158, 195-198), described as ‘subarid riverine and lowland mixed
thicket and medium woodland/open woodland’. This region is confined largely
to the river valleys where the winter dry season is pronounced and where there
are frequently droughts during the summer months. Soils are from a wide
variety of geological formations, as the river valleys have generally cut through
the Karoo sedimentary series and into the Basement Complex. Low rainfall
and gentle gradients have precluded leaching and soils have in consequence a
high nutrient value, resulting in grazing that is palatable through the entire
year. Severe moisture stress, however, makes such grasslands particularly
vulnerable to overgrazing, and if productivity is not to fall they must be used
lightly or rested when grasslands are available in other areas.
The intermediate group of bioclimatic regions consists of the valley slopes
that lie between the upland plateaux and the valley bottoms. There is consider-
able variation in slope and aspect, but two clear sub-groups consisting of pairs
of regions can be identified. Bioclimatic Regions 6 & 8 (Phillips 1972: 125-144,
184-193) can be considered together and are, respectively, the subhumid and
mild subarid forms of the ‘upland mixed thicket and short woodland/open
woodland’. Soils are broadly similar, generally lying over Ecca formations and
inherently poor in quality. Rainfall is lower than in the higher-lying Bioclimatic
Region 4, and as a result grassland productivity is also low. In Bioclimatic
Region 6, which is the better watered, early spring grasses are palatable for a
while, but in Bioclimatic Region 8 even this early growth is of little value. In
neither area is pasturage palatable in the dry winter months.
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The second intermediate sub-category is made up of Bioclimatic Regions 2
and 3 (Phillips 1972: 83-106, 173-180). In contrast to regions 6 and 8, regions 2
and 3 tend to overlook the coastlands and therefore receive higher rainfall. This
allows the greater development of woody vegetation, and some shells of the
extensive forests of earlier years still stand. Again, soils tend to be leached and
pasturage, where it exists, is of poor quality.
These bioclimatic regions can serve as a framework for calculating poten-
tial productivity for livestock when different land-use strategies are employed.
In this part of the analysis, concern is restricted to these chiefdoms shown in
Figure 3 that have a complete set of borders delimited by Thiessen Polygons
—kwaButhelezi, kwaZulu, and (with the interpolation of a short stretch of the
eastern border) kwaXulu. It will become clear, however, that the deduced
land-use strategies of these three chiefdoms were probably also employed by
other late eighteenth-century chiefs in the study area. The areas of the three
different grazing types within each of the three chiefdoms are given in Table 6.
TABLE 6
Bioclimatic regions and total territory sizes for three chiefdoms.
Chiefdom Region 4 Region 10 Intermediate Total area
kwaButhelezi 94 66 167 O27,
kwaZulu 40 130 85 25
kwaXulu 44 226 300 570
Note. Figures are in km’.
As a basis for estimating livestock productivity, use has been made of
Mentis & Duke’s (1976) study of the carrying capacities for wild herbivores of
Phillips’s different bioclimatic regions. Adjustments have been made where
necessary, some of which are rough approximations, while others are based on
informed assessments. Estimated carrying capacities over different grazing
periods are given in Table 7. The unit of measurement is the Animal Unit
(A.U.), which is defined as a mature domestic beast weighing 456 kg (Mentis &
Duke 1976). Such a weight is probably considerably in excess of the size of a
beast to be found in the eighteenth-century chiefdoms, but the A.U. is
nevertheless a useful comparative measure.
TABLE 7
Carrying capacities of bioclimatic regions under different grazing periods.
Region Summer only Winter only All year
4 67 N/A 20
Intermediate 38) N/A N/A
10 N/A 28 14
Note. Figures are in Animal Units/km?.
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 185
The estimate for the carrying capacity of Bioclimatic Region 4 with
summer use only is taken directly from Mentis & Duke’s figure of 1,5 ha per
A.U. These authors assumed, however, that winter productivity in these high
grasslands would be the same as in the summer months, an assumption that is
clearly inappropriate in the present study. On the basis of comments by
N. Tainton (University of Natal, 1979 pers. comm.) the more realistic estimate
has been adopted that each Animal Unit will require 5 ha if kept in Bioclimatic
Region 4 for the entire year.
It has been more difficult to arrive at a reasonable figure for the intermedi-
ate grazing types (Bioclimatic Regions 2, 3, 6, and 8). Mentis & Duke state
that, at low density, wild herbivores can be kept on these grassland types all
year, but Phillips’s (1972) comments on grass quality in the winter months
suggest that this would not apply to domestic stock if supplementary feeds were
not available. Therefore the intermediate bioclimatic regions have been
assumed to be unusable in winter and 3 ha have been allowed for each animal
grazing in summer, a conservative estimate based on Mentis & Duke’s figures
for the same grazing period.
In the case of Bioclimatic Region 10, the valley areas, Mentis & Duke
have been followed, allowing 7,2 ha per A.U. if the grasses are exploited
throughout the year. For the situation in which stock are removed for 6 months
the carrying capacity has simply been doubled.
There are three possible options that the chiefs of kwaButhelezi, kwaZulu,
and kwaXulu could have employed in utilizing these grazing lands available for
their cattle herds. First, livestock could have been kept in the same bioclimatic
regions at comparatively low densities throughout the year. Secondly, the
entire herd of each chiefdom could have been moved between winter and
summer grazing areas in the form of the general transhumance often assumed
for this sort of environment. Thirdly, chiefs and local headmen could have
adopted a more flexible approach, moving some animals but leaving others in
suitable grazing-areas throughout the year.
Taking into account the configuration of bioclimatic regions within each set
of boundaries, it has been possible to calculate the different levels of productiv-
ity that could have been obtained by each chiefdom using each of the three
options. The results are shown in Table 8. In calculating herd size with the first
land-use option, in which livestock are not moved, the areas of Bioclimatic
Regions 4 and 10 given in Table 6 have been converted by means of the
carrying capacity estimates given in Table 7; note that as it has been assumed
that livestock could not have been kept in the intermediate bioclimatic regions
throughout the year, this first land-use option would not involve the utilization
of Bioclimatic Regions 2, 3, 7 and 8.
If the entire herd of a chiefdom were to have been moved on a seasonal
basis, the limiting factor for herd size would have been the lesser in carrying
capacity of either Bioclimatic Region 10 or Bioclimatic Region 4 combined with
the intermediate areas. For all three chiefdoms this constraint is, in fact,
186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 8
Projected herd sizes for chiefdoms using three different land-use strategies.
Chiefdom Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
(no transhumance) (full transhumance) (mixed strategy)
kwaButhelezi:
Animal Units 2 804 1 848 3128
land utilized 49% — 29% 66%
kwaZulu:
Animal Units 2 620 3 640 4 200
land utilized 67% 719% 100%
kwaXulu:
Animal Units 3 964 6 328 7 208
land utilized 47% 65% 81%
imposed by available winter grazing lands in Bioclimatic Region 10. In each
case, therefore, the livestock-carrying capacity with this second option can be
derived by multiplying the area of Bioclimatic Region 10, given in Table 6, by
the livestock density figure for the region if the grass is used for only 6 months
of the year (Table 7).
Herd sizes given in Table 8 for the third option, when transhumance is
combined with perennial grazing according to the specific availability of differ-
ent environments within each chiefdom, have been calculated by first estimat-
ing the number of livestock that could have been carried when Bioclimatic
Region 10 was used in the winter only, then checking that all the summer
requirements of this itinerant herd could have been met with available inter-
mediate bioclimatic regions (allocating a portion of Bioclimatic Region 4 for
summer grazing if necessary), and finally by calculating the number of addi-
tional animals that could have been kept perennially on the remaining portion
of Bioclimatic Region 4.
Table 8 allows these three strategies to be evaluated in two different ways.
On the one hand, there are clear differences in the numbers of Animal Units
that each strategy permits. Secondly, the percentage of the total territory of the
chiefdom that each strategy utilizes gives some measure of the efficiency of
each herding system.
In the case of kwaButhelezi, it is clear from Table 8 that the shortage of
winter grazing would have made straightforward transhumance impracticable,
allowing only a comparatively small-sized herd and utilizing only 29 per cent of
the Buthelezi grazing lands. The first option of perennial pasturing would have
been more productive, allowing a significant increase in herd size but still
utilizing only 49 per cent of the chiefdom. Clearly the most productive land-use
strategy would have been the third option, for this would have allowed a herd
size more than double the size that could have been supported by mass
transhumance alone, and would have involved the utilization of some 66 per
cent of the land within kwaButhelezi.
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 187
Circumstances were clearly different in kwaZulu. This chiefdom had an
adequate supply of winter grazing, with the result that large-scale transhumance
would have been a far more attractive option. Nevertheless, Table 8 shows that
a further increase in productivity could have been obtained by pasturing some
animals in these parts of Bioclimatic Region 4 that were not required for the
seasonal relief of the lowlands. It is apparent that the situation was similar in
kwaXulu. Here again, large-scale transhumance would have been a logical
management system, but some surplus upland grazing would have been avail-
able for the year-round maintenance of some additional stock.
How can it be established which, if any, of these three options was actually
employed by each chiefdom? It is not reasonable to assume that in each case
the land was used automatically to its fullest potential; other, unknown con-
Straints may have been in play and there are many situations in which
maximization cannot be assumed automatically (Hall 1981). One test is to
examine site location in relation to the different grazing types, with the
possibility in mind that the location of the chief’s capital may reflect the
predominant pattern of land-use within his chiefdom.
In Figure 9 the position of the capitals and the network of Thiessen
Polygons have been superimposed on the map of bioclimatic regions. Imme-
diately a strong correlation is apparent. Capitals are mostly located on or close
to the boundaries of bioclimatic regions and in the more productive Bioclimatic
Regions 4 and 10 rather than in the intermediate areas of grazing.
In addition, the positions of the capitals reflect the different optimal
land-use strategies for each chiefdom. Thus the capital of kwaButhelezi is
situated on the edge of Bioclimatic Region 4, reflecting the equal importance of
this region, on which about half the Buthelezi herd could have been grazed
perennially, and the combination of Bioclimatic Region 10 and the intermedi-
ate grazing areas, between which the remaining half of the livestock could have
been moved with the seasons. The locations of the capitals of emaMbatheni,
kwaMpungose and, perhaps, kwaKhumalo suggest that these chiefdoms might
have managed their herds in similar manner. In the same way, the locations of
the capitals of kwaZulu and kwaXulu reflect the overriding importance of a
transhumance system in which winter grazing was crucial, a system probably
also used in eLangeni, kwaZungu, and emaQungabeni (Fig. 9).
Thus this exercise in locational analysis and economic modelling suggests
that the late eighteenth- and early nineteenth-century chiefdoms in this area
adopted strategies that took best advantage of the possibilities of the environ-
ment. Although there is no theoretical basis for assuming maximization of
cattle production, it does seem to have been applied in this case, a finding quite
consistent with the faunal evidence from the sites of eLangeni and Nqabeni,
indicating that a culling policy was adopted that would have allowed herd size
to have been increased as rapidly as possible.
Further information about the economy of kwaButhelezi and neighbouring
chiefdoms comes from settlement architecture and ceramic assemblages. In
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
188
“SUOISOI OBUIT|OOIG puke ‘suIOpyoryo ‘sjettdea *6 “S17
te} fo) °
30 | OO 3
te} ° °
Bre eee
fo} fo}
? tooo)
9°20 °°?
e382
00 ©
To) dq
~ oo
o_o
° 8 ot +
hee oN + + +
bo Oe ft + + + + + +
2 50 2 + + + + + + +
+ O°O OF + + + + + +
128 te a cee
a 2° + +
+ + on + +
+ Ff 5 ap) AP ap
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + +
+ + + +
t+ + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + @ ects
+ + + + +
ieee at fe ae sjelidey ©
+ + + + + +
+ + qr oP oP 7a
+ + + +
+ + + + +
+ + + + + me
ace f+ + Ol pro]
+ + + + + +
+ + + +
+ es areipeuaiu [|
+ + + + + + J
+ + + + + 4+
+ + + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+
+
+
+
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 189
using these sources to infer elements of economic systems, two working
assumptions are made: first, that pottery-making was predominantly a female
activity with the design elements that provide the defining characteristics of a
ceramic assemblage passing from mother to daughter or between women, and
secondly, that the design of imizi was determined by men with architectural
traditions passing from father to son or between men. These patterns of
behaviour are deduced from the ethnographic literature, which indicates that
women were responsible for cooking and brewing, the main activities involving
pottery vessels, while the livestock herds, the requirements of which dictated
the design of the village, were the preserve of the men (Bryant 1949; Krige
1965). Although such ethnographic parallels are dangerous, they are also a
fruitful source of tentative models for interpreting the later prehistory of areas
such as these.
Sites such as eLangeni and most of the capitals of neighbouring chiefdoms
today contain no apparent evidence of their architecture. Clearly, structures
were made from perishable materials—wood, grass and unfired clay. In the
western part of the study area, however, the situation was different, for in these
regions large parts of each umuzi were built with stone, with the result that
information concerning settlement design is available today. A large area has
been searched for these settlements and, as a result, it has been possible to
classify sites by their design and to study the distributional properties of each
settlement category (Hall 1981). Here the concern is with a group of sites
Known as Type B, which are distinctive, dispersed over a wide area, and were
utilized during the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries (Hall 1981).
Figure 10 shows the site of Nqabeni, a typical Type B site and the one from
which the faunal assemblages described earlier in this paper were excavated
(Hall & Maggs 1979).
An overall impression of the dispersal of Type B sites has been given in an
earlier publication (Hall & Maggs 1979) and it is apparent, from comparison
with Bryant’s (1929) map, that there is a broad coincidence with the areas
covered by kwaKhumalo and by kwaMabaso, a chiefdom that, in the years
before the establishment of the Zulu kingdom, extended westwards beyond the
Khumalo domain. What is of interest in the present context, however, is the
strong correlation between the easternmost line of Type B sites and the
boundaries between kwaButhelezi, kwaMpungose, and kwaKhumalo projected
with the use of Thiessen Polygons (Fig. 11). This coincidence is unlikely to be
the result of sample bias as much of the area falling within kwaButhelezi was
searched intensively for stone-built settlements. Those recorded, however,
were not of Type B.
There is no apparent ecological or functional explanation for the eastward
limit of the Type B dispersal. Reference to Figure 9 will show that there is no
coincidence with environment, as the occurrence of Type B sites falls off
sharply within an expanse of Bioclimatic Region 4. Similarly, availability of raw
materials for settlement construction is not likely to have been a factor.
190 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 10. Nqabeni, a typical Type B site in kwaKhumalo.
Although wood must have been available to build eLangeni and the other three
Buthelezi capitals, this probably came from the wooded slopes of the Baba-
nango Plateau where it falls away towards the White Mfolozi River in the
eastern part of the chiefdom. The western part, in contrast, was probably
treeless and similar to the lands of kwaKhumalo, a deduction that is supported
by the occurrence of simple, single enclosures built of stone in western
kwaButhelezi (Hall & Maggs 1979; Hall 1981).
It seems probable that Figure 11 reflects a ‘cultural’ boundary, that is to
Say, a distinction reflecting community identity rather than ecological or econ-
omic necessity. Thus in kwaKhumalo and, probably, in kwaMabaso men
designed complex, multiple enclosures for their livestock, while in kwaButhel-
ezi single enclosures were preferred, built of wood or, when this material was
not available, of stone.
In contrast, pottery design was noticeably similar in the two chiefdoms.
Comparison of the vessels from the Buthelezi site of eLangeni, illustrated in
Figure 7, with the ceramics from Nqabeni (Hall & Maggs 1979) shows that the
two assemblages are clearly part of a common tradition. Similar bag-shaped
pots and spherical pots occur at both sites and the bowls are also much the
1
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA
‘(TR61 IIH Wor suoneoo] ous) SWOpyoryo Jo sarzepuNog oy} puke sous g odAT Jo UONNGIISIP YL “TT “Sty
asobuodpemy
IZajayuINGemy
luaujeqyjewe
192 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
same. On both sites the rarity and the form of decoration are definitive
characteristics. Thus, although the ceramic evidence is less substantial than the
testimony of architectural style, there is little sign that women were designing
their domestic utensils differently in the two chiefdoms.
This patterning in the artefactual configurations of the study area is
consistent with the economic model for the region which has been presented by
historians and was summarized at the beginning of this paper. Thus the borders
of the chiefdoms were politically important, incursions were contested by the
chiefs, and the forms of male-dominated activities, such as settlement design,
were passed down through lineages within the boundaries of chiefdoms.
Women, in contrast, moved freely between chiefdoms as marriages were
arranged across borders. The women took with them traditional concepts of
pottery design, with the result that similar ceramic assemblages are found over
a broad region. It can be assumed that livestock were also moved between
chiefdoms as vital components in the marriage settlements.
A glimpse of this system in operation can be gained by taking Senzanga-
khona’s matrimonial history as an example. The Zulu chief appears to have had
about sixteen wives during his lifetime (Bryant 1929). Of the women whose
parental origin is recorded, four appear to have been from other clans within
kwaZulu. A further five brides, however, came from other chiefdoms: Nandi
from eLangeni, Mpikase from emaQungebeni, okaSondaba from kwa-
Buthelezi, Magulana from the Ngadini chiefdom, which was in the Mfule River
Valley downstream from kwaXulu, and Ncaka from the Qwabe, a chiefdom in
the valley of the Mhlathuze River. Despite this extensive marriage network,
however, there was frequent friction between kwaZulu and neighbouring
chiefdoms; indeed, Bryant records that Phungashe and Senzangakhona fought
throughout their long reigns.
In conclusion, an overview can be offered of the economy of kwaButhelezi
and neighbouring chiefdoms in the decades before Shaka absorbed such
independent polities into the Zulu kingdom. KwaButhelezi would seem to have
been an average-sized chiefdom, and Phungashe probably controlled an area
similar in extent to neighbouring kwaZulu. Cattle were an important element in
the economy, and there was an emphasis on increasing herd size rapidly, both
in kwaButhelezi and in neighbouring chiefdoms such as kwaKhumalo.
KwaButhelezi had essentially an upland economy. Little winter grazing
was available, and so it is logical to expect that about half the national herd
were pastured permanently in the most favourable of the upland grazing areas.
The remaining animals were probably moved between river valley and valley
margins with the seasons. In contrast, neighbouring chiefdoms such as kwa-
Zulu, where more winter grazing was available, moved the majority of animals
on a regular basis.
There was a certain amount of ambiguity in the relations between neigh-
bouring chiefdoms. Politically, there was often a state of conflict, with terri-
torial differences promoting minor skirmishes. In this sphere, the boundaries
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM IN AFRICA 193
between chiefdoms were clear and they were further emphasized by artefactual
distinctions such as the differing designs of settlements. Economically, how-
ever, there was frequent interaction. Chiefs took brides from the houses of
neighbouring chiefs in marriage settlements involving the transfer of livestock.
It may be presumed that similar transactions took place at lower levels in the
lineages, albeit for smaller Jobolo payments. Such free movement of women is
reflected in the cosmopolitan nature of ceramic design, which reveals a tradi-
tion that did not respect the borders of chiefdoms.
Although the results of this study cannot indicate explicit reasons for the
origin of the Zulu kingdom, it is felt that they do contribute to the understand-
ing of the economic geography of this part of south-eastern Africa during a
crucial phase of its history. It has been shown that diverse sources of evidence,
such as faunal assemblages, oral traditions and ceramic collections, can be used
within an appropriate methodological framework to provide illumination of
historical problems.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We are grateful for assistance by S. and G. Johnson during fieldwork, by
A. J. V. Brown and E. A. Voigt in the analysis of faunal collections, and by
T. Maggs, K. Rial, M. L. Wilson and J. Wright in the preparation of this
manuscript.
REFERENCES
Acocks, J. P. H. 1953. Veld types of South Africa. Mem. Bot. Survey. S. Afr. 28: 1-192.
Bryant, A. T. 1929. Olden times in Zululand and Natal. London: Longmans, Green and Co.
Bryant, A. T. 1949. The Zulu people. Pietermaritzburg: Shuter and Shooter.
CunutFFE, B. 1971. Aspects of hill-forts and their cultural environments. Jn: JEsson, M. &
Hitt, D. eds. The Iron Age and its hill-forts: 53-70. Southampton: University Archaeologi-
cal Society for Department of Archaeology, University of Southampton.
DaNniEL, J. B. 1973. A geographical study of pre-Shakan Zululand. S. Afr. geogr. J.
55(1): 23-31.
Forp, J. 1971. The role of the trypanosomiases in African ecology: a study of the tsetse fly
problem. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Guy, J. 1970. Cattle-keeping in Zululand. Unpublished paper, School of Oriental and African
Studies, London.
Guy, J. 1977. Ecological factors in the rise of Shaka and the Zulu Kingdom. Unpublished
paper, University of Natal, Pietermaritzburg.
Guy, J. 1979. The destruction of the Zulu Kingdom: the civil war in Zululand, 1879-1884.
London: Longman.
HaccETrT, P. 1965. Locational analysis in human geography. London: Edward Arnold.
Hatt, M. 1980. The ecology of the Late Iron Age in Zululand. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis,
University of Cambridge.
HALL, M. 1981. Settlement patterns in the Zululand Iron Age: an ecological interpretation.
Oxford: British Archaeological Reports.
HALL, M. & Maaes, T. 1979. Nqabeni: a later Iron Age site in Zululand. Goodwin Series.
S. Afr. archaeol. Soc. 3: 159-176.
HaAmmonn, N. 1972. Locational models and the site of Labaantun: a classic Maya centre. In:
CLARKE, D. L. ed. Models in archaeology: 757-800. London: Methuen.
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Hepces, D. W. 1978. Trade and politics in southern Mozambique and Zululand in the
eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, School of Oriental and
African Studies, London.
KriGE, E. J. 1965. The social system of the Zulus. Pietermaritzburg: Shuter and Shooter.
Luae, H. C. 1949. Historic Natal and Zululand. Pietermaritzburg: Shuter and Shooter.
Maccs, T. 1982. Mgoduyanuka: terminal Iron Age settlement in the Natal Drakensberg. Ann.
Natal Mus. 25(1): 83-113.
Marks, S. 1967. The rise of the Zulu Kingdom. Jn: OLIiver, R. ed. The middle age of African
history: 85-91. London: Oxford University Press.
Mentis, M. T. & Duke, R. R. 1976. Carrying capacities of natural veld in Natal for large wild
herbivores. S. Afr. J. Wildlife Res. 6(2): 65-74.
PHILLIPS, J. 1972. The agricultural and related development of the Tugela Basin and its influent
surrounds. Pietermaritzburg: Natal Town and Regional Planning Commission.
Wess, C. DE B. & Wricut, J. B. 1976. The James Stuart Archive 1. Pietermaritzburg:
University of Natal Press.
Wess, C. DE B. & Wricut, J. B. 1979. The James Stuart Archive 2. Pietermaritzburg:
University of Natal Press.
WricutT, J. 1976. Interviews with Hluphuyise Buthelezi and Mahlungwana Gabela. Unpu-
blished report, Department of Ethnoarchaeology, Natal Museum, Pietermaritzburg.
WriGHtT, J. 1978. Pre-Shakan age-group formation among the northern Neguni. Natalia.
8: 22-30.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; °. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
MARTIN HALL
&
KATHLEEN MACK
THE OUTLINE OF AN
EIGHTEENTH-CENTURY ECONOMIC SYSTEM
IN SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
VOLUME 91 PART 3. MARCH 1983 | ISSN 0303-2515
QH
1
NH
OF THE SOUTH AFRIC
‘MUSEUM
CAPE ‘TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FIsCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74; 627-634. \
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
KOHN, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 91 Band
March 1983 Maart
Part 3 Deel
S S
Sowing No SO
A REASSESSMENT OF THE RELATIONSHIPS
OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA) AND A
NEW CLASSIFICATION OF
DICYNODONTS
By
MICHAEL A. CLUVER
&
GILLIAN M. KING
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
il WOES, See) LS, 3, taut), SS, S, FO),
6(1, t.—p.i.), 7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
INGLED, 5 ior), ICES), WO), 27, 3B), BAG), 23, 25), AS)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 043 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A REASSESSMENT OF THE RELATIONSHIPS OF
PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA (REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA) AND A
? NEW CLASSIFICATION OF DICYNODONTS
By
MICHAEL A. CLUVER
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
GILLIAN M. KING
Department of Zoology and University Museum, Oxford
(With 40 figures)
[MS accepted 19 October 1982]
ABSTRACT
The type specimens of several genera of Permian dicynodonts have been re-examined and,
where possible, prepared. Diagnoses of the following genera have been drawn up: Eodicyno-
don, Endothiodon, Pristerodon, Tropidostoma, Rhachiocephalus, Oudenodon, Aulacephalo-
don, Pelanomodon, Dicynodon, Robertia, Diictodon, Emydops, and Kingoria. Other genera
have also been discussed.
Suites of derived characters have been formulated for each genus and used to draw up a
cladogram of the phylogenetic relationships of the genera. A classification has been erected
from the cladogram, using a methodology based on cladistic principles.
CONTENTS
PAGE
MMERO CU CHLOMEN pig pe eee oe eas Se ee es ne ya ae 196
Redescription and diagnoses of Permian genera.................. 198
GenussZodicynodon batty, 1974 seme een aa aaa 198
Genus Hndotiiodon Owem, 1876... sa ne ee 207
Genusveristerodon Tiuxley, 1868) 555: Sa sane eee 209
Genus ijopidostoma) (Seeley, 1889) 5.6 a2 4- a5 et ae ane a 214
GenussKhachiocepnalus (Owens 18/6). ae ee: aaa 218
Genussocyclops Broom, l9ISne. oe oa ae en 220
Genusvelanycyclops Broom, 1932) 4 ae erst ete eo eee Pi
Genus Neomegacyclops Boonstra, 1958 ..................... Upp)
Note on the large tuskless dicynodonts...................... 223
Genus Oudenodon Owen, 1860)... 30... ese see ee eae 223
Genus Aulacephalodon (Owen, 1844)....................05. Mail
Genus Pelanomodon Broom, 1938 ..................0.00055 231
GenussDieynodonOweMn, U845.. oo. hae sein ee 3 eae eee oe 234
INoteron the lange tusked/dicynodonts= a2) 4) oe ene 238
Genus Kobertia Boonstray I948i. a ae ee eee eee ee ee 239
Genera Brachyuraniscus Broili & Schréder, 1935, and Brachy-
DLOSOpuUs Olson WOSI. eco crs cleats cay eis eS Se ges 242
Genus Ductodon Broom, 1937). 25. oc oe eee tee. 243
Genussemiydops Broom 1912. 2). 2o 5 ee Seer es oe 243
GenusekingojigiGox, W959" en saw dees eee eee oe Ave
195
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 91 (3), 1983: 195-273, 40 figs.
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PAGE
Phylogenetic analysis of relationships between Permian dicynodont
POMETA Wy eee eee Oe Cais Dae Seer see erate es cee 23
A classiliciation of dicynodontsia.e nee oe eae ee ceeaee 265
ConGlusionsy. 4:66 . suo Pteontare eke ree eae ea eee 268
Acknowledgements: 2s Sint. ea eon oon ee ras ee 269
References... 2.0... acct eb ENS os ee rae Se i ee 269
Abbreviations 2.2520. 2:02) Seance oe te oe eee eerie BZ
INTRODUCTION
The Dicynodontia were a large group of herbivorous therapsids that
probably arose during the Permian. By the end of the Permian they were the
dominant herbivorous element of the fauna, but subsequently diminished in
numbers with only a few representatives surviving into the Triassic. There is
evidence that some forms were distributed world-wide.
The earliest forms generally recognized as belonging with the Dicynodon-
tia (sensu Romer 1966) are from the Tapinocephalus Zone of the Beaufort
Group of South Africa. These were small animals (skull length up to approxi-
mately 10 cm) that retained postcanine teeth but lacked incisors. By contrast
the latest Triassic forms were large animals (skull length approximately 570 cm)
that had lost all trace of teeth and had developed to the full the horny beak
characteristic of the group.
In their skull characteristics dicynodonts constitute one of the most special-
ized of the therapsid groups. The preorbital region is short and in later forms
the premaxilla and maxilla are edentulous, apart from the variably present pair
of large canine tusks. In these forms a horny beak, similar to that of chelonians,
is generally considered to have been present. The zygomatic arch flares laterally
and is emarginated ventrally so that it becomes a narrow bar running poster-
iorly and dorsally in the skull. Posterior to the zygoma the squamosal flares
laterally and is overlain anteriorly by the quadrate and quadratojugal. The
lateral plate of the squamosal and the external surface of the zygoma provide
attachment areas for jaw adductor musculature (the adductor externus latera-
lis), a situation unknown in therapsids outside the cynodonts. The quadrate
forms a double condyle. The articular surface of the lower jaw is shallowly
concave, then convex more posteriorly, and permits a sliding action on the
quadrate. It is generally agreed (Watson 1948; Crompton & Hotton 1967;
Cluver 1971) that such sliding would allow areas of the palate and the lower jaw
to come into contact and triturate food matter. Protraction of the lower jaw
would also allow the anterior tips of the upper and lower jaws to make contact
and effect a ‘beak-bite’.
In the palate the lateral pterygoid process is much reduced from the
pelycosaur condition and directed anteriorly. A secondary palate formed by the
posterior extension of the premaxilla and the medial extension of the palatines
is present in later forms and is incipient in early representatives. Palatal teeth
are lost.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 197
The lower jaw does not have a coronoid bone. A mandibular fenestra
between dentary and angular is present, and adductor muscles inserted on the
outer surface of the jaw ramus as well as internally.
This character suite is used to define the Dicynodontia in the present
paper. Any forms that fall within this definition will be referred to informally as
dicynodonts, rather than dicynodontoids, dicynodontids, and so on.
Although there is a growing body of knowledge concerning the mor-
phology and functional anatomy of dicynodonts, it has proved difficult to
synthesize individual contributions since the taxonomy of the complete group
has not been adequately worked out, despite the efforts of several workers
(Ciee- Moenen) 1953; (Cox 1959: Keyser 1975; Keyser & (Cruickshank 1979;
Cluver & Hotton 1981). Hammer & Cosgriff (1981) noted recently that ‘the
unresolved issues [touched upon here] are typical of the currently fluid state of
dicynodont taxonomy and emphasize how little is understood about the natural
groupings within this infraorder’.
There are various reasons for this state of affairs: the abundance of
dicynodont material, the numerous taxa created on inadequately prepared and
figured material, the loss of key type specimens, and the intractability of the
matrix in which the earliest forms have been found. The present authors
believe that any attempt at classification of dicynodonts should be based as far
as possible on the re-examination of original type material, and that only type
material that is reasonably well preserved and prepared should be considered.
Forms that cannot be adequately diagnosed (especially incomplete or single
specimens) should be left for the present incertae sedis until further preparation
or additional specimens make their relationships clearer.
To this end type and other material in South Africa, the United States, and
Great Britain was re-examined by either or both of the authors. Where
possible, further preparation of the specimens was carried out. Since most of
the described species and genera are of Upper Permian age and the taxonomy
is most confused among these, it was decided to pay particular attention to the
establishment of adequate diagnoses of these forms. The Triassic forms, in any
case, have recently been reviewed by Keyser & Cruickshank (1979).
Furthermore, it was felt that diagnoses should as far as possible take into
account derived characters, as opposed to shared primitive characters, so that
relationships among genera could be established according to methods of
Hennigian systematics.
The review has been confined to the generic level. The status of species
within genera has not been discussed but it is recognized that this must be
attempted at some future stage.
The genera reviewed and classified in this paper are: Eodicynodon,
Endothiodon, Pristerodon, Tropidostoma, Rhachiocephalus, Oudenodon,
Aulacephalodon, Pelanomodon, Dicynodon, Robertia, Diictodon, Emydops,
Myosaurus, Cistecephalus, and Kingoria. All these genera, with the exception
of Eodicynodon and Myosaurus, are from the Upper Permian of the Beaufort
198 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Group of the South African Karoo Supergroup. Eodicynodon is from the upper
Waterford Formation of the preceding Ecca Group (Rubidge & Ocelofsen
1981), while Myosaurus is from the base of the Triassic of the Beaufort Group.
Assignment of localities to the various stratigraphic zones of the Beaufort
Group follows the work of Kitching (1977), which in the opinion of the authors
presents the most practical guide to Karoo biostratigraphy.
REDESCRIPTION AND DIAGNOSIS OF PERMIAN GENERA
Genus Eodicynodon Barry, 1974
Type species Eodicynodon oosthuizeni Barry, 1974
Type material
Skull lacking anterior part of snout and lower jaw, ROZ 1.
Locality
Zwartskraal, Prince Albert district, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Upper Waterford Formation, Ecca Group (Rubidge & Oelofsen 1981).
Remarks on the type specimen
In a series of papers Barry (1972, 1974, 1975) described the stratigraphic
occurrence, morphology, and systematic position of Eodicynodon oosthuizent.
Barry’s 1974 paper contains a full description of the specimen. The most
important features of the skull that set it apart from other dicynodonts are the
paired vomers and premaxillae and the strong lateral processes of the ptery-
goids (Figs 1-2). These features represent the primitive therapsid condition as
seen in pelycosaurs.
Description of additional specimens of Eodicynodon
Barry (1974) listed other specimens from the same locality as the holotype
ROZ 1, and two of these specimens (ROZ 9 and 11) have since been prepared
out of extremely hard matrix with the aid of dilute acetic acid to expose all
bone completely. Details of these specimens complement what has already
been described of Eodicynodon and, in view of the position of Eodicynodon as
unquestionably the most primitive South African dicynodont known, it is felt
warranted to describe the additional specimens in some detail. ROZ 9 is an
incomplete skull with lower jaw and associated left forelimb and manus (Figs
3-6); ROZ 11 is an incomplete skull lacking lower jaw (Figs 7-8). The
estimated original lengths of the two skulls are 80 mm (ROZ 9) and 70 mm
(ROZ 11). The following description is based on both specimens.
A striking feature of the maxilla is a deep notch in the palatal rim in front
of the well-developed tusk (Figs 5-6), so that in lateral view the rim is deeply
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 199
Fig. 1. Eodicynodon oosthuizeni. Type specimen ROZ 1, from Zwartskraal, Prince
Albert. A. Dorsal view. B. Ventral view.
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Eodicynodon oosthuizeni. Type specimen ROZ 1. Stereophoto-
graph of skull in ventral view. Scale in cm.
incised in a way not seen in other dicynodonts. In ROZ 9 an empty socket
medial to the base of the right tusk, as well as what appears to be the base of a
small, broken-off tooth in the corresponding position on the left side, indicate
that teeth other than the tusks were present. In ROZ 11 there are two small
teeth on the alveolar margin in line with the centre of the tusk. Two teeth are
also present medial to the tusk. On the right side one small and one larger
tooth are present, but on the left side only a single tooth can be made out.
Small teeth are also present on the lower jaw of ROZ 9 (see below).
In the midline, where the premaxilla meets the vomerine interchoanal
septum, a small portion of the premaxillary crest is preserved.
In the upper part of the incompletely preserved snout of ROZ 9 the floor
of a fairly extensive maxillary antrum lies behind the root of the tusk. A
narrow, slit-like opening leads through the anteroventral border of the orbit
into the antrum on the left side; no counterpart of this opening can be seen on
the right side of the skull.
The choanal opening in the palate differs from that of other dicynodonts in that
a narrow, slit-like portion extends far forward to the level of the centre of the base
of the tusk. Posteriorly the choana becomes shallow and wide between the
pterygoids. The ventral edge of the vomerine septum is excavated as a deep trough
widening posteriorly to merge with the interpterygoidal vacuity. In the roof of the
trough a longitudinal suture indicates the meeting of the paired vomers.
The palatine has a swollen anteroventral palatal portion that does not
project far medially into the choana. The ventral surface of this portion is
Tugose, contrasting sharply with the smoothly finished surrounding palatal
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 201
11cm
oe A
Ga: a
HEROS
Fig. 3. Eodicynodon oosthuizeni. ROZ 9, from Zwartskraal, Prince Albert. A-B. Skull in
ventral and dorsal views. C-D. Left ramus of lower jaw in dorsal and lateral views.
202 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
bones, and evidently carried a horny pad during life. Dorsally the palatine
curves upward towards the midline to form a roof for the choanal passage, and
posteriorly it terminates as a narrow wedge alongside the interpterygoidal
vacuity. A lateral palatal foramen between the palatine and ectopterygoid
opens dorsally on to the posterior surface of the jugal, continuing upward as a
short groove.
SS |
Fig. 4. Eodicynodon oosthuizeni. ROZ 9. Stereophotograph of skull and lower jaw
in ventral view, with partial left forelimb. Note deep notch in palatal rim anterior to
left maxillary tusk. Scale in cm.
Dominating the ventral view of the skull is a prominent ventrally directed
pterygoid flange or process making up the ventrolateral border of the choanal
space. The posterior corner of the process is also the most ventral part of the
pterygoid and compares in position with the lateral pterygoid process of
non-dicynodont therapsids.
Behind the interpterygoidal vacuity the pterygoids unite and together with
the basisphenoid form a prominent ventral crest in the midline. Behind the
contact with the basisphenoid each pterygoid extends posterolaterally as a
quadrate ramus to terminate in a recess in the medial surface of the quadrate.
The epipterygoids are represented only by their footplates, but there are
indications that these bones carried anterior and posterior cartilaginous exten-
sions during life. Thus the dorsal surface of each pterygoid carried a groove
leading forward from the front of the footplate of the epipterygoid up to the
pterygoid-ectopterygoid suture, and it is likely that this served to house an
anterior cartilaginous extension arising from the sharply truncated anterior
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 203
edge of the footplate. The posterior edge of the footplate, also truncated,
suggests the former presence of a posterior cartilaginous footplate extension,
which may have reached back to a recess in the medial surface of the quadrate
above the posterior tip of the quadrate ramus. Such a posterior extension of the
footplate in Lystrosaurus has been described (Cluver 1971).
The quadrate conforms to the standard dicynodont condition and from its
relationships with the articular it is clear that the anterior-posterior sliding
|
i
}
Fig. 5. Eodicynodon oosthuizeni. ROZ 9. A. Stereophotograph showing detail
of palatal area of skull. B. Stereophotograph of skull and lower jaw in dorsal
view. Scales in cm.
204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
motion between the two bones, characteristic of dicynodonts, was fully
developed.
The stapes, well preserved on each side, lies in the usual position between
the ventrolaterally facing fenestra ovalis and the inner surface of the quadrate.
The bone is remarkable in that it is pierced by a large and nearly complete
stapedial foramen, broken only where two thin dorsal processes of the stapes fail
to meet. Among other dicynodonts a stapedial foramen is known only in
Cistecephalus but it is present in pelycosaurs and in most other therapsid groups.
The interior of the braincase has been fully exposed and all the main
features can be identified. As in other dicynodonts, the jugular foramen is large
and the exoccipital is pierced by two hypoglossal nerve foramina. In the floor of
the braincase the basioccipital carries a strong medial crest that rises anteriorly
to terminate behind the hypophysial fossa. The sacculocochlear recess opens
into the cranial cavity by means of a wide internal auditory meatus and above
this the prootic carries a deep floccular fossa.
On each side of the shallow but distinct hypophysial fossa an ossified pila
antotica rises some distance dorsally and anteriorly, while in front the floor of
the fossa is pierced by the common internal carotid foramen. An anterior
basicranial ossification, identified as the presphenoid in Lystrosaurus (Cluver
1971), lies clasped in the cultriform process of the parasphenoid in front of the
carotid foramen. The anterior part of the cultriform process is an open,
steep-sided trough, which evidently received the ventral edge of a cartilaginous
interorbital septum in life.
As far as can be seen, the occipital plate conforms to the general dicyno-
dont pattern. A portion of the squamosal is preserved on the right side of ROZ
11, overlapping the front of the occipital plate and closing off a laterally placed
posttemporal fenestra. As in other dicynodonts, a channel from the anterior
opening of the posttemporal fenestra leads up the lateral surface of the prootic
and supraoccipital to a notch in the side of the braincase wall. This channel
most probably housed a blood-vessel draining blood from the neck to the
interior of the braincase before leaving the skull via the jugular vein (see Cox
1959; Cluver 1971).
Both halves of the lower jaw of ROZ 9 have been damaged and the
symphysial region is entirely lacking. The following description is based on the
more complete left half (Figs 3, 6). The dentary appears to have been a
relatively massive bone with a clear lateral crest for attachment of the lateral
division of the jaw adductor musculature (Crompton & Hotton 1967; Cluver
1975; King 1981). Behind the symphysial region the dorsal surface of the
dentary carries a shallow groove, but posteriorly this surface is rounded and
leads back to the raised dorsal boundary of the lateral dentary ledge. Behind
the dorsal groove two slender teeth are situated on the inside edge of the
dentary. The large mandibular fenestra is bounded by the dentary, surangular,
and angular. Behind the fenestra a prominent reflected lamina of the angular
extends far ventrally and is extended anteriorly and posteriorly along its ventral
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 205
Fig. 6. Eodicynodon oosthuizeni. ROZ 9. Stereophotograph of skull and
lower jaw in lateral view, with partial forelimb and manus. Note deep notch in
maxillary rim in front of tusk and distinct lateral shelf on dentary for adductor
musculature.
margin. The bones of the rear of the lower jaw appear to have been displaced
relative to each other and details of the space between the body of the angular
and the reflected lamina cannot be made out. However, it is evident that the
major part of the reflected lamina lies well below the ventral margin of the jaw
and that it reaches its greatest anteroposterior extent along its ventral border.
The articular is similar to that of other dicynodonts and the rounded lateral and
medial condyles are clearly distinguishable from each other. A short, stout,
ventrally directed retroarticular process is present.
Diagnosis
Dicynodonts with a fully developed sliding contact between convex quad-
rate and articular condyles and with horny beaks on upper and lower jaws.
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A EE |
icm
Fig. 7. Eodicynodon oosthuizeni. ROZ 11, from Zwartskraal, Prince Albert.
A. Reconstructed palatal view of skull showing marginal position of posterior
postcanine teeth. B. Basipterygoid region of skull showing bony boss on pterygoid
keel.
Fig. 8. Eodicynodon oosthuizeni. ROZ 11. Stereophotograph of skull in
ventral view. Scale in cm.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 207
Vomers paired, premaxillae paired. Strongly developed, ventrally directed
lateral pterygoid process. No teeth on the anterior part of the premaxilla or on
the anterior part of the dentary. Postcanine teeth present medial to the alveolar
margin as well as on the alveolar margin itself. Palatal rim interrupted by deep
cleft in front of maxillary tusk. Vomerine septum swollen behind the contact
with the posterior premaxillary septum. Palatines bulbous and rugose. Median
interpterygoidal crest enlarged to form a powerful ventral boss. Stapes pierced
by stapedial foramen. Dentary with dorsally placed lateral ledge. Shallow
groove in dorsal surface of the anterior part of the jaw ramus.
Genus Endothiodon, Owen, 1876
Type species Endothiodon bathystoma Owen, 1876
Type material
Anterior half of skull and lower jaw, BMNH R1646.
Locality
Sneeuwberg Range, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Uncertain.
Remarks on the type specimen
Since Owen described the type specimen of Endothiodon bathystoma,
various species have been added to the genus (see Haughton & Brink 1954).
Cox (1964) has revised the genus and includes within it the genera Endogom-
phodon, Esoterodon, and Emydochampsa. His generic description will be used
here with slight modifications based on the further examination of specimens of
Endothiodon uniseries (BMNH R4044, BMNH R49414) and Endothiodon sp.
(SAM-K1233) (Fig. 9).
Diagnosis
Dicynodonts of medium to large size (skull length 27,5-57,0 cm). Inter-
orbital region wide. No postfrontal bone. Intertemporal bar narrow but
enlarged around the region of the pineal foramen. Median groove running
posterior to the pineal foramen towards the back of the skull.
In anterior view a deep median notch in front margin of the palate. In
ventral view premaxillary secondary palate deeply vaulted. Tooth row placed
far posteriorly and internally. Eight to eleven long teeth on each side, distal
portions bearing anterior serrations when unworn. Anterior two teeth borne on
premaxilla. Horn-covered groove lateral to tooth row. Trough in ventral
surface of the median vomerine plate. Large palatine meeting the maxilla
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 9. Endothiodon uniseries. Type specimen BMNH 49414, from ?Beaufort West. Palatal
view.
anteriorly, extending far back on to the internal surface of the pterygoid,
but with little medial extension. Median ridge on posterior region of the
pterygoids. Anterior pterygoid ramus very robust with modified lateral ptery-
goid process.
Anterior portion of the lower jaw toothless, prolonged into upward-curved
and pointed beak fitting into vaulted palate. Dentary teeth long in a more or
less straight line. Dorsal dentary trough lateral to tooth row. No dentary tables
or lateral dentary shelf.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 209
Genus Pristerodon Huxley, 1868
Type species Pristerodon mackayi Huxley, 1868
Type material
Skull and lower jaw BMNH R1810.
Locality
East London, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Cistecephalus Zone.
Remarks on the type specimen
The type specimen is a poorly preserved, incomplete skull and lower jaw in
intractable matrix (Fig. 10). On the skull roof little, apart from the preparietal,
parietal and postfrontal, can be made out. The pineal foramen is placed
|
11cm
Fig. 10. Pristerodon mackayi. Type specimen BMNH R1650,
from East London. Reconstructed dorsal view of skull.
210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
relatively far back in the skull roof, and the preorbital region appears to have
been fairly long. The intertemporal region is wide and formed mainly by the
parietals. Canine tusks are absent.
Altogether nine small teeth are visible in the lower jaw. All the teeth are
damaged and serrations are not visible.
Since the type specimen is so poorly preserved other species presently
assigned to the genus were examined with a view to establishing a fuller generic
diagnosis.
Description of Pristerodon raniceps
P. raniceps was described by Owen in 1876 as Oudenodon raniceps. It was
referred to the genus Pristerodon by Broom (1915) on the basis of the presence
of postcanine teeth. The type specimen consists of a skull and lower jaw
(BMNH R1650) from East London (Fig. 11). While the bone is moderately
well preserved, few sutures can be made out with certainty. The preparietal
bone can be distinguished, and the pineal foramen is situated far back in the
skull as in the type specimen of P. mackayi. The intertemporal region is broad,
as in P. mackayi, and presumably formed mainly by the parietal bones. The
palate is obscured by extremely hard matrix.
The lower jaw shows several important features. There is a broad lateral
dentary shelf directly above the mandibular fenestra extending forward on the
side of the dentary well beyond the anterior border of the fenestra. Six,
possibly seven, posteriorly serrated teeth are visible in the jaw and are placed
medially to a deep, thin-walled groove or sulcus in the dorsal edge of the
dentary.
Description of Pristerodon whaitsi
P. whaitsi was described by Broom (1911) and is based on a skull (AMNH
5507) from Lemoenfontein, Beaufort West. The skull is laterally compressed
and much of the dorsal skull roof in the interorbital and snout region is missing
(Fig. 12). In the intertemporal region the parietals are widely exposed between
the postorbitals and a postfrontal bone is present. The palate has suffered
lateral distortion but certain features are nevertheless clear. The palatine bone
is large, leaf-like and lies as a posterior extension of the premaxillary-maxillary
secondary palate. Five small teeth are present medial to the canine tusk and lie
in a straight line leading from an anterior medial position to a lateral position in
line with the canine tusk. The posterior teeth in the row are situated on a
platform of the maxilla, slightly lower than the level of the palatine and medial
to the alveolor border. The posterior postcanine teeth lie close to the alveolar
border.
In the lower jaw at least six functional teeth are present in a single row
medial to a trough or sulcus in the dorsal border of the dentary. A large lateral
dentary shelf is present and resembles that seen in P. raniceps.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA
got tte tt eee,
Phd %e
. '°
1cm
Fig. 11. Pristerodon raniceps. Type specimen BMNH R1650, from East London.
A. Reconstructed dorsal view of skull. B—C. Lower jaw in lateral and dorsal views
respectively.
72\\4 |
DP ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
\.s.
1 cm
Fig. 12. Pristerodon whaitsi. Type specimen AMNH 5507, from Lemoenfontein, Beaufort
West. A. Skull roof. B. Reconstructed palatal view. C-D. Lower jaw in lateral and dorsal
view respectively.
Diagnosis
Formulation of a diagnosis for the genus Pristerodon is made difficult by
the nature of the type specimen of P. mackayi in which only a minimal amount
of morphological detail is visible. Ideally, in order to draw up a full generic
diagnosis, it would be necessary to include additional specimens firmly assigned
to the same species but yielding more morphological information. Unfortu-
nately such specimens are not available, although type specimens of other
species at present assigned to the same genus are available (Fig. 13). If the
information from the type species and additional species is pooled, then a
diagnosis can be formulated, but at the risk of including characters that may
have only specific significance. The alternative is to declare the type a nomen
nudum and to base the genus on the earliest described, best preserved speci-
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 213
Fig. 13. Pristerodon sp. SAM-10153, from Dunedin, Beaufort West. A-B. Skull in dorsal and
ventral views. C. Skull and lower jaw in lateral view.
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
men. In the interests of nomenclatural stability this alternative has not been
followed here and it is proposed instead that P. mackayi remain the type
species, and that the generic diagnosis be supplemented with information from
the species P. raniceps and P. whaitsi. Where the characters included in the
diagnosis are from either of the latter two species, the characters do not conflict
with the condition found in P. mackayi, if verifiable. Any characters chosen
that cannot be verified in the type species will be allowed to stand until it can
be shown that the type species differs from the additional species in those
characters.
This procedure has been explained in some detail since it is used elsewhere
in the present work.
The revised generic diagnosis is as follows.
Small dicynodonts, with or without maxillary tusks. Intertemporal part of
the skull roof broad, with wide parietal exposure. Palatines large and leaf-like,
forming posterior extension of secondary palate surface. Interpterygoidal vacu-
ity extending forward as a trough on to the rear of the vomerine septum.
Median interpterygoid ridge continues anteriorly on to the ventral surface of
the anterior pterygoidal process. Palatal rim unbroken by notches or
embayments anterior to the tusk position. Postcanine teeth lie in an oblique
row medial to a deep sulcus in dorsal edge of dentary. Dentary carries strong
lateral dentary shelf above and in front of mandibular fenestra.
Genus Tropidostoma (Seeley, 1889)
Type species Tropidostoma microtrema (Seeley, 1889)
Type material
Occiput and part of skull roof, BMNH R868.
Locality
Tafelberg, Beaufort West, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Cistecephalus Zone.
Remarks on the type specimen
Dicynodon microtrema was described by Seeley in 1889, based on the
occiput and posterior part of the skull roof of BMNH R868 (Fig. 14B).
In the same paper Seeley also described Tropidostoma dunni, the posterior
part of a skull (BMNH R866). From the description this appears to differ from
Dicynodon microtrema mainly in the configuration of the lateral extension of
the squamosal. In Tropidostoma dunni it extends vertically above the level of
the postparietal region, while in D. microtrema the temporal region is high
above the lateral extension.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA ONS
Fig. 14. A. Tropidostoma microtrema. BMNH R860, from Tafelberg, Beaufort West. Palatal
view of specimen, showing empty sockets for postcanine teeth. B. Tropidostoma microtrema.
Type specimen BMNH R868, from Tafelberg, Beaufort West. Dorsal view of the intertemporal
region.
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Broom (1915) referred new specimens from the Tafelberg locality to
Seeley’s Dicynodon microtrema. He found the new specimens to be character-
ized by the presence or absence of tusks (possibly a sexually dimorphic feature)
and by small molars, which may be lost with age, behind the tusks or
caniniform processes.
Broom considered that, since no Dicynodon specimen had postcanine
teeth, the present forms should be referred to a new genus. He argued that D.
microtrema was probably synonymous with Tropidostoma dunni, and therefore
assigned the new Tafelberg specimens, as well as D. microtrema, to T.
microtrema. One of the new specimens, BMNH R860 (Fig. 14A), formed the
basis of Broom’s description of 7. microtrema: palatal premaxillary ridges are
present; the postcanine teeth on the maxilla are striated; the septomaxilla lies
within the nostril; the nasals bear thickened nasal bosses; the postorbitals and
parietals are developed into a pair of lateral crests with a groove between them;
the palatal portion of the premaxilla is large; the lower border of the prevomer
is developed as a pair of ridges; and the palatines are large.
Re-examination of this specimen by the present authors showed that the
‘prevomer lower border plates’ actually represent the sides of a trough in the
ventral edge of the vomerine septum, and that a sharp crest is present posterior
to the tusk or caniniform process.
Broom (1932) discussed Tropidostoma microtrema and again drew atten-
tion to the encroachment of the postorbitals on the parietals, and the deep
furrow present between the upper edges of the parietals behind the pineal
opening. Broom’s figure shows a trough in the ventral edge of the vomer.
In Watson’s (1948) description of Tropidostoma he mentioned three ridges
on the palatal part of the premaxilla and a canine tusk and two small circular
postcanine teeth on each side. The anterior part of the palatine extends towards
the midline and was described as being relatively small, although his figure 13
shows it to be extensive. A long interpterygoidal vacuity is shown. Watson’s
specimen (D. M. S. Watson Collection R48) has an associated lower jaw. The
dorsal surface of the dentary was described as being divided into three grooves,
but the two outer grooves are actually shallow troughs borne on dentary tables.
Watson noted a groove in the upper surface of the dentary ramus and five teeth
in a single series lying lingual to the dentary groove.
Additional undescribed material has been examined by the present
authors. BMNH R6963, a specimen of Tropidostoma sp. with a lower jaw
associated, shows a dentary table bearing a shallow trough, a dentary groove or
sulcus with teeth lying in a row lingual to the sulcus, and a deep median
symphysial trough (Fig. 15).
SAM-—10681, a skull of Tropidostoma sp., shows a pinched intertemporal
region with a furrow between the parietals, tusks, small nasal bones, nostrils
placed high in the snout, a crest on the alveolar border posterior to the tusk,
postcanine teeth posterior to the tusk and situated close to the alveolar border,
a short vomerine trough, large palatines, and a long interpterygoid vacuity.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 2A
den.t.
den.s.
Fig. 15. Tropidostoma sp. BMNH R6963. A-B. Anterior portion
of lower jaw in dorsal and lateral views.
For the present it is felt justifiable to include information from all the
above specimens in a generic diagnosis.
Diagnosis
Medium-sized dicynodonts with or without tusks. Alveolar border behind
tusk or caniniform process forms a sharp postcanine crest that may or may not
bear teeth. Palatine large with bulbous anterior palatal portion. Vomer bears
trough (which may be short) along ventral edge. Interpterygoidal vacuity long.
Nostril set high in the snout. Nasals bear weak bosses. Pinched intertemporal
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
region. Postorbitals overlie parietals and form sides of a deep groove or furrow
leading backward from the pineal foramen.
Lower jaw with weak dentary tables. Dorsal surface of dentary table bears
trough. Deep median trough between dentary tables. Dentary sulcus present.
Few postcanine teeth present in a row in longitudinal groove lingual to dentary
sulcus. Weak lateral dentary shelf.
Related genera
Keyser (1973) redescribed Cteniosaurus platyceps Broom and assigned it to
Tropidostoma microtrema. The characters that Keyser regarded as common to
the two forms are a similar configuration of the bones of the skull surface, and
the nostril placed high in the skull. Other similarities that can be detected are:
weak nasal bosses, a long interpterygoidal vacuity, a few small postcanine
teeth, a sharp postcanine crest, and extensive palatines that have an inflated
posterior part and a smooth anterior part that meets the premaxilla.
A very weathered jaw ramus is the only lower jaw material available for
Cteniosaurus.
Unlike previously described material that has been assigned to Tropido-
stoma, Cteniosaurus has a wide intertemporal region. This is not pinched and
does not show the deep median furrow leading backward from the pineal
foramen. In this respect it resembles specimens such as the type specimen
(SAM-2356) of Dicynodon rogersi Broom & Haughton, 1917, and a similar as
yet undescribed specimen SAM-—B390, which have postcanine teeth but wide
intertemporal regions. It is considered here that the state of the intertemporal
region is a meaningful character since its morphology will impose constraints
on the organization of the jaw musculature. It is therefore felt that Cteniosau-
rus should not be included in the genus Tropidostoma. Both Tropidostoma
and Cteniosaurus may be regarded as early Oudenodon-like forms, which in
some cases retain postcanine teeth. Features such as the weak nasal bosses,
the long interpterygoidal vacuity, the sharp postcanine crest, and the shape of
the palatine all ally Cteniosaurus and Tropidostoma with Oudenodon (see
pe 225)
Although Tropidostoma, Cteniosaurus, and Oudenodon are clearly related,
it is not possible at this stage to determine the exact relationships of the three
genera.
Genus Rhachiocephalus (Owen, 1876)
Type species Rhachiocephalus magnus (Owen, 1876)
Type material
Incomplete skull BMNH 36252.
Locality
Brak River, Fort Beaufort, Cape Province.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 219
Stratigraphic horizon
Cistecephalus Zone.
Remarks on the type specimen
Seeley (1898) erected the genus Rhachiocephalus for Oudenodon-like (i.e.
tuskless) forms with a narrow intertemporal region. Oudenodon magnus Owen,
1876, was made the type species and transferred to the genus Rhachiocephalus.
The type specimen is tuskless and fairly large (skull length approximately
50 cm). Nasal bosses are present. The intertemporal region is narrow and
drawn up into a crest and the parietals are only slightly exposed on the skull
roof. The pineal foramen is situated in the middle of a bony boss. Few details
of the palate can be distinguished, but it is possible that an interpterygoidal
crest exists. There is a median palatal premaxillary ridge and the palatines are
large. In describing the same specimen in 1932, Broom notes that there are no
postfrontal bones.
Remarks on other species
Two additional species of Rhachiocephalus have been described. R.
angusticeps, described by Broom (1937), is an incomplete skull in the Transvaal
Museum (no. 1489). The skull is large and tuskless, has a narrow intertemporal
region with a crest and a pineal foramen situated in a bony boss. The
description given by Broom does not permit closer comparison, but there seem
to be no obvious features separating R. angusticeps and R. magnus at either the
generic or specific level. Since the aim of the present work is to attempt to
formulate generic diagnoses, not to revise dicynodonts at the specific level, for
the moment both species will be allowed to stand.
Rhachiocephalus dubius (SAM-11313) from the Luangwa Valley, Zambia,
was described by Boonstra (1938). Although the type specimen has a narrow
intertemporal region, re-examination shows that this form is tusked. There is
no pineal boss, instead the skull roof in this region is shallowly concave. There
are nasal bosses, but these are very elongate, and may have been affected by
crushing.
Since R. dubius does not show two of the main characteristics expected in
the genus Rhachiocephalus, namely tusklessness and a pineal boss, it cannot
remain in that genus. Keyser & Cruickshank (1979) make R. dubius the basis of
their new genus Odontocyclops. This will be discussed later (p. 238), when it
will be argued that certain of the large tusked forms, amongst them ‘Odontocy-
clops’ dubius, may simply be larger members of one of the Dicynodon species
such as D. leoniceps.
Diagnosis
Large tuskless dicynodonts. Nasal bosses present. Intertemporal region
narrow and drawn up into a crest. Parietals hardly exposed on skull roof. Pineal
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
foramen situated in a bony boss. Median palatal premaxillary ridge. Palatines
large. No postfrontal bones.
Genus Eocyclops Broom, 1913
Type species Eocyclops longus Broom, 1913
Type material
Skull in AMNH.
Locality
Grootvlei, Paardekraal, Beaufort West, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Cistecephalus Zone.
Remarks on type specimen
As described by Broom (1913), Eocyclops longus shows the following
features: skull length is approximately 44 cm; nasal bosses are present; smaller
bosses are present over the orbits; the large pineal foramen is surrounded by
the thickened, ring-like parietal; the preparietal is absent; the postfrontal
extends along the postorbital bar; the postorbitals almost overlap the parietals
in the intertemporal region; tusks are absent; there is a feeble caniniform
process.
Broom (1913) considered that Oudenodon magnus Owen, 1876, belonged
to the new genus, but it was later found to possess a preparietal. O. magnus
eventually became the genotype for Rhachiocephalus, as described above.
From the published descriptions the only feature that separates Rhachio-
cephalus and Eocyclops is the apparent lack of a preparietal in the latter. This
may be an unreliable feature for taxonomic purposes, as frequently it is difficult
to interpret the sutures around or within the pineal boss. Haughton (1917), in
describing what he considered to be a specimen of Eocyclops longus with a
preparietal, obviously set little store on this as a distinguishing feature. (Even
so, Broom later reassigned this specimen to a new genus, Megacyclops.) A
specimen in the University Museum, Oxford (TSK 23), which is undoubtedly
Eocyclops, shows a ring-like preparietal surrounding the pineal foramen. How-
ever it is evident that this bone is the preparietal only because the specimen is
broken through the pineal foramen and sutures are clearly visible. It is possible,
therefore, that Broom mistook a ring-like preparietal for the parietal.
Until the type specimen of Eocyclops longus can be re-examined in detail
it cannot be stated with confidence whether a preparietal is present or not.
However, in view of other similarities it is considered here that, even if a
preparietal is absent from the skull roof, this is not a character that necessitates
generic separation, and it is recommended that Eocyclops longus be accommo-
dated in the genus Rhachiocephalus.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 221
Genus Platycyclops Broom, 1932
Type species Platycyclops haughtoni Broom, 1932
Type material
Skull SAM-—8750.
Locality
Doornplaas, Graaff-Reinet, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Cistecephalus Zone.
Remarks on the type specimen
Broom described Platycyclops haughtoni in 1932 from a large, moderately
flat skull without tusks. The preorbital region is wide. There are large post-
orbitals and narrow parietals. The preparietal is crescentic and forms the front
half of a pineal boss.
Broom stated that a postfrontal is not present although Haughton & Brink
(1954) stated correctly that there is a very large and distinct postfrontal.
The type specimen was re-examined and the following additional informa-
tion gained. The pineal foramen faces anterodorsally. Behind it there is some
parietal exposure, but the postorbitals close over the parietals posteriorly. As
preserved, the intertemporal region is wide and flat because the postorbitals,
instead of sloping ventrolaterally, face directly dorsally. This could be due in
part to post-mortem deformation.
The jugal has a short spur, which extends up into the postorbital bar.
There are small nasal bosses. The nostril is recessed with a definite posterior
margin and does not grade imperceptibly into the surface of the snout. The
postfrontal extends along the postorbital bar.
On the palate there is a strong postcaniniform crest. There are two
anterior palatal premaxillary ridges and a median posterior ridge. The vomer
does not bear a trough along its ventral edge and there is a fairly short
interpterygoidal vacuity. The palatines have a large bulbous anterior exposure.
Other features are as Broom described them, except that a postfrontal is
present.
Remarks on other species
Broom (1940) described two additional species of Platycyclops, P. lati-
rhinus and P. rubidgei. These conform to Broom’s diagnosis of the genus but
show some variation in the intertemporal region. In P. latirhinus this region is
moderately wide, although the parietals are still overlapped by the postorbitals
to a great extent. In P. rubidgei the intertemporal region is narrower. Such
variation is probably tolerable within a species, almost certainly within a genus,
since the important diagnostic feature here is whether the parietals are overlap-
Upp ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ped by the postorbitals, forming a structure approaching a sagittal crest.
Absolute width is probably diagnostically unimportant, as it may vary with
absolute skull size. The degree to which overlapping occurs may be age- or
sex-dependent, leading to the variation seen.
In P. pricei (Broom & George 1950) the postorbitals approach each other
over the parietals, although they do not meet. In P. acutirostris (Broom &
George 1950) the postorbitals meet over the parietals.
In other features these four specimens conform to the generic description.
There seems to be little in Broom’s original description to warrant erecting
a new genus for these forms apart from the condition of the preparietal—absent
in Eocyclops, present in Platycyclops. However, this distinction becomes irrele-
vant in the present work since Eocyclops has been referred to the genus
Rhachiocephalus where the preparietal is quite similar to that of Platycyclops.
It is therefore recommended that Platycyclops also be included in the genus
Rhachiocephalus.
Genus Neomegacyclops Boonstra, 1958
Type species Neomegacyclops whaitsi (Broom, 1931)
Type material
Part of the skull roof, postorbital bar and part of the zygoma SAM-3425.
Locality
Graaff-Reinet, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Uncertain.
Remarks on the type specimen
In 1917 Haughton described a partial dicynodont skull that, although
possessing a preparietal, he considered to be sufficiently similar in other
respects to Eocyclops longus to be included in that genus and species. The
preparietal of the specimen forms most of a boss round the pineal foramen.
The parietals have a very small exposure between the overlapping postorbitals.
There is a small nasal boss and a thickened postfrontal. Haughton reported that
there was no septomaxilla showing on the surface of the snout. The recon-
structed length of the skull would be approximately 50 cm.
Broom (1931) renamed the specimen Megacyclops whaitsi because the
pineal opening is small and the preparietal and parietal form a huge, rounded
pineal boss. Boonstra (1953) subsequently erected the new genus Neomega-
cyclops for the specimen since the name Megacyclops was found to be preoccu-
pied.
Re-examination of the type specimen reveals few other features of diag-
nostic significance since the palate is unprepared. The nostril has a definite
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 223
posterior margin. The orbit is triangular and the postfrontal extends into the
postorbital bar. On the ventral surface of the distal part of the postorbital
bar there is a smooth recess that seems to be continuous with a smooth
recess on the posterior dorsal surface of the suborbital bar. These may be
for muscle attachment, in which case the extension of the postfrontal into
the postorbital bar may be a means of strengthening it or its connection with
the skull roof.
Another specimen, SAM—K1393, has certain features in common with
Neomegacyclops whaitsi and the other tuskless forms described above. There is
a boss mostly posterior to the pineal foramen formed by the parietals. A
preparietal is present. The postorbitals overlap the parietals closely in the
intertemporal region. There are nasal bosses and prefrontal thickenings. There
is a median crest on the nasal and frontal bones, but this may be the result of
lateral compression. The nostril has a definite posterior margin. The postfrontal
extends into the postorbital bar. There is a recess on the ventral surface of the
distal part of the postorbital bar and also on the posterior dorsal surface of the
suborbital bar. The jugal forms part of the posterior surface of the postorbital
bar.
Additional features of this specimen are a median interpterygoid crest,
absence of a vomerine trough, absence of tusks, a sharp postcaniniform crest
and a palatine with a bulbous anterior portion.
It has not been possible to find any features in the type specimen of
Neomegacyclops whaitsi, or in a related species Neomegacyclops rugosus
(Haughton 1932), or in the specimen SAM-K1393 described above that would
debar any of these forms from the genus Rhachiocephalus. It is therefore
suggested that these forms should be included in that genus.
Note on the large tuskless dicynodonts
The genus Rhachiocephalus is considered to be a well-defined, distinct taxon. The genera
Eocyclops, Platycyclops and Neomegacyclops are synonymous with Rhachiocephalus. Peloro-
cyclops (Broom 1932) and Kitchingia (Broom & George 1950), which are not discussed here,
can probably also be accommodated within this genus.
Genus Oudenodon Owen, 1860
Type species Oudenodon baini Owen, 1860
Type material
Skull lacking lower jaw, BMNH 36232.
Locality
Near Fort Beaufort, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Uncertain.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
224
3cm
In
en BMNH 36232, from ‘near Fort Beaufort’. Skull
im
Type spec
i.
In
Fig. 16. Oudenodon ba
ventral view.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 225
3cm
Fig. 17. Oudenodon baini. Type specimen BMNH 36232. Skull in dorsal view.
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ref.t.
add. fos.
(ef
3 cm
Fig. 18. Oudenodon sp. SAM-6045, from Houd Constant, Graaff-
Reinet. Lower jaw in dorsal view.
Diagnosis
The genus Oudenodon (Figs 16-18) has recently been reviewed and
illustrated by Cluver & Hotton (1981) and their diagnosis with slight modifica-
tion will be used here.
Medium-sized to large dicynodonts (skull length ranging from 100 mm to
over 300 mm). Teeth lacking in both upper and lower jaws. Postorbitals well
separated on skull roof by parietals. Septomaxilla recessed within external
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA Mii
naris, lacrimal in some species extends forward above maxilla to posterior
margin of naris. Nasal forms boss over naris. Maxilla carries weak caniniform
process, with sharp-edged posterior crest. Palatal part of palatine divided into
an inflated posterior area, and a smooth anterior part that meets the pre-
maxilla. Vomers form short septum in anterior part of interpterygoidal fossa.
Ectopterygoid large with palatal exposure, pterygoid does not contact maxilla.
Dentaries with narrow dentary tables, dorsal edge of dentary with deep sulcus.
Dorsal process on rear of dentary weak or absent. Weak lateral dentary shelf
above large mandibular fenestra.
Genus Aulacephalodon (Owen, 1844)
Type species Aulacephalodon baini (Owen, 1844)
Type material
Skull BMNH 36238.
Locality
Fort Beaufort, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Uncertain.
Note on the spelling of generic name
Seeley (1898) originally erected this taxon as a subgenus of Dicynodon
with the following spelling: Aulacephalodon. Broom (1932) raised the subgenus
to the generic level and for no apparent reason changed the spelling to
Aulacocephalodon. Both Keyser (1969) and Tollman & Grine (1980) have
discussed the validity of this and conclude that Aulacephalodon is the correct
generic name; this will be used here throughout.
Remarks on the type specimen
In 1898 Seeley erected the subgenus Aulacephalodon for members of the
genus Dicynodon (i.e. tusked forms) that were broad headed and short
snouted. Dicynodon baini Owen, 1844, became the type species of the new
genus.
Aulacephalodon baini is described by Owen (1844, 1876) as a skull slightly
wider than long with a wide intertemporal region and exposed parietals. The
pineal foramen is surrounded by a boss. The postorbitals in the intertemporal
region are steep sided and there is a boss on the posterior surface of the
postorbital bar. Tusks are present. The anterior pterygoid rami are widely
divergent.
The snout and palate are not well preserved in the type specimen and little
detail can be made out. In his Catalogue Owen (1876) also described Dicyno-
don tigriceps, which Seeley later assigned to Aulacephalodon. This specimen
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ee a |
3cm
Fig. 19. Aulacephalodon laticeps. Type specimen AMNH 5564, from Grootvlei, Beaufort
West. Skull in dorsal view.
(BMNH 36235) is better preserved and, in addition to the features described
above, it has prefrontal and nasal bosses, a ridge across the snout between the
prefrontal bosses, and a boss on the jugal of the zygoma, lying just posterior to
the postorbital bar. These features cannot be verified on the more poorly
preserved A. baini. The postorbital boss is not present in A. tigriceps and may
therefore represent a specific feature of A. baini, so this feature should not be
included in a generic description of Aulacephalodon. Otherwise these features
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 229
3cm
Fig. 20. Aulacephalodon laticeps. Type specimen AMNH 5564. Skull in ventral view.
may be combined to give a generic diagnosis of Aulacephalodon.
Various other species have been assigned to the genus (see Haughton &
Brink 1954). In a recent review Keyser (1972) concluded that so-called specific
differences are actually due to age and he considered that most of the species
may be invalid. In their study on a large sample of Aulacephalodon skulls,
Tollman, Grine & Hahn (1980) concluded that biometrical (allometric)
methods indicate that only one species (Aulacephalodon baini) was present
during the southern African Permian, and that this species showed clear sexual
dimorphism and ontogenetic variation.
230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Description of additional material
The type specimen of Aulacephalodon luckhoffi Broom, 1937 (SAM-—
K1231) is the greater part of a skull lacking the lower jaw. It is in a reasonable
state of preservation. In this specimen the skull is slightly longer than wide, but
otherwise all diagnostic characters named above are present. In addition, A.
luckhoffi shows a steep postorbital region that is drawn up into a low dorsal
ridge. The postorbital overhangs the side wall of the braincase and forms a
well-defined recess beneath the skull roof. The boss on the zygoma is well
marked. The nostril is deeply recessed and has a definite posterior margin. The
postfrontal bone is absent. A ridge on the premaxilla runs from the postero-
dorsal corner of the nostril to the maxillary rim. There is a moderately large
interpterygoidal vacuity. The median vomerine plate does not bear a trough.
The palatines are extensive and have an anterior bulbous portion. There are
two anterior premaxillary palatal ridges as well as the single posterior pre-
maxillary palatal ridge. There is no postcaniniform crest.
The type specimen of Aulacephalodon laticeps (Broom, 1912) (AMNH
5564) is another good skull (without the lower jaw) in which the palate has
been prepared recently (Figs 19-20). This specimen shows all the features
described above, where verifiable, with only some minor modifications such as
the prefrontal boss being weak. In addition, A. laticeps exhibits a jugal that
bears a high process abutting against the postorbital posteriorly and extending
far up the postorbital bar. There is also a relatively prominent interpterygoid
crest.
Several undescribed specimens in the South African Museum (SAM-—
10053, SAM-10021 and SAM-—K6064) have been examined and found to
exhibit all characters noted above wherever the material permits investigation.
SAM-K6064 has a lower jaw in situ. This specimen is well preserved but
unprepared. However, the form of the lower jaw is apparent. The dentary
symphysis is massive and very deep. Posterior to the symphysis the depth of the
jaw decreases to approximately one-third that of the symphysis. A typical
dicynodont lower jaw condyle is present. At approximately one-third of the
length of the jaw from the anterior end a lateral dentary shelf arises. Its length
is also approximately one-third the length of the jaw. The shelf is directed
ventrally so that it occludes the mandibular fenestra. A dorsal dentary sulcus is
present.
Diagnosis
If the information from the foregoing specimens is pooled in the manner
described earlier (p. 212) the following diagnosis can be formulated.
Medium-sized, tusked dicynodonts with a wide intertemporal region. Par-
ietals exposed on skull roof. Pineal foramen surrounded by a boss. Postorbitals
in intertemporal region steep sided and drawn up into ridge dorsally. Post-
orbitals overhang side wall of braincase forming recess beneath skull roof on
each side. Boss on jugal of zygoma. Jugal has tall, dorsal process extending far
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 231
up postorbital bar. Prefrontal and nasal bosses. No postfrontal bone. Nostril is
deeply recessed and has a definite posterior margin. Ridge on maxilla posterior
to nostril.
Interpterygoidal vacuity moderately long. Ventral edge of vomerine plate
without trough. Palatines bulbous. No postcaniniform crest.
Massive dentary symphysis with dentary tables. Lateral dentary shelf
occludes mandibular fenestra. Dentary sulcus present.
Related genera
It may be possible to refer Digalodon (Broom & Robinson 1948) to this
genus. This is based on a small specimen that generally conforms to the generic
diagnosis except that the maxillary rim is cut upward in front of the canine tusk.
It may prove to be either a distinct genus closely related to Aulacephalodon or
a distinct species of that genus.
Genus Pelanomodon Broom, 1938
Type species Pelanomodon rubidgei Broom, 1938
Type material
Skull, Rubidge Collection 10.
Locality
Kareelaagte, Graaff-Reinet, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Daptocephalus Zone.
Remarks on the type specimen
In Broom’s (1938) original description, Pelanomodon rubidgei is character-
ized by the absence of tusks, the saddle-backed skull with beak folded down on
the rest of the skull, the marked upwardly directed nasal bosses, smaller
horn-like bosses on the prefrontals, little trace of a postfrontal, the small boss
on the postorbital bar, the small preparietal almost entirely in front of the
pineal foramen, the broad, flat parietals that produce the wide intertemporal
region, and the large squamosals which flare out posterodorsally.
Remarks on additional specimens
In the same publication Broom (1938) mentioned Aulacephalodon
moschops and considered that, since it was tuskless, it ought to be placed in
another genus. Haughton & Brink (1954) assigned it to Pelanomodon.
Pelanomodon moschops (AMNH 5325, Figs 21-22) has the following
features in addition to those described above: the postorbital in the intertem-
poral region is steep sided, there is a ridge across the snout between the
prefrontal bosses, there is a smoothly recessed nostril, a labial fossa is present,
232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Sq.
a |
3cm
Fig. 21. Pelanomodon moschops. Type specimen AMNH 5325, from Oudeberg, Graaff-
Reinet. Skull in dorsal view.
the interpterygoidal vacuity is relatively short, the palatines are large and the
anterior portion is not bulbous but slopes slightly to meet the premaxilla, a very
slight postcaniniform crest is present, the jugal boss, vomerine trough and
interpterygoid crest are all absent.
A lower jaw for Pelanomodon is not known.
Diagnosis
Taking into account features from the above specimens, the following
diagnosis may be formulated.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 233
pm.
———E a |
3cm
Fig. 22. Pelanomodon moschops. Type specimen AMNH 5325. Skull in ventral view.
Medium-sized dicynodonts without tusks. Wide intertemporal and inter-
orbital regions. Snout bent downward on nasals, which are bent downward on
rest of skull. Postorbital in intertemporal region steep sided. Ridge across snout
between prefrontals. Small prefrontal bosses, larger nasal bosses. No (or
reduced) postfrontal bone. No jugal boss. Unbroken palatal rim. Smoothly
recessed nostril. Labial fossa present. Relatively short interpterygoidal vacuity.
No anterior palatal ridges. Large palatines not bulbous but sloping forward to
meet premaxilla. No vomerine trough. Very slight postcaniniform crest.
Related genera
Aulacephalodon and Pelanomodon have many features in common, but
also some important differences: Pelanomodon has a smoothly recessed nostril,
234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
lacks an interpterygoid crest, has a palatine that slopes forward, and lacks
anterior palatal ridges, whereas Aulacephalodon has a deeply recessed nostril, a
palatine with an anterior bulbous portion, anterior palatal ridges, and an
interpterygoid crest.
These features and the rarity of Pelanomodon specimens relative to
Aulacephalodon argue against Pelanomodon’s being merely the female of
Aulacephalodon, although it is possible that Pelanomodon specimens have been
misidentified in the past. Both Dicynodon sidneyi Broom, 1940, and D.
locusticeps Huene, 1942, are probably members of Pelanomodon, the former
being a small member of the genus.
Keyser (1972) considers that the similarities between the two genera are
the result of a similar biting mechanism, both forms possibly feeding among
vegetation in shallow water.
It is considered here that Pelanomodon and Aulacephalodon are closely
related genera that should be kept separate, at least for the present, until more
of the tuskless forms can be investigated.
Genus Dicynodon Owen, 1845
Type species Dicynodon lacerticeps Owen, 1845
Type material
Skull and lower jaw BMNH 36233.
Locality
Tarka prolongation of the Winterberg, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Uncertain.
Diagnosis
The genus Dicynodon (Figs 23-26) has recently been revised and illus-
trated by Cluver & Hotton (1981) and their diagnosis with slight modification
will be used here.
Medium-sized to large dicynodonts (average skull length 100 mm to over
400 mm), single pair of maxillary tusks in upper jaw, lower jaw edentulous.
Postorbitals tend to cover parietals behind pineal foramen. Septomaxilla
merges smoothly with outer surface of snout, does not meet lacrimal. Low boss
formed over external nares by nasals. Palatal rim sharp edged, uninterrupted
by notch. Palatal portion of palatine large and flat, making short contact with
premaxilla. Vomers form long, narrow septum in interpterygoidal fossa. An-
terior border of interpterygoidal fossa formed by a crest that joins the vomerine
septum. Ectopterygoid small, displaced laterally. Labial fossa present between
maxilla, palatine and jugal. Pterygoid makes short contact with maxilla. Basi-
occipital tubera separated by intertuberal ridge. Fused dentaries carry narrow
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA
Fig. 23. Dicynodon sp. SAM-—B88, from Hoeksplaas, Murraysburg. Skull in dorsal view.
35)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
236
3cm
1eW.
SAM-B88. Skull in ventral v
Pp
S
don
icyno
D
. 24.
Fig
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 237)
Fig. 25. Dicynodon sp. SAM-—B88. Skull and lower jaw in lateral view.
dentary tables. Dorsal edge of dentary carries deep sulcus behind dentary
tables. Rear of dentary extended dorsally to form weak posterodorsally
directed process. Mandibular fenestra large, bounded dorsally by lateral den-
tary shelf. Occipital surface of opisthotic carries depression above paroccipital
process.
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Note on the large tusked dicynodonts
Several large tusked dicynodonts have been described in the literature, not only members
of the genus Dicynodon but also of Dinanomodon (Broom 1938) and Odontocyclops (Keyser &
Cruickshank, 1979). Such forms are characterized by a narrow intertemporal region where the
postorbitals overlap the parietals to some degree, absence of a pineal boss, absence of a
postcaniniform crest (where it is possible to investigate this feature), and the presence of tusks.
In some forms (Dicynodon njalilus and Dinanomodon spp.) the postorbitals meet over the
parietals, obliterating their exposure on the skull roof. In these forms the pineal opening is
reduced to a very narrow slit, which does not seem to be the result of lateral compression since
the basicranial axis shows no signs of deformation.
It is possible that all these forms are simply large members of a species of Dicynodon such as
Dicynodon (previously Daptocephalus) leoniceps (Cluver & Hotton 1981). The palatal structure
is quite consistent with this. It is possible that the very close overlap of the postorbitals in some
forms may be related to large size or advanced age.
The genus Odontocyclops was erected by Keyser & Cruickshank (1979) who considered it
to be related to Dicynodon leoniceps and Dinanomodon by the following features that few
other Permian dicynodonts share: a small posteriorly placed interpterygoid vacuity with raised
margins, an anterior process of the footplate of the epipterygoid, a large posterior extension of
the premaxilla in the secondary palate, reduction of the ectopterygoid, a high position in the
snout of the external nostril, contact between the maxilla and septomaxilla, the small pineal
foramen, and absence of a pineal boss.
In fact, most of these features are widespread in the genus Dicynodon and do not serve to
Fig. 26. Dicynodon sp. SAM-B88. Lower jaw in dorsal view.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 239
separate the three forms mentioned above from other members of that genus. For example,
Dicynodon sp. SAM-B88 (Cluver & Hotton 1981) shows all the above features.
The anterior process of the footplate of the epipterygoid is not a feature that is particularly
useful for taxonomic purposes since the ossification of this process is very variable; however,
judging from the groove present on the lateral surface of the pterygoids, an extension of the
footplate was present in most Permian forms (including Eodicynodon) whether cartilaginous or
bony.
Keyser & Cruickshank (1979) distinguish Odontocyclops from the other two related
genera, Daptocephalus (i.e. Dicynodon leoniceps of our classification) and Dinanomodon on
the following features: the concavity of the dorsal snout surface, the broad intertemporal
region, and large size. These features are used to demonstrate that Odontocyclops cannot be
ancestral to the long-snouted Triassic forms with a crested intertemporal and, while this may be
so, nevertheless there is nothing in this character suite that debars Odontocyclops from the
genus Dicynodon. The intertemporal region mentioned is broad relative to the Triassic forms,
but it is not outside the range of variation tolerable within the genus Dicynodon and is shown
by species such as D. calverleyi and D. bathyrhynchus.
In conclusion, it is proposed that large tusked forms such as Odontocyclops and Dinano-
modon be accommodated within the genus Dicynodon, as they probably represent large
members of a species such as D. leoniceps or are distinct but closely related species.
Genus Robertia Boonstra, 1948
Type species Robertia broomiana Boonstra, 1948
Type material
Skull SAM-11761.
Locality
Klein Koedoeskop, Beaufort West, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Tapinocephalus Zone.
Remarks on the type specimen
The genus is represented only by Robertia broomiana. The type specimen
consists of most of a skull and lower jaw reasonably well preserved but
embedded in an intractable matrix. Little preparation has been carried out.
The original description (Boonstra 1948) includes the following features:
the skull is relatively broad with a maximum length of 80 to 100 mm; the snout
is weak and short; the small nostril opens near the alveolar border; the
interorbital width is less than the intertemporal width; the molar teeth are
small, simple cones arranged in the lower jaw in a single fairly regular row
along the lingual side of the dentary; the dentary teeth are 5 to 9 in number;
and the upper postcanine teeth all lie on the maxilla posterolingual to the
canine or caniniform process, forming an irregular group of one to eight.
The original description is based on several topotypes and referred
specimens as well as the type specimen.
Toerien (1953) added a figure and described another specimen assigned to
Robertia broomiana. He noted that the anterior ramus of the pterygoid bears a
ridge continuous with the alveolar border.
240 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
den.
B C
Fig, 27. A: Robertia sp. SAM-11461, from Buffelsvlei, Prince Albert. Skull.in ventral view.
B-C. Robertia sp. SAM-11885, from Michau’s Request, Beaufort West. Skull roof and lower
jaw.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 241
Description of additional specimens
The following description is based on material in the South African
Museum that can be assigned to the genus Robertia according to the description
above. The specimens are SAM-11885 (Fig. 27B—C) from Michau’s Request,
Beaufort West, SAM-11890 from Skoorsteen, Laingsburg, SAM—K296 (Fig.
27A) from Die Krans van Tuinkraal, Beaufort West, and SAM-11451 from
Buffelsvlei, Prince Albert.
A full description of Robertia does not exist at present in the literature, so
a rather more detailed description than for other specimens is given here.
Skull length ranges between 60 and 100 mm. Tusks may or may not be
present. The intertemporal and interorbital widths are approximately equal.
The parietals are exposed behind the pineal foramen giving a moderately wide
intertemporal region. The preorbital widths are approximately equal. The
preorbital region is shorter than the length of the orbit. Unlike species of
Emydops or Pristerodon, the maxillary rim is drawn down round the tusk or
into the caniniform process.
A few (usually three) postcanine teeth are present on the maxilla in a more
or less straight line posteromedial to the canine or caniniform process. Anterior
to the canine or caniniform process there is a notch in the maxilla, which cuts
back into the medial surface of the caniniform process or into the bone
sheathing the tusk.
The palatine is of moderate size. It forms part of the surface of the
secondary palate and is continuous horizontally with the premaxilla. The
palatine approaches the vomer but does not make contact with it. Posterior to
the level of the palatines, the ventral edge of the median plate of the vomers
runs posterodorsally and bears a wide trough. The sides of the trough separate
posteriorly to form the anterior border of the interpterygoid vacuity. A short
median palatal ridge is present anteriorly where the median vomer plate meets
the premaxilla.
The anterior rami of the pterygoids are strong. Posteriorly each ramus
bears a high, sharp ridge. The ridges converge towards the midline where they
fuse together and continue posteriorly as a single median ridge, which runs in
the midline of the posterior part of the pterygoid and over the basisphenoid. A
Y-shaped system of ridges therefore dominates the pterygoid-basisphenoid area
of the palate.
The interpterygoid vacuity is moderately extensive. Its length is half that
of the distance between its posterior edge and the anterior border of the
choana.
The foramina for the passage of the internal carotid arteries are promi-
nent. They are situated immediately behind the median pterygoid-basisphenoid
ridge and face ventrally.
The quadrate bears a shallowly convex medial and lateral condyle. The
lateral condyle is marginally the greater in area. The lower jaw is fairly robust
with a sharp, squarish tip. Anteriorly it bears well-defined dentary tables on the
242 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
dorsal surface. A longitudinal dentary sulcus is not present on the dorsal
surface of the jaw ramus.
A few small teeth are present on the dentary.
The lateral surface of the dentary is built up into a ledge approximately
one-third of the length of the jaw. The ledge is directed ventrally so that its
outer surface faces mostly laterally and so tends to occlude the mandibular
fenestra. There are marked striations on the lateral surface of the dentary
ledge.
The posterior part of the jaw is typically dicynodontian with a downwardly
projecting retroarticular process and an elongate lateral articular condyle.
Diagnosis
Taking into account the new material, the following generic diagnosis may
be formulated.
Small to medium (up to 12 cm skull length) dicynodonts. Intertemporal
region moderately wide and parietals exposed. Tusks present or absent. Maxil-
lary rim extended ventrally round tusk or into caniniform process. Approxi-
mately three postcanine teeth arranged in a row in the maxilla. Notch present
on the palatal surface of the maxilla. Palatine moderately large but does not
reach the vomers. Y-shaped ridge dominates the pterygoids and basisphenoid.
Trough on the ventral edge of the median plate of vomer. Dentary tables on
lower jaw. A few small teeth present on the dentary. A lateral dentary shelf
takes up the middle third of the length of the jaw and is directed ventrally so
that it tends to occlude the mandibular fenestra.
Genera Brachyuraniscus Broili & Schroder, 1935
and Brachyprosopus Olson, 1937
The taxonomic status of the following genera from the Tapinocephalus
Zone of the Beaufort Group is enigmatic.
Brachyuraniscus reuningi was described by Broili & Schréder (1935) and
two new species were added to the genus by Toerien (1953). The new species
were B. merwevillensis and B. broomi, the latter a redesignation of Brachy-
prosopus broomi (Olson 1937). Toerien considered that Brachyprosopus
broomi was so similar to Brachyuraniscus in palatal features that it should be
included in the same genus. However, he overlooked the very different shape
of the palatine in Brachyprosopus and the fact that this form apparently has a
labial fossa.
The type specimens of both Brachyuraniscus merwevillensis and reuningi
have been lost. The figures of Brachyuraniscus merwevillensis (Toerien 1953)
do not allow much detail to be discerned, and those of B. reuningi show it to be
a very incomplete specimen. It is felt, therefore, that no useful purpose is
served in trying to establish the relationships of these two forms. It would
seem, however, that Brachyprosopus is a distinct genus. It shows certain
primitive features such as the short secondary palate, a number of well-
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 243
developed postcanine teeth, the wide intertemporal region with the parietals
exposed, and features of the braincase, which Olson (1937) described. The
presence of a labial fossa and the shape of the palatine in not encroaching upon
the midline seem to be distinctive features. Even so, without further informa-
tion, especially from the lower jaw, it is difficult to define the relationships of
Brachyprosopus very accurately, and it is at present left incertae sedis as there is
insufficient evidence to determine its taxonomic position.
Genus Diictodon Broom, 1913
Diagnosis
This genus has recently been reviewed by Cluver & Hotton (1981) and
their diagnosis with minor modifications will be used here. (See Figs 28-30.)
Medium-sized dicynodonts (average skull length 110 mm), jaws either
lacking teeth altogether or bearing a single pair of maxillary tusks. Postorbitals
tend to cover parietals behind pineal foramen. Septomaxilla recessed within
external naris, maxilla rises high on the side of the snout to meet nasal. Nasal
forms boss over external naris. Maxilla carries a prominent caniniform process
clearly demarcated from anterior palatal rim by a deep notch. Palatal portion of
palatine small, does not meet premaxilla. Vomers form short septum in
interpterygoid fossa. Ectopterygoid large, separating pterygoid from maxilla.
Fused dentaries carry wide dorsal dentary tables, with high medial borders.
Rear of dentary table extended medial to level of inner surface of jaw ramus.
Dorsal edge of dentary rounded behind dentary table, no posterior dorsal
process of the dentary present. Mandibular fenestra large, no expanded lateral
dentary shelf for insertion of adductor musculature.
Genus Emydops Broom, 1912
Type species Emydops minor Broom, 1912
Type material
Skull and lower jaw AMNH 5525.
Locality
Kuilspoort, Beaufort West, Cape Province.
Stratigraphic horizon
Cistecephalus Zone.
Remarks on the type specimen
The skull and jaw are obliquely crushed and the snout badly damaged (Fig.
31C). The skull roof behind the snout region is exposed and sutures can be
distinguished. Teeth are not visible although Broom (1913) stated that, having
broken the specimen through, he could see ‘at least two small teeth’. When
244 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 28. Diictodon sp. SAM-10086, from Dunedin, Beaufort West. Skull in dorsal
view.
245
q.
m
UO
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA
ES a a rr
rt
a
Fig. 29. Diictodon sp. SAM-10086. A. Skull in ventral view.
1eW.
in dorsal vi
Jaw in
B. Lower
246 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
3cm
Fig. 30. Diictodon sp. SAM-10086. Skull and lower jaw in lateral view.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 247
examined by M.A.C. in 1973 the anterior part of the snout was in a delicate
state of preservation and it was thought unwise to loosen the several pieces of
bone and matrix to verify Broom’s observation.
On the skull roof the parietals are widely exposed between the postorbitals
and a short wedge-shaped postfrontal is present. The palate is totally obscured
and would require extensive preparation for detail to be revealed.
The lower jaw is preserved in situ, but few details can be made out. The
symphysial region appears relatively weak.
Although this specimen is that on which Broom based the genus Emydops,
regrettably few characters of taxonomic importance are visible. However, the
name Emydops is now well entrenched in the literature and has become
accepted as indicative of a taxon with characters that are seen in type specimens
of other species currently assigned to Emydops. As in the case of Pristerodon,
it is suggested here that in the interests of nomenclatural stability the name
Emydops should be retained and the characters seen in secondary type material
be included in the overall generic diagnosis.
Other Emydops species
The description of Emydops longiceps by Broom (1913) was based on a
skull from Lemoenfontein, Beaufort West (AMNH 5578). The specimen is a
weathered skull lacking lower jaw and with the occiput incomplete. The
relationships between parietals, postfrontals, and frontals are easily seen. In the
palate the pterygoids and palatines are crushed and broken but it is possible to
provide a reasonable reconstruction. The palatal portion of the palatine is quite
large and extends forward to meet the premaxilla. The vomer, which is
excavated ventrally in the form of a longitudinal trough, meets the posterior tip
of the median premaxillary ridge. A single small tooth is present on the maxilla
close to the alveolar border. Anterior premaxillary palatal ridges are apparently
absent.
Emydops platyceps (Broom & Haughton 1917) is based on a skull from
Dunedin, Beaufort West (SAM-2667). The skull roof is complete up to the
anterior third of the orbit and the relationships between the bones are essen-
tially the same as in the previously described specimen. In the palate each
maxilla bears a tusk, and there are two small postcanine teeth posteriorly on
the left-hand side. The palatal portion of the palatine is quite large but broken
by a notch in its medial border. The palatine reaches forward to the level of the
rear of the premaxilla. Anterior premaxillary ridges are absent but a pair of
longitudinal grooves runs alongside the median palatal ridge to the level of the
canine tusk. The rear of the vomerine septum is trough-shaped but the more
anterior part is thin and blade-like.
The description of Emydops longus (Fig. 31A—B) by Broom (1921) was
based on a skull and lower jaw from Biesjiespoort, Victoria West (BMNH
R4956). The skull is dorsoventrally crushed and the snout damaged by an early
attempt at preparation. On the skull roof the parietals are very widely exposed.
248 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. IN A-B. Emydops longus. Type specimen BMNH R4956, from Biesjiespoort, Beaufort
West. A. Skull in dorsal view. B. Lower jaw in lateral view. C. Emydops minor. Type
specimen AMNH 5525, from Kuilspoort, Beaufort West. Skull in dorsal view.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 249
Fig. 32. Emydops longus. Paratype BMNH R4957, from
| Biesjiespoort, Victoria West. A-B. Skull in dorsal and ven-
| tral views.
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The postorbitals lie along the side of the intertemporal bar, forming the medial
borders of the temporal fenestra.
The palate is obscured by the lower jaw but a single tooth is visible close to
the alveolar border behind the caniniform process.
The lower jaw has a prominent lateral dentary shelf and a sharp shovel-
shaped symphysis. At least four teeth are present on the dorsomedial edge of
the dentary. One of the teeth shows a distinct row of five posterior serrations.
Because of damage during earlier preparation part of the dentary is lost and a
complete tooth count is not possible.
The paratype of Emydops longus, (BMNH R4957, Fig. 32) adds consider-
able information concerning the morphology of the species. The postorbital lies
on the side of the intertemporal bar, as in the type specimen, and has
icm
Fig 33 - 4-B. Emydops brachyops. Type specimen SAM-708 from ‘The Gouph’, Beaufort
vest. sight ramus of lower jaw in dorsal and lateral views. C. Emydops sp. SAM-10172, from
Dunedin, Beaufort West. Lower jaw in dorsal view.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA Pill
practically no dorsal skull roof exposure. The maxilla rises fairly high on the
side of the snout and confines the lacrimal to the anterior border of the orbit.
In ventral view the vomer is seen to border only the anterior part of the
interpterygoidal vacuity, but does not form a trough-like anterior extension of
the vacuity. The palatal portion of the palatine is a horizontal plate transversely
extended to form a posterior extension of the premaxillary secondary palate,
making a brief contact with the premaxilla. The posterior border of the palatal
portion is concave. The palatal rim is interrupted at the level of the caniniform
process and a medial embayment is formed anterior to the weak caniniform
Fig. 34. Emydops parvus. Type specimen BMNH R4960, from Bruintjieshoogte, Somerset
East. A-B. Skull in dorsal and ventral views. C. Detailed palatal view.
252 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
process. A raised ledge is formed medial to the caniniform process. A single
small tooth lies behind the process, close to the alveolar border.
The lower jaws in the type specimen of Emydops brachyops (Broom),
SAM-708 (Fig. 33A-B), and in SAM-10172 (Fig. 33C) indicate that a short,
shallow groove extends back along the dorsal edge of the dentary behind the
symphysial region.
Diagnosis
Taking into account the information gained from the various species of
Emydops described above (see also Figs 34-35), it is possible to formulate the
following generic diagnosis.
Small dicynodonts with broad intertemporal region and wide parietal
exposure on the skull roof. Palatine meets posterior border of premaxilla and is
transversely enlarged into a horizontal plate with a concave posterior border.
Anterior trough-like extension of the interpterygoidal vacuity on to the vomer-
ine septum short or absent. Embayment in palatal rim anterior to caniniform
process. Interpterygoidal crest weak, not continued on to ventral surface of
anterior pterygoid ramus. Dentary shelf prominent. Anterior symphysial region
of dentary drawn up into a sharp cutting edge. Shallow groove on dorsal edge
of dentary behind symphysis.
Related genera
Cluver (19745) has discussed the possible relationships of Emydops, Myo-
saurus, Myosauroides and Cistecephalus. His conclusion that the last three
genera are probably quite closely related and may have arisen from an
Emydops-like ancestor, is accepted here.
Genus Kingoria Cox, 1959
Diagnosis
This genus (Figs 36-38) has recently been reviewed by Cluver & Hotton
(1981). Their diagnosis with minor modifications will be used here.
Medium-sized dicynodonts (average skull length 160 mm), jaws lacking
teeth altogether or bearing a single pair of maxillary tusks. Parietals exposed
between postorbitals behind pineal foramen. Septomaxilla recessed within
opening of naris, maxilla rises high on the side of the snout to meet nasal. Low
boss formed by nasal. Maxilla carries prominent caniniform process. Rear of
caniniform process extended as a keel to level of ectopterygoid. Palatal rim
continued without interruption on to anterior blade of caniniform process.
Palatal portion of palatine very small, restricted to border of choanal depres-
sion but making contact with greatly expanded premaxilla. Vomers form short
septum in interpterygoidal fossa. Ectopterygoid large, separating pterygoid
from maxilla. Fused dentaries taper to form rounded anterior tip of lower jaw,
no dentary tables present. Dorsal edge of dentary narrow, lateral dentary shelf
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 253
Max.
EES |
1 cm
Fig. 35. Emydops sp. SAM-11060, from Leeuwkloof, Beaufort West. A—B. Skull in dorsal
and ventral views.
widely expanded. Mandibular fenestra reduced or absent. Angular forms sharp
ventral keel behind reflected lamina.
Related genera
The Lower Triassic genus Kombuisia (Hotton 1974) may be related to
Kingoria. Features such as the very small contribution of the palatine to the
secondary palate, the large ectopterygoid separating maxilla and pterygoid, the
prominent lateral dentary shelf, and absence of the postfrontal may ally the two
genera. Kombuisia has several specialized characters of its own, and Hotton
(1974) discussed possible relationships between these two genera.
PHYLOGENETIC ANALYSIS OF RELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN
PERMIAN DICYNODONT GENERA
Introduction
Having established generic diagnoses of several Permian dicynodont gen-
era, an attempt to draw up a scheme of the relationships between these genera
may be made. Not all the characters used in the generic diagnoses prove to be
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 36. Kingoria nowacki. Skull in dorsal view. (After Cox 1959.)
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA UES)
Fig. 37. Kingoria nowacki. Skull and lower jaw in lateral view. (After Cox 1959.)
useful in constructing a phylogeny. The characters that are useful are shown
below in the character suites. Shared derived characters, where these can be
determined, have been used to link related groups. The primitive condition for
dicynodonts is taken to be represented most closely by Venjukovia (Efremov
1940).
Venjukovia is from Zone II of the Upper Permian of Russia and has been
implicated in the evolution of dicynodonts by several workers (Watson 1948;
Olson 1962; Tchudinov 1965; Barghusen 1976).
Venjukovia (Fig. 39) exhibits several features that are primitive for therap-
sids: the premaxillae are paired, the anterior dentition is present, the interptery-
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
GN
3cm
. (After Cox 1959.)
iew
in ventral v
Skull
Ie
k
la hOwacC
38. Kingor
S
Fig.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA Di
den. add. fos. ref.l.
a)
2cm
Fig. 39. Venjukovia sp. A-B. Skull in dorsal and ventral views. C. Skull and lower jaw in
lateral view. (After Barghusen 1976.)
258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
goidal vacuity lies wholly between the pterygoids, the adductor musculature
does not extend far forward on the lower jaw, the secondary palate is not
extensive compared with later dicynodonts, the lateral pterygoid process (trans-
verse flange) is pronounced, the ventral edge of the median vomer plate bears a
shallow trough, and there is no preparietal.
However, Venjukovia also exhibits derived characters that ally it with later
dicynodonts: the coronoid bone is absent, the preorbital region is short, the
lateral pterygoid process is modified and directed anteriorly, the zygoma is
emarginated ventrally, musculature attaches to the external surface of the
zygoma and to the external surface of the dentary posteriorly, the lower jaw
articulation is modified, possibly permitting a sliding action, there is an inci-
pient secondary palate with the palatine beginning to assume a role forming a
partial floor to the internal nares as it extends forward and slightly medially, a
mandibular fenestra is present, and palatal teeth are lost.
Some of these features may be adaptations for herbivorous feeding, for
example the short preorbital region, the reduction and modification of the
lateral pterygoid flange, and the low blunt teeth, and there is therefore the
possibility that they have evolved in parallel in Venjukovia and dicynodonts.
However, it is felt that in view of the number of derived characters linking
them, it is more parsimonious to assume that the two groups are related. As
stated at page 197, the derived character suite given above is taken to define
the Dicynodontia, and Venjukovia is therefore considered to be a dicynodont.
Venjukovia is here taken to represent an initial stage in the evolution of
the later dicynodont groups, and is used for comparison with these later forms
that express more fully the dicynodont characters outlined in the Introduction
(p. 196).
Little more can be said about Venjukovia until a full description is
published, since the present authors do not have access to the type specimens.
Otsheria netzvetajevi is another Russian taxon that has been implicated in
dicynodont evolution. It is from the Ocher deposits (early Upper Permian) and
was described by Tchudinov (1960). It resembles Venjukovia in certain
respects, such as preorbital shortening and the emarginated zygoma, and these
features indicate dicynodont affinity. The lateral pterygoid process is stronger
in Otsheria and the palatine is not incorporated into the secondary palate, but
the premaxilla extends further back to produce an incipient secondary palate.
As with Venjukovia, primary type material could not be examined and,
although Oftsheria is here considered to be related to the rest of the Dicynodon-
tia, precise relationships cannot be determined at present.
Character suites
The following character suites were drawn up for each of the major genera
described earlier. Each suite is designated with a letter and these letters appear
on the suggested cladogram along the relevant line as depicted in Figure 40. All
characters noted are thought to represent characters derived with respect to
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 259
Venjukovia, except suite A, which represents the characters of Venjukovia that
are derived with respect to primitive therapsids.
At certain points tentative functional explanations for the changes in
morphology are given.
Suite A
(i) Preorbital shortening,
(ii) the lateral pterygoid process reduced and anteriorly directed,
(iii) emargination of the zygoma,
(iv) loss of the coronoid bone,
(v) jaw articulation that permits a sliding action,
(vi) presence of a mandibular fenestra.
These features are probably related to the adoption of a herbivorous diet
and to the need to increase the moment arm of the jaw adductor musculature.
In contrast to other therapsids, dicynodonts have increased the moment arm
not by the acquisition of a coronoid process (DeMar & Barghusen 1973) but by
forward migration of the adductor insertion. This innovation is probably the
Key to understanding the specialized morphology of the dicynodont skull.
Migration of the adductor insertion has consequences on skull structure, such
as shortening of the tooth row and encroachment of the jaw musculature on the
preorbital region, which are avoided if a coronoid process develops. These
consequences seem to have been accepted in the dicynodont skull and capital-
ized upon to produce a masticatory mechanism that is suited to herbivorous
feeding (King 1981).
The lateral pterygoid process might have been reduced as a consequence
of, or as a prerequisite to, modification of the area of origin of the posterior
pterygoideus muscle. In early therapsids such as Titanophoneus, the ptery-
goideus musculature attached to the quadrate rami of the pterygoids, and also
to the posterior surfaces of the lateral pterygoid processes (Barghusen 1976).
Barghusen argues that the anterior pterygoid processes of dicynodonts are
modified (i.e. anteriorly directed) lateral pterygoid processes and assumes that
the origin of the pterygoideus musculature is carried forward as the lateral
pterygoid process is modified. A more anterior origin will enhance the forward-
pulling component of this muscle, provided that the insertion remains approxi-
mately in the same position. The forward component of the pterygoideus
musculature plays an important part in the masticatory cycle in protracting the
jaw (King 1981) and in stabilizing the jaw articulation (Crompton & Hotton
1967).
Suite B
(i) Loss of teeth on anterior part of maxilla,
(ii) medial migration of postcanine teeth,
(iii) shallow longitudinal depression on dorsal surface of dentary,
(iv) vomers form anterior part of interpterygoidal vacuity,
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(v) palatines enlarged and form part of secondary palate,
(vi) articular-quadrate joint elaborated to permit extensive sliding action
(vii) medial articular condyle enlarged,
(viii) reduction of preorbital region carried further,
(ix) temporal fenestra elongated,
(x) zygoma further emarginated,
(xi) development of a plate-like lateral extension of squamosal,
(xii) dentary with built-up area on its lateral surface for insertion of the
adductor musculature.
Features (i) to (ili) are associated with the acquisition of the dicynodont
horny beak, and features (iv) and (v) with the beginning of the secondary
palate. Features (vi) and (vii) probably reflect the elaboration of the dicyno-
dont masticatory pattern so that an extensive sliding action is permitted, but at
the same time the medial articular condyle is enlarged to help prevent disloca-
tion of the jaw-hinge (King 1981). Features (viii) to (xii) reflect the acquisition
of the typical dicynodont pattern of jaw musculature with a branch of the
adductor externus originating from the external surface of the zygoma, and a
branch originating more medially from the temporal region of the skull. The
insertion of the lateral branch would have been on the built-up lateral surface
of the dentary (Cluver 1975; Crompton & Hotton 1967; King 1981).
All the features may be seen in the context of improving the masticatory
system as an adaptation to the efficient mastication of plant material.
Suite C (defining Eodicynodon)
(i) Further loss of premaxillary teeth,
(ii) palatal exposure of the palatine bulbous and rugose,
(iii) mid-ventral palatal plate of the vomers swollen posterior to its
junction with medial premaxillary process,
(iv) pterygoids extended ventrally into a powerful rugose boss anterior to
internal carotid artery foramina,
(v) built-up area on dentary elaborated into a dorsal ledge projecting
above general surface of jaw ramus,
(vi) cleft in maxillary rim anterior to canine tusk.
Suite D
(i) Premaxillae fused,
(ii) lateral pterygoid process reduced,
(iii) insertion of lateral external adductor migrates forward,
(iv) stapedial foramen lost.
This stage represents further elaboration of the horny beak as more teeth
are lost. There is also further increase in the bite force as the insertion of the
adductor externus lateralis migrates anteriorly.
Reduction of the lateral pterygoid process may reflect a further modifica-
tion in the area of origin of the pterygoideus muscles, or it may indicate a
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 261
reduced role in the process of the bracing and control of movement of the
lower jaw (Barghusen 1976). This control might have been less essential since
the foodstuff ingested would have been passive and (more importantly) because
muscles were taking over the role of controlling jaw movements.
Suite E’ (defining Endothiodon)
(i) Teeth lie in a row posterior to the caniniform process, with the
anterior teeth on the premaxilla,
(ii) intertemporal region with postorbitals overlapping parietals,
(iii) front margin of palate bears deep median notch,
(iv) secondary palate vaulted,
(v) groove lateral to upper tooth row,
(vi) anterior portion of lower jaw forms a sharp beak,
(vii) lower jaw bears long teeth in a row,
(viii) lower jaw bears dorsal dentary trough lateral to tooth row.
Suite F
(i) Premaxillary teeth lost,
(ii) palatines extended medially and become incorporated into the rear of
the secondary palate.
Suite G
(i) Longitudinal groove in dorsal edge of dentary modified into a deep,
thin-walled sulcus.
The real function of this groove is at present obscure but it is most
probably implicated either with the attachment of the horny beak (King 1981)
or with the adductor muscle insertion (Crompton & Hotton 1967; Cluver 1971).
In either case it would be involved with improvement of the feeding mechan-
ism.
Suite H (defining Pristerodon)
(i) Built-up area on dentary enlarged into prominent dentary shelf,
(ii) palatine large and leaf-like and receives bite of lower teeth,
(iii) palatal teeth arranged in short row at an angle to longitudinal axis of
palate.
Suite I
(i) Dentary built up dorsally into tables in front of dentary sulcus,
(ii) maxillary rim extended ventrally, forming a close fit with lower jaw
symphysis when closed,
(iii) anterior premaxillary ridges present.
These changes probably represent adaptations to a feeding pattern with
precise cutting and crushing actions between upper and lower beaks.
The palatal area (including the palatines) is also used for mastication.
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Suite J
(i) Postcaniniform crest present,
(ii) nasal bosses present.
The extension of the palatal rim posteriorly as a sharp-edged crest could be
involved with mastication either by increasing the length of the cutting edge
between upper and lower beaks or by providing attachment for a muscular
cheek that would help to retain partly chewed plant matter during mastication
(Cluver 1975).
Suite K (defining Tropidostoma)
(i) Postorbitals overlap parietals, producing a narrow intertemporal
region, where the parietal exposure lies within a groove.
Many specimens of Tropidostoma are tuskless but retain the other features
of the genus. It is not clear whether this constitutes a sexual dimorphism or not.
Suite L
(i) Postcanine teeth lost,
(ii) tusks lost,
(iii) vomerine trough closes and vomerine septum becomes narrow.
The second feature may be related either to loss of a secondary sexual
feature or with modification of the feeding mechanism perhaps associated with
the complete loss of the postcanine teeth.
Suite M (defining Rhachiocephalus)
(i) Increase in size,
(ii) presence of a pineal boss,
(iii) narrow intertemporal region with postorbitals tending to meet behind
the pineal boss.
Suite N (defining Oudenodon)
(i) Anterior extension of the interpterygoidal vacuity short, vomerine
septum short.
Suite O
(i) Labial fossa present,
(ii) postcanine teeth lost,
(iii) vomerine septum narrow,
(iv) intertuberal ridge present.
Suite P (defining Aulacephalodon)
(i) Parietal with wide exposure on skull roof,
(il) postorbital narrow and closely applied to the steep-sided inter-
temporal bar,
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 263
(iii) elaborate nasal bosses present,
(iv) skull broad,
(v) zygoma bears boss,
(vi) spur of jugal ascends into postorbital bar.
Pelanomodon is very similar to Aulacephalodon except that it is tuskless
and has lost the anterior palatal premaxillary ridges. The exact relationship to
Aulacephalodon has not yet been determined.
Suite Q (defining Dicynodon)
(i) Narrow intertemporal region,
(ii) palatal exposure of palatine flat,
(iii) lower jaw bears lateral dentary ledge.
Triassic representatives of the Dicynodon line.
Genera such as Lystrosaurus, Kannemeyeria, etc., possess features of the
Dicynodon line and have their own derived features:
(i) Basicranial axis shortened,
(ii) snout deepened,
(iii) snout lengthened,
(iv) overall size increased.
Suite R
(i) Size of palatal exposure of palatine reduced,
(ii) marginal postcanine teeth lost.
The palatine area was probably not used so extensively for mastication,
which instead took place on the maxilla medial to the tusk or caniniform
process.
Suite S
(i) Maxilla bears an embayment anterior to caniniform process or tusk.
The embayment might have arisen as a result of the maxilla being enlarged
medially to form new crushing areas for the lower jaw, or it might have served
for better attachment of the horny beak.
Suite T
(i) Built-up area on dentary dorsally placed and forms dentary shelf,
(ii) anterior edge of symphysis drawn up into sharp cutting edge,
(iii) vomerine septum short and narrow,
(iv) palate bears grooves either side of median pre-maxillary ridge.
Suite U
(i) Teeth of upper jaw reduced,
(ii) anterior rami of pterygoids straight and elongate,
(iii) basicranial region shortened.
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Suite V (defining Myosaurus)
(i) Absence of teeth in upper and lower jaws,
(ii) medial extent of palatine small so that palatine is confined to lateral
border of choanal depression,
(iii) anterior border of orbit extends inward to close off back of snout.
Suite W (defining Emydops)
(i) Palatal exposure of palatine a flat, horizontal plate with concave
posterior border.
Suite X (defining Cistecephalus)
(i) Palatines reduced posteriorly and premaxilla extends back beyond
root of zygoma,
(ii) stapedial foramen present,
(111) fossae present at the base of zygoma,
(iv) interpterygoid vacuity reduced or lost,
(v) skull roof wide,
(vi) teeth absent.
Suite Y
(i) Maxillary embayment extended into a notch,
(ii) dorsal longitudinal dentary groove lost,
(iii) maxillary rim extended ventrally to form caniniform process.
Suite Z (defining Diictodon)
(i) Absence of postcanine teeth,
(ii) anterior part of palatal exposure of palatines greatly reduced,
(iii) dentary table prominent with medial edge built up higher than lateral
edge,
(iv) built-up area on lateral surface of dentary weak and low down on
jaw,
(v) anterior palatal ridges present,
(vi) postorbitals overlap parietals producing a narrow intertemporal
region,
(vii) caniniform process blade-like,
(viii) ventral keel on anterior pterygoid ramus.
Suite A‘ (defining Robertia)
(i) Built-up area on lateral surface of dentary ledge-like and occludes
mandibular fenestra.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 265
Suite B’ (defining Kingoria)
(i) Absence of postcanine teeth,
(ii) dentary shelf large,
(iii) dorsal edge of lower jaw sharp,
(iv) palatal exposure of palatine reduced so that it is confined to lateral
border of choana,
(v) mandibular fenestra closed up,
(vi) lower beak sharp and shovel-shaped,
(vii) thin plate-like ventral extension to anterior pterygoid ramus,
(viii) maxilla bears ventral keel posterior to caniniform process.
A cladogram (Fig. 40) has been drawn up, using the character suites set
out above.
Robertia
4 Emydops
A Diictodon \
Aulacephalodon Xe AUr Myosaurus
Triassic forms U .Cistecephalus
spikes ioe Y pe
T
N ..-Rhachiocephalus
Pristerodon
i an Dicynodon
Voter S
H
on
Endothiodon
> G R
Eodicynodon
. E
jukovia
Venju C
Ve"
B
A
en
Fig. 40. Cladistic interpretation of the relationships between Permian Dicynodontia.
A CLASSIFICATION OF DICYNODONTS
In erecting the following classification from the cladogram, each successive
group diverging from the main axis (A—-B') has been given equal rank as a
suborder. Along each main divergent line secondary divergent lines have been
given the rank of superfamily, tertiary lines that of family, and quaternary lines
that of subfamily.
266 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
This sequential method of classification has been used, first, because the
detailed taxonomic picture of dicynodonts is far from complete and, secondly,
because any classification should be able to accommodate newly discovered
specimens. It should be possible to add other taxa to this classification at a
future date without disturbing its hierarchical order. This procedure also
obviates the necessity of proposing several completely new taxon names.
Some notes are necessary concerning the use of the term Dicynodontia
instead of Anomodontia, the raising of the Dicynodontia to subordinal status,
and the inclusion of the Venjukoviamorpha within the Dicynodontia.
Owen (1859) erected the order Anomodontia for animals without teeth
(except possibly tusks or caniniform processes) with a parietal foramen, two
nostrils, and a fixed tympanic pedicle. He included three families within the
order: the Dicynodontia (Dicynodon and Ptychognathus = Lystrosaurus), the
Cryptodontia (Oudenodon), and the Gnathodontia (Rhynchocephalus).
In 1861 Owen modified this classification, excluding the Gnathodontia and
including the Cynodontia for forms such as Galesaurus. Owen in 1876 again
modified this classification, renaming the Dicynodontia the Bidentalia and
including only this family, the Dicynodontia, and a new family the Endothio-
dontia (for Endothiodon).
Seeley (1889, 1894), Lydekker (1890), and Nicholson & Lydekker (1899)
included further families within the Anomodontia, but Broom (1905) stressed
that many of these families did not fall within the original definition that Owen
used for the Anomodontia, and suggested that only forms allied to Dicynodon
(i.e. Oudenodon, Lystrosaurus, etc.) should be included.
Broom’s (1905) classification of Therapsida stood with little change until
the classification of Watson & Romer (1956). These authors divided the
Therapsida into the Theriodontia and the Anomodontia, which included the
‘dicynodonts’ (equivalent to Broom’s (1905) Anomodontia), the dromasaurs,
and the herbivorous dinocephalians. A new infraorder, the Dicynodontia, was
erected within the suborder Anomodontia. The present authors feel that the
evidence for dividing the herbivorous from the carnivorous dinocephalians, and
for associating the herbivorous forms with the dicynodonts is very inconclusive,
and propose that all dinocephalians be retained within the taxon Dinocephalia
and that this taxon and the Dicynodontia be considered as independent
suborders of the order Therapsida. It is further suggested that since the term
Dicynodontia is now in common usage it be used in preference to Anomodon-
tia, which would become a nomen nudum.
Venjukovia has been included (with Oftsheria) in the infraorder Venju-
koviamorpha (Romer 1966). This infraorder has equal ranking with the Dicy-
nodontia in Romer’s classification. It was argued earlier in the present work
that Venjukovia exhibits features that link it closely with dicynodonts and that it
should be included within the Dicynodontia. Accordingly, the infraorder
Venjukoviamorpha is here included in the suborder Dicynodontia.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA
Order THERAPSIDA
Suborder DICYNODONTIA nov.
Infraorder WENJUKOVIAMORPHA
1966
Infraorder EODICYNODONTIA nov.
Infraorder ENDOTHIODONTIA nov.
Romer,
Infraorder PRISTERODONTIA nov.
Superfamily DICYNODONTOIDEA nov.
Family Cryptodontidae Owen, 1859
Subfamily Tropidostominae nov.
Subfamily Pelorocyclopinae
van Hoepen, 1934
Subfamily Oudenodontinae nov.
Family Aulacephalodontidae nov.
Subfamily Aulacephalodontinae
Toerien, 1953
Subfamily Pelanomodontinae nov.
Family Dicynodontidae Owen, 1859
Family Kannemeyeriidae von Huene,
1948
Family Pristerodontidae nov.
Infraorder DIICTODONTIA nov.
Superfamily EMYDOPOIDEA nov.
Family Emydopidae nov.
Subfamily Emydopinae nov.
Subfamily Myosaurinae nov.
Family Cistecephalidae Toerien, 1953
Superfamily ROBERTOIDEA nov.
Family Robertiidae nov.
Family Diictodontidae nov.
Infraorder KINGORIAMORPHA nov.
267
Venjukovia Efremov, 1940
Otsheria Tchudinov, 1960
Eodicynodon Barry, 1974
Endothiodon Owen, 1876
Pachytegos Haughton, 1932
Chelydontops Cluver, 1975
Tropidostoma Seeley, 1889
Rhachiocephalus Owen, 1876
Oudenodon Owen, 1869
Aulacephalodon Owen, 1844
Pelanomodon Broom, 1938
Dicynodon Owen, 1845
Triassic forms
Pristerodon Huxley, 1868
Emyduranus Broom, 1921
Synostocephalus Broili &
Schroder, 1935
Emydops Broom, 1912
Myosaurus Haughton, 1917
Myosauroides Broom, 1941
Cistecephalus Owen, 1876
Cistecephaloides Cluver, 1974a
Kawingasaurus Cox, 1972
Robertia Boonstra, 1948
Diictodon Broom, 1913
Kingoria Cox, 1959
Kombuisia Hotton, 1974
268 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Incertae sedis
Gordonia Newton, 1893 (possibly related to Kingoria or Dicynodon)
Eosimops newtoni Broom, 1921
Cryptocynodon simus Seeley, 1894
Koupia Boonstra, 1948
Brachyuraniscus Broili & Schréder, 1935
Broilius Toerien, 1953
Ceraetulurus mirabilis Broom, 1931
Palemydops Broom, 1921 (related to Emydops)
Aulacocephalus pithecops Seeley, 1898
Compsodon helmoedi van Hoepen, 1934
Eurychororhinus boonstrai Broili & Schréder, 1935 (possibly Pristerodon)
Prodicynodon Broom, 1904 (possibly related to Endothiodon or Chelydon-
tops)
Taognathus megalodon Broom, 1911
Eumantellia mirus Broom, 1911
Newtonella platyceps Broom, 1937
Heuneus oudebergenis Toerien, 1953
Premaxillary teeth have been recorded in Eumantellia, Newtonella and Heuneus. If
correct, this will warrant a new infraorder. However, it is more likely that these are
maxillary teeth that happened to erupt through the premaxilla. Little more can be said
about the status of these forms until more material has been prepared.
Parringtoniella broomi Toerien, 1953
Emydorhinus fragilis Broom, 1935 (type specimen cannot be traced)
Emydorhinus sciuroides Broom, 1921, 1935
Dicynodontoides Broom, 1940 (probably Kingoria, see Cluver & Hotton
1981)
Digaladon Broom & Robinson, 1948 (possibly a juvenile Aulacephalodon)
Haughtoniana magna Boonstra, 1938 (type specimen is indeterminate)
Anomodon Keyser, 1975 (erected on the basis of the description of
Dicynodon heunei Broili & Schréder, 1937; may be related to Rob-
ertia or Diictodon)
Storthyggognathus Janensch, 1952 (probably related to Pristerodon).
CONCLUSIONS
The classification erected in the present work is considered to be definitive
in that it is hoped that its major divisions will not change. However, new taxa
must be incorporated as they become known or better understood and this will
inevitably lead to slight modifications in the classification. The need for specific
revision within the Dicynodontia remains very evident. This has not been
attempted in the present work and, in addition, certain genera have been left
incertae sedis because they are either badly preserved or inadequately prepared.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 269
It is hoped that future modifications of the classification will be based on
well-prepared primary type material.
With the establishment of a definitive classification, the groups involved
can be used in a more meaningful way in ecological, palaeogeographical, and
functional anatomical contexts.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
This revision owes much to the co-operation and helpfulness of a number
of people responsible for fossil reptile collections. Specimens were studied at
the American Museum of Natural History, New York (Dr E. S. Gaffney),
Bernard Price Institute, Johannesburg (Drs M. A. Raath and J. W. Kitching),
British Museum (Natural History), London (Dr A. J. Charig), National
Museum of Natural History, Washington (Dr N. Hotton III), Rubidge Collec-
tion, Graaff-Reinet (Mr R. Rubidge), and Transvaal Museum, Pretoria (Drs
C. K. Brain and E. S. Vrba). Thanks are due to the authorities of these
institutions and to the curators mentioned. We thank Mr R. D. F. Oosthuizen
of Zwartskraal, Prince Albert, for the extended loan of new Eodicynodon
material, and Mr A. T. Bremner of Graaff-Reinet who was responsible for the
discovery of several of the specimens used in this study. We were assisted in the
preparation of specimens by Mr Peter Whybrow of the British Museum
(Natural History), and Mrs Ione Rudner (acid preparation 1970-1), Miss
Annelise Crean and Mrs Eileen Blaeske of the South African Museum, Cape
Town. Mr Clive Booth, also of the South African Museum, took the photo-
graphs. We benefited from helpful discussions with Drs J. A. Hopson, T. S.
Kemp and A. R. I. Cruickshank, but we are responsible for any shortcomings
in the paper.
Travel grants were awarded by the South African Council for Scientific and
Industrial Research and the Trustees of the South African Museum (M. A.
Cluver), and the Royal Society and Lockey Bequest (G. M. King). We wish to
record our sincere thanks to these bodies without whose support the project
could not have been undertaken.
REFERENCES
BARGHUSEN, H. R. 1976. Notes on the adductor jaw musculature of Venjukovia, a primitive
anomodont therapsid from the Permian of the USSR. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 249-260.
Barry, T. H. 1972. Terrestrial vertebrate fossils from Ecca-defined beds in South Africa. Jn:
INTERNATIONAL UNION OF GEOLOGICAL SCIENCES. Proceedings and papers, Gondwana
Symposium 2, South Africa 1970: 653-659. Pretoria: C.S.I.R.
Barry, T. H. 1974. A new dicynodont ancestor from the Upper Ecca (lower Middle Permian)
of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 64: 117-136.
Barry, T. H. 1975. Affinities and systematic position of the South African lower Middle
Permian dicynodonts (Therapsida: Dicynodontidae). In: INTERNATIONAL UNION OF GEOLO-
GICAL SCIENCES. Gondwana geology. Papers presented at the Third Gondwana Symposium,
Canberra, Australia, 1973. Ed. by K. S. W. Campbell: 475-479. Canberra: Australian
National University Press.
—~a
2710 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Boonstra, L. D. 1938. A report on some Karroo reptiles from the Luangwa Valley, Northern
Rhodesia. Q. JI. geol. Soc. Lond. 94: 371-384.
BoonstrA, L. D. 1948. On the anomodont reptiles from the Tapinocephalus zone of the Karroo
system. Jn: RoyAL SocteTy OF SouTH AFRICA. Robert Broom Commemorative Volume:
57-64. Cape Town: Royal Society of South Africa (Special Publications).
Boonstra, L. D. 1953. Descriptions of the palaeontological material collected by the South
African Museum and the Geological Survey of South Africa. 2. A report on a collection of
fossil reptilian bones from Tanganyika Territory. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 42: 5-18.
Broiti, F. & ScHRODER, J. 1935. Beobachtungen an Wirbeltieren der Karrooformation. XII.
Uber einige primitive Anomodontier-Schadel aus den unteren Beaufort-Schichten. Sber.
bayer. Akad. Wiss. 1935: 223-278.
Brot, F. & ScHRODER, J. 1937. Beobachtungen an Wirbeltieren der Karrooformation.
XXVIII. Uber einige neue Anomodontier aus der Tapinocephalus-Zone. Sber. bayer.
Akad. Wiss. 1937: 118-168.
Broom, R. 1904. On two new endothiodont genera (Prodicynodon and Opisthoctenodon). Rec.
Albany Mus. 1: 68-73.
Broom, R. 1905. On the use of the term Anomodontia. Rec. Albany Mus. 1905: 266-269.
Broom, R. 1911. On some new South African Permian reptiles. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1911:
1073-1082.
Broom, R. 1912. On some new fossil reptiles from the Permian and Triassic beds of South
Africa. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1912: 859-876.
Broom, R. 1913. On some new genera and species of Dicynodont reptiles, with notes on a few
others. Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. His. 32: 441-457.
Broom, R. 1915. On the anomodont genera, Pristerodon and Tropidostoma. Proc. zool. Soc.
Lond. 1915: 355-361.
Broom, R. 1921. On some new genera and species of anomodont reptiles from the Karroo beds
of South Africa. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1921: 647-674.
Broom, R. 1931. Notices of some new genera and species of Karroo fossil reptiles. Rec. Albany
Mus. 4: 161-166.
Broom, R. 1932. The mammal-like reptiles of South Africa and the origin of mammals. London:
Witherby.
Broom, R. 1935. On some new genera and species of Karroo fossil reptiles. Ann. Transv. Mus.
18: 55-72.
Broom, R. 1937. A further contribution to our knowledge of the fossil reptiles of the Karroo.
Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1937: 299-318.
Broom, R. 1938. On two new Anomodont genera. Ann. Transv. Mus. 19: 247-280.
Broom, R. 1940. Some new Karroo reptiles from the Graaff-Reinet district. Ann. Transv. Mus.
20: 71-87.
Broom, R. 1941. Some new Karroo reptiles with notes on a few others. Ann. Transv. Mus. 20:
194-213.
Broom, R. & Georce, M. 1950. Some new anomodont reptiles in the Bernard Price collection.
S. Afr. J. Sci. 46: 275-278.
Broom, R. & Haucuton, S. H. 1917. Some new species of Anomodontia (Reptilia). Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 12: 119-125.
Broom, R. & Rosinson, J. T. 1948. Some new fossils from the Karroo beds of South Africa.
Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 118: 392-407.
CLuver, M. A. 1971. The cranial morphology of the dicynodont genus Lystrosaurus. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 56: 155-274.
Ciuver, M. A. 1974a. The skull and mandible of a new cistecephalid dicynodont. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 64: 137-155.
Ciuver, M. A. 1974b. The cranial morphology of the Lower Triassic dicynodont Myosaurus
gracilis. Ann. §. Afr. Mus. 66: 35-54.
CiuveR, M. A. 1975. A new dicynodont reptile from the Tapinocephalus zone (Karroo Sytem,
Beaufort Series) of South Africa, with evidence of the jaw adductor musculature. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 67: 7-23.
CLuver, M. A. & Horron, N. 1981. The genera Dicynodon and Diictodon and their bearing on
the classification of the Dicynodontia (Reptilia, Therapsida). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 83:
99-146.
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA DTA.
Cox, C. B. 1959. On the anatomy of a new dicynodont genus with evidence of the position of
the tympanum. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 132: 321-367.
Cox, C. B. 1964. On the palate, dentition and classification of the fossil reptile Endothiodon
and related genera. Am. Mus. Novit. 2171: 1-25.
Cox, C. B. 1972. A new digging dicynodont from the Upper Permian of Tanzania. In: Joysey,
K. A. & Kemp, T. S. eds. Studies in vertebrate evolution: 173-189. Edinburgh: Oliver &
Boyd.
Crompton, A. W. & Horton, N. 1967. Functional morphology of the masticatory apparatus of
two dicynodonts (Reptilia, Therapsida). Postilla 109: 1-51.
DemMar, R. & BARGHUSEN, H. R. 1973. Mechanics and the evolution of the synapsid jaw.
Evolution 26: 622-637.
EFremMov, I. A. 1940. Preliminary description of new Permian and Triassic terrestrial verte-
brates from the USSR. Trudy paleont. Inst. 10: 1-140.
Hammer, W. R. & CoscrirF, J. W. 1981. Myosaurus gracilis, an anomodont reptile from the
Lower Triassic of Antarctica and South Africa. J. Palaeont. 55: 410-424.
Haucuton, S. H. 1917. Descriptive catalogue of the Anomodontia with especial reference to
the samples in the South African Museum. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 12: 127-174.
Haucaton, S. H. 1932. On a collection of Karroo vertebrates from Tanganyika territory. Q. J]
geol. Soc. Lond. 38: 634-668.
Haucuton, S. H. & Brink, A. S. 1954. A bibliographic list of Reptilia from the Karroo beds of
Africa. Palaeont. afr. 2: 1-187.
Hotron, N. 1974. A new dicynodont (Reptilia, Therapsida) from the Cynognathus zone
deposits of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 64: 157-165.
HUENE, F. von. 1942. Die Anomodontier des Ruhuhu-Gebietes in der Tuibinger Sammlung.
Palaeontographica 94: 154-184.
HUuENE, F. von. 1948. Short review of the lower tetrapods. Jn: Royat SoctETy oF SOUTH
ArFricA. Robert Broom Commemorative Volume: 65-106. Cape Town: Royal Society of
South Africa (Special Publications).
Huxtey, T. H. 1868. On Saurosternon baini and Pristerodon mcKayi, two new fossil lacertilian
reptiles from South Africa. Geol. Mag. 5: 201-205.
JANENSCH, W. 1952. Zwei neue Anomodontier mit Molaren und Crista Masseterica aus den
Karroo-Schichten Stidafrika. Paldont. Z. 26: 218-228.
Keyser, A. W. 1969. A re-evaluation of the systematics and morphology of certain anomodont
Therapsida. Unpublished Ph.D. thesis, University of the Witwatersrand.
Keyser, A.W. 1972. A re-evaluation of the systematics and morphology of certain anomodont
Therapsida. Palaeont. afr. 14: 15-16.
Keyser, A. W. 1973. A re-evaluation of the genus Tropidostoma Seeley. Palaeont. afr. 16:
25-35.
Keyser, A. W. 1975. A re-evaluation of the cranial morphology and systematics of some
tuskless Anomodontia. Mem. geol. Surv. Rep. S. Afr. 67: 1-110.
KEYSER, A. W. & CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1979. The. origins and classification of Triassic
dicynodonts. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 82: 81-108.
Kinc, G. M. 1981. The functional anatomy of a Permian dicynodont. Phil. Trans. R. Soc.
Lond. (B) 291: 243-322.
KITCHING, J. W. 1977. The distribution of the Karoo vertebrate fauna. Mem. Bernard Price
Inst. palaeont. Res. 1: 1-131.
LYDEKKER, R. 1890. Catalogue of the fossil Reptilia and Amphibia in the British Museum
(Natural History) 4. London: British Museum (Natural History).
Newton, E. T. 1893. On some new reptiles from the Elgin sandstones. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (B)
184: 431-503.
NicHotson, H. A. & LYDEKKER, R. 1899. A manual of palaeontology 2. London & Edinburgh:
William Blackwood & Sons.
OLson, E. C. 1937. The skull structure of a new anomodont. J. Geol. 45: 851-858.
Otson, E. C. 1962. Late Permian terrestrial vertebrates of USA and USSR. Trans. Am. phil.
Soc. 52: 1-224.
Owen, R. 1844. Description of certain fossil crania, discovered by A. G. Bain, Esq., in
sandstone rocks at the south-eastern extremity of Africa, referable to different species of
an extinct genus of Reptilia (Dicynodon), and indicative of a new tribe or suborder of
Sauria. Proc. geol. Soc. Lond. 4: 500-504.
272 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Owen, R. 1845. Report on the reptilian fossils of South Africa. Part 1. Description of certain
fossil crania, discovered by A. G. Bain in sandstone rocks at the south eastern extremity of
Africa, referable to an extinct genus of Reptilia (Dicynodon), and indicative of a new tribe
or sub-order of Sauria. Trans. geol. Soc. Lond. 7: 59-84.
Owen, R. 1859. On the orders of fossil and recent Reptilia, and their distribution in time. Rep.
Br. Ass. Advmt Sci. 1859: 153-166.
Owen, R. 1860. On some reptilian fossils from South Africa. Q. Jl geol. Soc. Lond. 16: 49-63.
Owen, R. 1861. Palaeontology. 2nd edition. Edinburgh.
Owen, R. 1876. Descriptive and illustrated catalogue of the fossil Reptilia of South Africa in the
collection of the British Museum. London: British Museum (Natural History).
Romer, A. S. 1966. Vertebrate Palaeontology. 3rd edition. Chicago: The University Press.
RuBIDGE, B. S. & OELOFSEN, B. W. 1981. Reptilian fauna from Ecca rocks near Prince Albert,
South Africa. S. Afr. J. Sci. 77: 425.
SEELEY, H. G. 1889. On the anomodont Reptilia and their allies. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (B) 180:
215-296.
SEELEY, H. G. 1894. Researches on the structure, organization and classification of the fossil
Reptilia. Part IX, section 1: on the Therosuchia. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (B) 185: 987-1018.
SEELEY, H. G. 1898. On Oudenodon (Aulacocephalus) pithecops from the Dicynodon beds of
East London, Cape Colony. Geol. Mag. 5: 107-110.
TCHUDINOV, P. K. 1960. Upper Permian therapsids of the Ezhovo locality. Paleon. J. Paleon.
Inst. Acad. Sci. USSR. 4: 81-94.
TcuuDINov, P. K. 1965. New facts about the fauna of the Upper Permian of the USSR. J.
Geol. 73: 117-130.
ToERIEN, M. J. 1953. The evolution of the palate in South African Anomodontia and its
classificatory significance. Palaeont. afr. 1: 49-117.
TOLLMAN, S. M., Grine, F. E. & Haun, B. D. 1980. Ontogeny and sexual dimorphism in
Aulacephalodon (Reptilia, Anomodontia). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 159-186.
VAN Hoepen, E. C. N. 1934. Oor die indeling van die Dicynodontidae na aanleiding van nuwe
vorme. Paleont. Navors. nas. Mus. Bloemfontein 11: 67-101.
Watson, D. M. S. 1948. Dicynodon and its allies. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 118: 823-877.
Watson, D. M. S. & Romer, A. S. 1956. A classification of therapsid reptiles. Bull. Mus.
comp. Zool. Harv. 114: 37-89.
ABBREVIATIONS
add. fos. adductor fossa jug. jugal
ang. angular lab. fos. _ labial fossa
art. articular lac. lacrimal
b. boss lat. pal. f. lateral palatal fenestra
bas. basisphenoid ls. lateral shelf
boc. basioccipital max. maxilla
den. dentary max. gr. maxillary groove
den. gr. dentary groove no. notch
den. s. dentary sulcus op. opisthotic
den. t. dentary table orb. orbitosphenoid
ect. ectopterygoid pa. parietal
eoc. exoccipital pal. palatine
ept. epipterygoid pas. parasphenoid
for. mag. foramen magnum poc. postcaniniform crest
fr. frontal pfr. prefrontal
ioc. canal for internal carotid pm. premaxilla
__ artery po. postorbital
ip. interparietal pof. postfrontal
ipt. vac. interpterygoid vacuity pp. preparietal
itr. intertuberal ridge pro. prootic
RELATIONSHIPS OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA 273
presphenoid
pterygoid
posttemporal fenestra
quadrate
quadratojugal
reflected lamina
surangular
septomaxilla
supraoccipital
squamosal
stapes
tusk
to.
tab.
vo.
VII f.
AMNH
BMNH
ROZ
SAM
tooth
tabular
vomer
foramen for facial nerve
American Museum of Natural
History
British Museum
(Natural History)
Roy Oosthuizen Collection,
South African Museum
South African Museum
if
1)
4
,
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must ‘separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, 1.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
“Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
MICHAEL A. CLUVER
&
GILLIAN M. KING
A REASSESSMENT OF THE RELATIONSHIPS
OF PERMIAN DICYNODONTIA
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA) AND A
NEW CLASSIFICATION OF
DICYNODONTS
~s
? Ne i
ba
GLY 7. D
% 7 eee
Mm
w
INOSHLIWS
ap)
ae
oot
Se
wn
O
=
="
wad
ITHSONIAN
Wz Fad
Yee ,. ©
So, fi
GY Wa; CS
oe cee ae
(|
z
iz
*”
SMITHSONIAN
SAIuUVeaI I LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
NOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
ITHSONIAN
NOSHLIWS
KA,
ITHSONIAN
NOSHLINS S3JIYVYEIT LIBRARIES
THSONIAN
TLIC OV\RARIILAAL
SJINVUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION
NVINOSHLIWS
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
saiuvudiy
INSTITUTION
— te . Se > SQ F
= ae) = WS
Oy 1) Geen mn SN \S
= wn :
: eM ITHSONIAN
=
=
x
wey (22)
O
z
>
_ NWINOSHLIWS
OG Fa AS
tod ap)
: : Xy
: 2 SS
= ‘s
: 3. °S
p= | Fs,
i z
= o
2 5
> f= 4
24 =
pa YW
wp Z .
NOILNLILSN! NVINOSHLIWS
w Zz
= use
= Zz
Be O
Ww (ep)
O EG
Z i
> =
Pad (op)
NOILALILSNI
INSTITUTION
SMITHSONIAN
NOILANLILSNI
¥
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
LLB RAR EES
NOILNLILSNI
NVINOSHLINS
SJ!1YVYEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
i ee oe Be ll ee ee ee es ee
SAtYyVvus9l
@&im™ii¢aemm~seéeéntasaeammia
INSTITUTION
LIBRARIES
Sa1uvugiy
INSTITL
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
SSIMVUgIN
NVINOSHLIWS
<x SO1
ON pi
S3IIeV
x
l, ©
na Wasa
INSTITUTION
SAIYVYEIT LIBR
NVINOSHLIWS
NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION
SMITHSONIAN
NOILALILSNI
LIBRARIES
4%
NOILALILSNI
ARIES
*
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
” = w
ca cs =
a - oc
x 5, = Gaal
oc 5 oc
a = a
ae , O a
aly ‘Zz ay]
NVINOSHLINS SSIYVYG!IT LIBRARIES
fm lies z -
wo 2 ww
Be) S 0
> 2
m of m
n = wW
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
wn Zz . op)
= < = yy.
- ay ef j
z z 5 ee.
g : 8 Hb
Z = 2 f Vy: Y4/
es = >’
wo Z
SMITHSONIAN
INSTITL
NVINOSHLIV
SMITHSONIA
Ys:
SMITHSONIZ
NVINOSHLINS SSIYVYUEIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLI}
J &
= Ss S
Des
O-
Pe
SMITHSONI,
z 14
Oo ;
kK
>
ie
=
Y)
=
NVINOSHLI}
LIBRARIES SMITHSONI/
NOILALILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI
INSTITUTION
Saluvudit LIBRARIES
INSTELUT
wwvyudit
SMITHSONIAN
UTION
LIBRARIES
WVYd!)
SsalaVveato
UTION
NVINOSHLINS
vudit
;
UTION
NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION
Yugi
SMITHSONIAN
UTION
LIBRARIES
Vudl)
Saluvag!
HTUTION
5
DBD Wo
= SS
A KS
m SS
Ww
LIBRARIES) SMITHSONIAN
; =
i
a fe
WA i@)
~ Z
NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS
Es .
= s
CVn
= ~
= SX
LIBRARIES SMITH
INSTITUTION
NOILNLILSNI
SMITHSONIAN
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
SS
NVINOSHLIWS
NOILNLILSNI
SAIYVYREII_LIBRARI
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
NO}
NVINOSHLIWS
NVINOSHLINS
NOMLALIA
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
Ul
NOILALILSNI_ NVINO
INSTITUTION
INSTITUT
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
SONIAN
SaIuVYIN
LIBRARIES
s SaluVv¥dit
SHLINS
INSTITUTION
Say
INSTITUTION
SJiu¥vudi
NVINOSHLIWS
INSTITUTION
SAIYyvVudl
INSTITUTION NOILOLILSNI
INSTITUTION
SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION
SAIYyVvudl
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
4
NVINOSHLIWS
Saluvus
INSTITUT!
SIIUVUE
~ NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVUdtT
NVINOSHLIWS
LIBRARIES
|
INSTITUTION
NOILANLILSNI
NOILNLILSN
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVYdII
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
ie
SJINVNGIT
NVINOSHLINS SSIHYVYHYSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
NOILNLILSNI
LIBRAR TES
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION NOI[LNLILSNI
SSIUVYGIT LIBRARIES
Se eles alas Sieg.
NVINOSHLINS S31Y¥VUYdII
NVINOSHLIWS
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
<a
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
NOILNLILSNI
NOILNLILSNI
NOILNLILSNI SIIYVYdII
INSTITUTION
INSTITUTION
“INSTITUTION,
S Saiuvudit
_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES
“TANIA
9088 01206 6874
bale a cj ‘ $) .-)
rg sae e see > Aas
Ae, eS ; res R
eathey ans RS = ‘ : fe oe
Set Say on en ae b ‘ sy nae 3k ae
aa we * i
_e : : 3 é
ee Pd bt ok ta py ? <
Sige ee oF chy : ‘
eee a , ee : ;
tn" +
Pre ae ay ‘ 4a A ,
wee. Sea . Py Ca, .
Miner ye 5 ? :
Sel ewuR, Mew eh te F505 x.
say aan Ses NS A
Lo asty yeev ese: 2 a2 SP ee erg ie ye a rt
bE OTE OA By SEE ss ey thee © : 3 d F
er Taw pie a Tee 2a ze Raed ‘i ee
ete se eerie e m ?
ee ee ee ee a, oy
ag ee ks Dh ed a7 ; :
as ee eo .
oy Beene werAD . oe _
Aiken oo ale a
Bb ae Prok ys REG SAS wives ree F : : 4
Vet SOREERS SE ON F 4
as ee Hi ‘ : ‘
es .
‘ “ : as :
Sheba ae > ; 4 . Fi »
+ meee sy alees ree & 4 r : * So : ’
oes ie cat ors : :
gigas 13 3802 Se LY ersten : bi ae Bee | ie etd ‘
2 gon: Ee ies - ‘ ep P LE 4 a ’ j : £ : *
Ce eee 2 gi S 3 : 4 , F K am Le: erg raliple Peak . : 3 3 }
q ankg 4 Fs ae ’ \ gre} ci} 3 j :
5 ci peal wey ot wt, 5 A
A Ln Lae . : ‘ £ 3 aes ‘ 3
“Lemay oe yt eat & iS © yo ;
Ki wey : eat Fraser 4) rh * - : 2
Sn eS ¢ Pare fee Fie eee VENT we 4 3
. : ie ih y este A ry i
dai Pay - . Hi , a 2 ‘
=X cs Sis 7 ‘ + -ie 4 -
: orn soe th st a; ed ‘ “1 :
2 een, a _ - ° °
ay 3 : in 2 3 vt 4 . . ‘
. Pet . - a